Please review the Central requirements document located below. Please be prepared to discuss the differences in the central requirements document and our US requirements. There are many differences, so I’m expecting a lot of feedback.
ma2211
GRE_HSEQRequrements242centralrequirments.pdf
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGE
1 di/of 37
TITLE: AVAILABLE LANGUAGE: EN
File: GRE_HSEQ Requrements
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED by COLLABORATORS VERIFIED by VALIDATED by
PROJECT / PLANT EGP CODE
Region Function/Unit Type Number Version
GRE_ALL QSE GT 001 01
CLASSIFICATION
PUBLIC
COMPANY
CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED
UTILIZATION SCOPE
This document is property of Enel Green Power S.p.A. It is strictly forbidden to reproduce this document, in whole or in part, and to provide to others any related information without the previous written consent by Enel Green Power S.p.A.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Health, Safety, Environmental and Quality Requirements
00 22/11/2018 Issued
A. Lemme (EGP/HSEQ)
M. Galainena De Carlos (EGP/HSEQ)
E. Piolo (EGP/HSEQ)
A.Buonapace (EGP/HSEQ)
S. Martinez ( EGP/HSEQ)
Issue for Contractors.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
2 di/of 37
FOREWORD
This Technical Specification consists of a descriptive technical document (including technical attachments)
and a Bill of Quantities as a spreadsheet. The technical specification applies to all types of works as maintenance or new construction, services and supplies. During the time of the offer request, the Contractor may refer specifically to the items included in the Bill of Quantities already customized by the
requesting unit of Enel. For all contractors, it is however advisable to know the whole document independently from the single request, especially in those cases where the Contractor will have to carry out its activities in concomitance with other companies during the execution of the work.
This document is also used by Enel Management during design phase, to define the information on significant health safety and environmental common services that the Main Contractor and other Contractors/Sub Contractors (including Suppliers) shall address during the activities execution in the Enel
facility. The Enel Management will use this information in order to plan an appropriate distribution of the common services among the various Contractors in order to receive appropriate offer avoiding extra cost, double
service or over/sub-dimensioning services. Obviously, these suggestions are not applicable, when applicable Law requires these services for each contractor. Furthermore the Enel Operating Instructions for the activities attached in this document constitute the reference for the activities performed by the Contractors in Enel sites.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
3 di/of 37
INDEX
1. SECTION 1 - SCOPE AND APPLICATION ................................................................................... 6
1.1. purpose of the document ............................................................................................ 6
1.2. References ............................................................................................................... 6
1.3. definitions ................................................................................................................ 6
2. SECTION 2 – HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT COMMITMENT .............................................. 7
2.1. Enel Green Power Health, safety and environment philosophy .......................................... 7
3. SECTION 3 – HEALTH, SAFETY ENVIRONMENT AND QUALITY ORGANIZATION AND PROCEDURAL
REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 8
3.1. Contractor and Subcontractors HSE Organization ........................................................... 8
3.1.1. HSE Organization for Construction Sites ................................................................. 8
3.1.2. HSE Organization for Operation and Maintenance sites ............................................. 9
3.1.3. Complex Activities .............................................................................................. 9
3.2. Documents to be provided to the client ......................................................................... 9
3.2.1. Health and safety plan ......................................................................................... 9
3.2.2. Environmental Operational plan .......................................................................... 11
3.2.3. Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) and the Erosion Management Plan ............... 11
3.2.4. Medical surveillance .......................................................................................... 11
3.2.5. Personnel appointments & Training Certificates ..................................................... 11
3.3. Reporting to the client during the EXECUTION phase .................................................... 12
3.3.1. Safety, environmental and sustainability KPI’s ...................................................... 12
3.3.2. Incident Response and Reporting ........................................................................ 13
3.3.3. Incident Investigations ...................................................................................... 13
3.4. General REQUEST.................................................................................................... 13
3.4.1. Contractors vehicle Safety Requirements .............................................................. 13
3.4.2. Audits / Inspections / Meetings ........................................................................... 14
3.4.3. Drugs / Alcohol / Weapons ................................................................................. 14
3.4.4. Training ........................................................................................................... 14
3.4.5. Work shifts ...................................................................................................... 15
3.4.6. Night work ....................................................................................................... 15
3.4.7. Initiatives for safety improving ........................................................................... 16
4. SECTION 4 - HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ......................... 16
4.1. Cross aspects ......................................................................................................... 16
4.1.1. Communication system ...................................................................................... 16
4.1.2. Access to the worksite ....................................................................................... 17
In case the worksite is realized internally to an existing Plant the “access control System” shall
be based inside and at the entrance of the Power Plant. .................................................... 17
4.1.3. Visitors ............................................................................................................ 17
4.1.4. Facilities on site ................................................................................................ 17
4.1.5. Traffic management .......................................................................................... 19
4.1.6. Interferences management ................................................................................ 19
4.1.7. Construction of Medium and High Voltage aerial line .............................................. 20
4.1.8. Overhead Power-lines/ Underground Pipelines / Aboveground Flow-lines ................... 20
4.1.9. Cranes, Earth-moving Machinery, Forklifts ............................................................ 21
4.2. Focus on dedicated risk management ......................................................................... 22
4.2.1. Excavation and Trenching .................................................................................. 22
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
4 di/of 37
4.2.2. Hot Work activities ............................................................................................ 23
4.2.3. Electrical Safety ................................................................................................ 23
4.3. Hazardous materials management ............................................................................. 23
4.3.1. Explosive ......................................................................................................... 24
4.3.2. Asbestos.......................................................................................................... 24
4.4. Work at height ........................................................................................................ 24
4.4.1. Scaffolding and mobile scaffolding ....................................................................... 24
4.4.2. Lifting Platform ................................................................................................. 25
4.4.3. Fall lifeline ....................................................................................................... 25
4.4.4. Guardrail/Parapet ............................................................................................. 26
4.5. Tools and equipment ............................................................................................... 26
4.6. Sandblasting .......................................................................................................... 26
4.7. Painting ................................................................................................................. 27
4.8. Confined space ....................................................................................................... 27
4.9. Commissioning activity............................................................................................. 27
4.10. Personal Protection Equipment .................................................................................. 28
4.10.1. Head Protection ................................................................................................ 28
4.10.2. Eye Protection .................................................................................................. 28
4.10.3. Foot Protection ................................................................................................. 28
4.10.4. Hand Protection ................................................................................................ 29
4.10.5. Hearing Protection ............................................................................................ 29
4.10.6. Leg Protection .................................................................................................. 29
4.11. Warning signs/guardrail ........................................................................................... 29
4.12. Environmental aspects ............................................................................................. 29
4.12.1. Waste management plan ................................................................................... 29
4.12.2. Air emission ..................................................................................................... 30
4.12.3. Water management .......................................................................................... 30
4.12.4. Noise and Vibration ........................................................................................... 31
4.12.5. Biodiversity ...................................................................................................... 31
4.13. Sustainability worksite AND SUSTAINABLE PLANT ........................................................ 31
5. SECTION 5 - EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT ............................................................................... 32
5.1.1. First aid and Injured Management ....................................................................... 32
5.1.2. Fire ................................................................................................................. 32
5.1.3. Environmental hazards ...................................................................................... 33
5.1.4. Animals hazard ................................................................................................. 33
6. HEALTH ............................................................................................................................ 33
7. SECTION - ANNEXES ......................................................................................................... 34
ANNEX A - POLICIES AND OPERATIONAL INNSTRUCTIONS PACKAGES
ANNEX B- MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS OF WORKSITE
ANNEX C - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR EXCAVATED SOIL AND ROCKS MANAGEMENT AT EGP
CONSTRUCION SITES
ANNEX D - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANAGING AREAS OF WASTE/MATERIAL REMAINING AT
EGP WORKSITE
ANNEX E - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR WASHING OF VEHICLES AT WORKSITES
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
5 di/of 37
ANNEX F - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR REFUELLING OF VEHICLES AND MACHINERY AT WORKSITES
ANNEX G - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKS AT NIGHT IN EGP WORKSITES
ANNEX H - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF MV/HV AERIAL
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
6 di/of 37
1. SECTION 1 - SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1. PURPOSE OF THE DOCUMENT The purpose of this document is to provide contractors with essential information on
significant health safety and environmental aspects that the Contractor and other Subcontractors shall address during provision of their services for construction of an Enel Green Power facility or Operation & Maintenance Services. Contractor and subcontractors
shall use this information to design the projects (if any) or services, develop a suitable and sufficient documentation, list the costs of health and safety measures, maintain a safe and neat site, promoting best practice in environmental management. Each requirement included in this document must be implemented when the specific risk occur.
This document must be considered as integral part of the contract and if the conditions are not met by contractors and subcontractors the Client –in its sole discretion– has the necessary authority to apply, for each failure to fulfil any of the legal provisions on health
and safety at work in force at each time, the penalties as provided for contract. Contractor shall require Subcontractor(s) to previously accept, in writing, the contractual
obligations towards ENEL (legal, employment, confidentiality and security) and present relevant supporting evidence to ENEL. The Contract between Contractor and Subcontractors shall have same HSE contractual conditions included in contract between ENEL and the Contractor.
All the conditions and requirements detailed in the present document apply also to the possible further subcontracting level.
1.2. REFERENCES The following Policies/Procedures are in support of the above mentioned requirements:
- Enel Group Code of Ethics; - Enel Group Zero Tolerance of Corruption (ZTC) Plan; - EGP Quality, Safety and Environmental Policy dated 4th Sept. 2017
- Safety, Environment and Quality Management System Manual - GRE;
1.3. DEFINITIONS - Active Safety System: refers to any proximity safety alert device that prevents and
helps to avoid collisions and accidents - Client: means any person (or legal representative of the Company) for whom construction work is performed. - Contractor: means an employer appointed by the Client to perform construction work.
- Subcontractor: means an employer who is hired by a general Contractor to perform a specific task as part of the overall project. - Contractor for Camp Security : is the Contractor responsible dedicated for the
construction camp security service and site access procedure - Competent person: who has in respect of the work to be performed the required knowledge, training and experience and where applicable specific qualifications.
- Complex Activity: that may interfere with other internal or external site activities; work in height, confined spaces, electrical works, excavations, and moving components, including works which provide for the supply and use of pollutant substances.
- EGP: means Enel Green Power.
- HSE: Health, safety and environment. - HSE Cost: means the cost of the Health, Safety and Environment measures during the construction or operation & maintenance process.
- HSEQ: Safety, Environment and Quality Function. - HSEQ4U: is the mobile app that allows entering in the SAP EHSM EGP world. Through HSEQ4you will be possible to report findings, Incidents, Near Miss, Safety Observation and
also manage the action related in a digital and easy way for the Safety and Environment areas - Incident An unplanned and undesired event in which an injury or ill health occurred or could have occurred.
- High potential event: A High Potential Event is defined as any event (Accident, Restricted Duty, First Aid, Near Miss, safety observation) which immediately or subsequently causes or could causes several serious injuries and/or loss of human life.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
7 di/of 37
- Near miss: incident that did not result in injury or ill health but had the potential to
do so. - Safety observations: The identification of inappropriate or unsafe behavior or
hazardous condition that could lead to an incident occurred in a situation without worker or environment exposure. - Environmental incident: An event that impacts the environment causing negative
effects on it and requiring remedial actions on the affected environmental matrices (air, water, land, natural resources, flora, and fauna). - Environmental near miss: An unexpected environmental event confined or ended before reaching any environmental matrix and producing any potential impact..
- Environmental observations: The identification and documentation of a potential inappropriate or hazardous environmental condition that could lead to an incident or a near miss.
- CPE: Collective Protections Equipments, commonly referred to as “CPE” include devices that serve to protect from a specific hazard several individuals simultaneously and should always be implemented where the area to be secured is frequently used
- PPE: Personal Protections Equipments, commonly referred to as “PPE”, is equipment worn to minimize exposure to a variety of hazards. Examples of PPE include such items as gloves, foot and eye protection, protective hearing devices (earplugs, muffs) hard hats,
respirators and full body suits. - Work-Site: any place internal Power Plant area (Brownfield) or new yard (Greenfield) where a Contractor operate activities requested by the Client
- Isolated site camp: (for complex work) any worksite where the distance from cities
justify the presence of dormitory on site.
2. SECTION 2 – HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT COMMITMENT
2.1. ENEL GREEN POWER HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PHILOSOPHY Health and safety at work are part of our culture and they must be the distinctive trait of the conduct of every citizen of the Enel Group.
Enel Green Power aims at supporting environmental protection in the various phases of the development, construction and operation of renewable plants, consistently with its Safety and Environmental Policy.
All the initiatives that we carry out are aimed not only at ensuring the compliance of regulations and laws, but also at establishing top standards regarding safety at work and environmental protection in all the countries in which Enel Green Power operates, also by
spreading a significant amount of resources devoted to Safety, Environment and Quality and by sharing the best global practices. In fact, Enel Green Power has an Integrated Safety and Environmental Management System, in accordance with the international standard OHSAS 1800, ISO 14001 and ISO 9001. We
deal with Safety and Health management environmental and Quality issues with a systemic vision and aiming at a continuous improvement, both directly and indirectly, therefore centering our attention not only on our staff, but also on everyone who operates for different
reasons in our set up, as external coworkers, contractors or visitors. In view of these principles, we commit to:
- integrate health and safety at work and environmental protection issues into our
usual decision-making and managing activities; - adopt technologies and practices that produce a continuous improvement of
conditions regarding health and safety at work and the internal and external environment;
- take all the necessary action to eliminate risks in the field of health and safety at work that can cause accidents or injuries to people;
- take all the necessary action to avoid or reduce pollution by preventing incidents,
controlling the materials that are used, the waste that is generated and the observance of the established operating practices;
- develop, through adequate information and training programs, the skills of the
employees who perform different activities, under normal conditions and in situations of danger or emergency, in order to raise the awareness concerning their role and their potential, as regards both the prevention of risks in the field of health and safety, and the achievement of objectives and results of environmental performance;
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
8 di/of 37
- to promote and support an open dialogue with the citizens, the organizations and the
administrations on the effects that the Group’s activities produce on the communities
and the environment, in order to favor protecting and enhancing activities aimed to improving the internal and external health and safety.
- Specific and measurable objectives are defined annually, and their actual achievement is assessed by continuously monitoring the results that have been obtained. Subsequently, the Direction will carry out periodic revisions based on these
studies.
3. SECTION 3 – HEALTH, SAFETY ENVIRONMENT AND QUALITY ORGANIZATION AND PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS HSE ORGANIZATION
The Contractor and the subcontractors shall ensure that when requested by the applicable Law all the appointed competent persons receive an engagement letter. Contractor and the other subcontractors shall, upon having considered the size and complexity of the project,
the number of workers and the level of risk, ensure the presence on site of a HSE team, able to manage the HSE aspect on site. The contractor shall provide dedicated and adequate vehicles on site for the HSE team and depending on area morphology the vehicles shall fitted with 4x4 wheels all of them following
minimum requirement indicating in 3.4.1. The vehicles number, to be related to the site, activities and numbers of members Safety/Environmental Team. Details and specifications of responsibility for all appointments
shall be defined in the HS plan, and described in a suitable organizational chart. The HSE team must be sized following the Client indication or following the applicable Law,
whichever is more restrictive. The client reserves the right to evaluate the competency and performance of the HSE Team, and require a replacement of the not adequate person. Contractor with his offer shall ensure and demonstrate to the Client that Contractor and all
his subcontractors selected for the project, have adequately estimated and quoted the cost of health, safety and environment measures and resources (personnel) that will be required during the execution of works.
3.1.1. HSE Organization for Construction Sites
The Contractor shall provide one (1) full-time HS Officer at all times with experience in safety management constructions sites. In particular, the following professional requisites are listed below:
- Health and Safety Engineering degree or equivalent diploma/qualifications (strong
experience in supervising health and safety in power plant construction can be considered equivalent);
- It is required of at least 5 years of experience as HS safety specialist or similar role
in Engineering or Construction Companies; - Safety Certification according to the local applicable law; - Experience in the construction of renewable power plant, conventional power plants,
HV substations and HV T-lines.
One Environmental Officer, with experience in environmental management constructions sites or operational & maintenance, according to the activities, full time present on site only
dedicated to the control of all the environmental related aspects required by local regulation and authorization and what it is stated in this document. In particular, the following professional requisites are listed below:
- Environmental Engineering degree or equivalent diploma/qualifications (strong experience in supervising environment in power plant construction can be considered equivalent);
- It is required of at least 5 years of experience as Environment specialist or similar role in Engineering or Construction Companies;
- Environment Certification according to the local applicable law; - Experience in the construction of renewable power plant, conventional power plants,
HV substations and HV T-lines.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
9 di/of 37
Additional duties of the environmental officer are prepare, update and monitor the required
environmental documentation.
Firefighter staff and First aid Staff trained personnel must be appointed, in relation to the number of workers present on site, and as required by applicable law (further information at
paragraph 5.1.3 and 5.1.1.). Contractor shall appoint a person, document HSE administrator, who will manage documentation like machinery maintenance documents, workers training certificate, medical
surveillance internal report, restricted duty, etc., using a dedicated software.
3.1.2. HSE Organization for Operation and Maintenance sites In case of Operation & Maintenance activities, contractor shall provide one (1) full-time HSE
officer present according to the activities with at least, 5 years’ experience in Safety Management, preferably in Operation & Maintenance Activities and then an additional one (1) in case of complex activities to be performed on site.
3.1.3. Complex Activities
In addition to what is specified above and in case of complex activities, the Client requires Contractor the appointment of one (1) additional HS Officer at least each 80 workers onsite thereafter, unless otherwise provided by the applicable Law with at least, 3 years’ experience on the activities to be carried out full time present on site with the duty of collaborate and
assist the HS Officers.
3.2. DOCUMENTS TO BE PROVIDED TO THE CLIENT
Contractor and the subcontractors shall provide all the documentation required by the applicable Law, update it whenever the activities change and keep a copy on site, or
immediately available to an inspector or a Client inspection. Below the list, not limited, of documentation required:
- Health and safety plan Risk assessment (operative evaluation)
- Environmental Operational plan - Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) - Erosion Management Plan
- Medical surveillance - Personnel appointments &Training certificates
3.2.1. Health and safety plan
The health and safety plan shall detail specific plans and programs for implementing the health and safety requirements of the contract. The health and safety plan shall be submitted to the Client, 30 days in advance the start of
the activities, for review and approval and, once accepted, shall not be amended without prior consultation and acceptance by the Client. The HS Plan shall contain all the information required by the applicable Law and, in addition,
shall include data listed below:
- Site Description - Project Description - Organization Chart
- Description of HSE responsible, detailing for each one the duty and the responsibility - Managing of what required in section 3 and 4 of this HS specification (i.e.: 3.4.4
Training program, 4.1.1Communication system, 4.1.4 Facilities, 4.10 PPE)
- Emergency plan (to be updated with the progress of the activity) - Training to all workers on the HS Plan contents - Health & Safety Costs
- Description: This should be a concise and general description of the nature, extent and locations of the work, clearly differentiating the existing works and new works.
Details of the engineer, designers, contractors (including subcontractors of any tier)
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
10 di/of 37
and major suppliers shall be listed including names, addresses, contact numbers, and
scope of work; The contractors shall provide a statement covering the design criteria
or design assumptions he has used in so far as they may affect the health and safety in operating, maintaining, repairing, cleaning, alteration or demolition of the works
and protection of the environment. - This statement shall include details on how foreseeable cleaning, maintenance and
repair is to be carried out; details of features in the design to enable persons to work
safely; and details of any residual hazards in the completed work which will need taking into account in operating, maintaining, repairing, cleaning, alteration or demolition of the works.
- Methods Statement: The contractor shall provide method statements for all activities
that are dictated by the design criteria and to the extent where they will help ensure the future health, safety and protection of the environment. Such method statements shall detail all the activities and works sequences and explanation of
supporting arrangements (permanent or temporary) required during the execution. Furthermore in particular need to be provided a list of risks associated to the specific activities, any certifications and special training for workers and the list of required
PPE to be used. - Equipment and Materials: The contractor shall list each equipment and material used.
Significant health, safety and environmental hazards shall be identified and supplier’s material safety data sheets included.
- Maintenance Requirements and Procedures: The designer shall detail the maintenance required and the procedures to be followed to carry out such maintenance safely, without risk to health and the protection of the environment.
Specific information shall be given on the safety features and items provided to ensure health and safety and the protection of the environment.
- Operation and Maintenance Manuals: O&M manuals shall be provided in accordance
with contract requirements. - The designer will be required to confirm the acceptability of the contents of the O&M
manuals provided by the contractors. - Utilities: The designer and contractors shall provide information on utilities,
confirming locations and types cross-referenced to other documentation provided. - Other Relevant Information: Designer and Contractor shall provide copies of any
relevant information on the original site and access such as investigation results,
project installation certificates, commissioning results and certificates as generally required under the contract documentation.
- Emergency-file fitting.
- Personnel Appointments and Trainings
3.2.1.1. Risk assessment
Contractor and the Subcontractors performing any work shall, before the commencement and during any activity, perform risk assessments which have to be performed by competent person appointed in writing. The risk assessments shall form part of the health and safety
plan to be applied on the site and shall include at least: - The analysis and evaluation of the risks and hazards identified; - A documented plan of safe work procedure to eliminate, mitigate, reduce or control
of the risks and hazards that have been identified; - A monitored plan; - A review plan.
These risk assessments will identify the hazards, risks and mitigation measures to reduce the risks. The method statements will describe how these tasks will be performed to implement the necessary mitigation measures. The risk assessor has to identify the hazards
with risk to personal injury and/or property damage that must be the catalyst for providing controls and preventive measures. Once a hazard has been identified, the competent person shall provide the measures to eliminate or mitigate the hazard. Hazards shall be eliminated
when is possible and can be minimized through awareness training, engineering controls, use of personal protective equipment and/or monitoring devices. Competent persons (Supervisors) must use the Risk assessment record by comparing the hazards identified daily before the work on site begins and the mitigation plans developed to
control these hazards. Competent persons shall monitor existing controls and preventive measures to insure accuracy and usage. The competent person shall continue to compare the actual work to the assessment allowing for changes in the assessment when change is
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
11 di/of 37
occurred. Workers shall be familiar with the Risk assessment, use the existing controls and
preventive measures while performing the tasks, and provide input to their Supervisors to ensure that Risk assessment procedure reflects all hazards identified and is reviewed when needed.
A pre-task risk assessment must be completed prior to the start any job/task by those involved in the task (using the specific tool for each country). Risk assessment must be reviewed formally whenever an accident happens.
The document shall be submitted to the Client, for review and acceptance by the Client. The requirements listed in this document must be considered as minimum requirements. If applicable Law is more restrictive it prevails on what indicated in this document.
3.2.2. Environmental Operational plan The Contractor shall submit to the Client the Environmental Operational Plan (EOP), a site specific executive plan developed to ensure compliance with in force legislation and
appropriate environmental management practices during project’s construction and/or maintenance services. EOP should be in compliance with List of Environmental Conditionings during activities and reviewed based on the General Environmental Features for the
Construction Site or Plant provided by the Client. EOP shall be submitted to the Client, 30 days in advance the start of construction, for review and approval and, once accepted, shall not be amended without prior consultation and acceptance by the Client. The contractor must comply with all applicable laws and regulations related to the
environment and to the content of EOP and report periodically to the Client the information/documentation required by it. The contractor must be able to:
- Demonstrate that they have identified and understood the applicable environmental
legislation; - Provide on request any documentation certifying compliance with in force legislation,
including permits and compliance with the limits listed down by them;
- Demonstrate that they have procedures that permit continuous compliance with these requirements;
- Have carried out a risk assessment in order to identify all the processes and activities that may involve potential risks, and ensure they have taken adequate measures to
prevent these risks.
3.2.3. Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) and the Erosion Management Plan
Storm water must be managed to negate water contamination by oils, fuels, litter and other waste and to prevent erosion of site during construction phase or services in O&M phase if applicable. The Contractor will submit to the Client the Storm Water Management Plan
(SWMP) and the Erosion Management Plan 30 days in advance the start of construction (considering any kind of pre activities; clearing, site establishment, etc.), for review and acceptance by the Client and, once accepted, shall not be amended without prior consultation and acceptance by the Client. The SWMP must include the detailed design of appropriate
works and measures that allow surface and subsurface movement of water along drainage lines so as not to impede natural surface and subsurface flows. Drainage measures must promote the dissipation of storm water run-off. The Erosion Management Plan must monitor
and rehabilitate erosion events to prevent and reduce the risk of any potential erosion.
If applicable Law is more restrictive it will prevail on the requirements listed in this document. Contractor and subcontractor workers shall be trained on the Environmental Operational Plan prescriptions
3.2.4. Medical surveillance Contractor and subcontractors shall ensure that all their workers have a valid medical
certificate specific for the activities to be performed and issued by a doctor for occupational health and safety. A copy of the certificates must be submit to the client before start the activities.
A planned program of periodical tests, which may include clinical examinations, biological monitoring or others prescripted cases could be required by the Client.
3.2.5. Personnel appointments & Training Certificates
All the appointments and relative training certificate for all competent persons required by the applicable Law shall be submitted to the Client, at least 15 days in advance the start of
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
12 di/of 37
activity, for review of capabilities to perform all different activities under normal conditions
and in situations of danger or emergency. The Client reserve the right to accept or reject
these information requesting additional details.
3.3. REPORTING TO THE CLIENT DURING THE EXECUTION PHASE
3.3.1. Safety, environmental and sustainability KPI’s
In order to have a fully control of the safety, environmental and sustainable initiatives performance of the site the Client requires to Contractor and to subcontractors to implement a system of HSE aspects reporting, based on the following instructions:
- Workers Attendance record: record of the workers and supervisors present on site,
including the number of worked hours. The weekly attendance record must be submitted to the Client within the end of the week following that for which the data are collected.
- Vehicles record: record of the vehicles present on site. The weekly attendance record must be submitted to the Client within the end of the week following that for which the data are collected.
- Minute meeting: the minute meeting of each Safety and Environmental meeting must be submitted to the Client within 48 hours of the meeting.
- Audit report: each audit undertaken by the contractor or by his HSE representative must be submitted to the Client within 48 hours from the audit.
- HSE initiatives record: record of the attendance or of the performance of HSE initiatives must be submitted to the Client as by instruction given.
- Incident reporting: Contractor must notify any incident or event on site, following the
instruction of the Client.
Client reserves the right to require the use of standard format for the above listed reporting. Regarding Environmental reporting, the Client requires in a monthly basis the followings:
- Electricity Consumption [MWh].
- Energy generated on site by renewable sources [kWh]. - CO2 Compensation [Kg] - Fuel consomption (Gasoil/Diesel[t], Gazoline[t], LPG[t], Natural gas [m3*103],
Biodiesel/Alcool).
- Total amount of traffic flows (number of access/crossing of the worksite main gate) related to the supply of the site materials.
- Expendables* [t] (Concretes, Sand and gravel for construction activity, Iron,
Cement and lime for construction activity, Steel Structures and pipes, Bar for concrete, Hydrochloric Acid, Caustic soda, Biodegradable and Non Biodegradable Lubricating oil, Dielectric oil, Oil containing PCB, Other Non biodegradable oil).
- Soil/Rocks* [m3]: Excavated soil in construction Site, Conveyance soil reused in Worksite, Contaminated soil rehabilitated in Worksite.
- Water consumption (potable water/non potable)[m3]:from surface water (rivers, lakes, meteoric waters which do not join the industrial waste waters, etc.), from
wells, from aqueducts, from waste water treatment plants, from waste water treatment plants
- Discharged wastewaters [m3].
- Polluting load in discharged wastewaters [Kg], metal and compounds (expressed as metal equivalent), total nitrogen (expressed as N), total phosphorus (expressed as P), Chemical Oxygen Demand, Biological Oxygen Demand).
- Accidental spills or leakage of liquid ground [n., m3]. - Other environmental incidents (numbers of dead animals, birds, bats, etc.) excluding
spills or leakage [n.]. - Areas occupied by reclamation land [m3].
- Domestic waste total amount production [t], and total amount recycled or reused [t].
- Non-hazardous special waste total amount production [t], and total amount recycled
or reused [t]. - Hazardous special waste total amount production [t], and total amount recycled [t]. - Extent of worksite (surface occupied by construction activities [m2]).
- Quantity of ground excavated* [m3]). - Other environmental or sustainable KPIs could be requested by the client;
(*)In case of Lump sum contract, Client and Contractor will agree on how to share material
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
13 di/of 37
information above.
3.3.2. Incident Response and Reporting Contractor shall use the HSEQ4U app to implement the EGP incident reporting System/Tools.
All safety and environmental incidents, regardless of severity, shall be reported, verbally, as soon as possible, to the immediate supervisor. Contractor supervisor/ safety officer/ environmental officer shall report, verbally, all subcontractor incidents to the Client reference
person as soon as possible. Contractor must notify formally and compliance by the deadline any events to the Client as required by the Client’s directions according to the EGP operational instruction.
With this aim Contractor/Subcontractors shall provide the proper devices to his employees (Smartphones, Laptops) and shall downloaded the Application from the address given by EGP.
Contractor shall communicate both safety and environmental events to Client and analyze them as define by the client. Contractor must keep record of both events and statistics about Safety and Environment and must inform Client about the occupational risk factors related
to its activities and tasks, which arise during the execution of the contract and the measures that shall be implemented under its control
3.3.3. Incident Investigations
The Contractor shall investigate all work related incidents, High Potential Events involving company employees or company property and Environmental Significant and Severe Incident to determine root causes, develop preventive measures and implement corrective actions
following the Client directions. The final incident reports and supporting documents shall be delivered or transferred to the Client Project Manager of the incident and the correction action will be addressed periodically to the Client in the HSE meetings to follow up the
implementation.
3.4. GENERAL REQUEST During the activities on the site, the contractors shall not make substantial changes of any
kind to: the vehicles, all equipment and tools used in worksite.
3.4.1. Contractors vehicle Safety Requirements
The contractor shall ensure proper number of vehicles adequate to the site activities. The contractor shall provide dedicated and adequate vehicles on site for all his personnel with the following requirements:
• Fog lights • Bluetooth handsfree • ABS and ESP
• Air conditioner • Airbags for driver and passenger
• Connection 12 Volts • GPS
• Original spare wheel of the vehicle • Safety belt ( 3 anchor point) on all seats, both front and rear
Mandatory Equipment: • Reflective vest • Emergency hammer and safety belt cutter
• First aid kit • Jack and key for wheel change • First aid kit • Fire extinguisher
• Spill kit
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
14 di/of 37
Depending on distance, condition route, morphology the vehicles might be requested to be Off Roads
with 4x4 wheels.
Equipment to be ordered according to applicable Law and needs: All terrain chains or winter tires In particular case like off roads with more than 30 km far from the nearest village with a first aid
hospital all cars must be equipped with a "black box", electronic device including a built-in gps detector for recording data concerning the conduct and driving style
3.4.2. Audits / Inspections / Meetings
Contractor shall implement a system to ensure the constant monitoring of the HSE level on site. - Inspections: The contractor and subcontractors shall perform daily inspections as
required by the activities of the workplace to identify potential hazards and work
process verification. Contractor and subcontractors shall ensure that visual inspections of tools and vehicles are performed daily, or prior to the start of each shift. Monthly documented (auditable) inspections of tools, equipment and vehicles
shall be performed. - Audits: Contractor’s safety and environmental officers shall perform periodic site
audits (minimum bi-weekly) to verify the implementation of the HS plan and EOP. Jointly they shall perform a documentation review. Report of the audit must be kept
on site and submitted to the Client within 48 hours of the audit. - Client’s HSE team will perform periodic audits to the site and to the documentation.
Contractor is required to ensure the promptly resolution of any evidences found
- HSE Meetings: Contractor shall held weekly HSE meeting, with the presence of Client and subcontractors representatives, in order to manage ongoing activities, and to
avoid any interference. The Client’s representative can requires additional HSE
meetings if necessary for the proper management of the HSE aspects on site. - HSE Meeting shall be held whenever a new contractor starts to work.
3.4.3. Drugs / Alcohol / Weapons
The client prohibits the use, possession, manufacture, distribution, promotion, transportation or sale of alcoholic beverages, illegal drugs, inhalants, drug paraphernalia, controlled
substances, firearms or weapons on the project site, whether owned or leased. The drunk or drugged workers must not enter to worksite. In these cases the client can require the immediate dismissal of the workers from the site to Contractor. The contractor and sub-
contractors employees must not show up for work under the influence of drug, alcoholic beverage, intoxicant or other substance including the use of over-the-counter medications which will in any way affect work ability, alertness, coordination, or response or risk the safety of others. The contractor and sub-contractors must guarantee that his workers don’t
use drugs and alcohol on the worksite. The Client in its sole discretion can use external consultants for random on-site control to check presence of workers under influence of drug and alcohol.
3.4.4. Training
Basic Training The contractor shall ensure that all the workers are trained as required by the laws, the
regulation and according to the risk assessment and that they have valid competent certificate of training.
As sample, underneath are listed the competence developed with a basic training course: Risk Assessment Concept Stop Work
Likelihood- Damage Prevention and protection (PPE, CPE) Safety and Environment Organization on site
Rights, obligations, Breaches and Disciplinary action Monitoring on site by Law Agent or Client organization
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
15 di/of 37
Other required training
All workers shall be trained for the work assigned, skilled as required by Local Act and risk assessment. Depending on employee’s exposure to certain hazards other required trainings
may include: - Work at Height - Respiratory Protection
- Fall Protection - Permit Required Confined Space Entry - Excavation Safety - Mechanical Lifting (including rigging, slings, etc.)
- Manual Lifting - Arc Flash / Electrical Safety - Blasting Operations
- Certifications in the operations of Cranes Forklifts, lifting platforms - Environmental Training - First Aid
The contractor if requested by Client in case Local Act do not require particular training, shall in any case develop a system of trainings, to be implemented also by the sub-contractors. Training will ensure the engagement on the project of skilled employees capable of
performing all work in a manner to prevent incidents. In addition, Contractor must plan dedicated sessions to the evacuation simulation of the site.
HSE Induction/Orientation
Contractor and subcontractors shall perform a Site Health, Safety and Environment Orientation prior to authorize access on site of each worker. to. Some specifics to be e addressed during the HSE Orientation shall include:
- Enel Stop Working Policy
- HSE Contractors Obligations - Health and safety plan - Risk assessment
- Environmental Operational plan - An overview of the identified HSE hazards on the site - The site emergency procedures
- Restrictions (i.e.: smoking ban) - Housekeeping - Site Specific Rules/Behaviors - PPE to use on site
- Reporting procedures - Waste Handling and disposal - Snake procedure if applicable
- Interferences The site HSE orientation shall advise of the requirements and expectations set forth in this
document and the contractor HSE program. Re-training will be required when workers demonstrate non-compliance, prove non- understanding or prove to be incompetent in their adherence of the HSP. Enel reserve the right to attend the Orientation.
3.4.5. Work shifts
Shifts/working hours While scheduling the activity contractor and sub-contractors shall guarantee the compliance with the applicable Law about normal working hours and overtime. Working shift shall be
arranged considering also the local condition and wheatear condition. Employees performing daily shift cannot perform the following night shift.
3.4.6. Night work
Night work means work performed after 18:00 pm and before 6:00 am of the next day. No Night works are allowed without Client official acceptance. Contractor and sub-contractors
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
16 di/of 37
shall submit to the client a “night work” procedure/Method statement for Client validation
when night work are recognized as necessary then before start the activity Contractor and
subcontractors shall submit the procedure updated and the permit to work at least 2 working days before the start of the activity, to be validated by the client. The document shall include:
- risk assessment - mitigation measures and artificial light - list of personnel authorized to stay overnight
- Method statement/Procedure
For further detail, consult Annex G “Minimum requirements for night work in EGP sites”
3.4.7. Initiatives for safety improving
Toolbox Talks (Pre job check) Contractor and each sub-contractor shall hold a documented toolbox talks prior to the work
shift (daily) and prior to new job task implementation. Its supervisor, before executing the work gathers the team members and proceeds to:
- describe in detail the main phases of work to be undertaken and their associated
risks, with a level of detail adequate to the level of complexity of the activity to be undertaken;
- draw the attention of the workers to the work stages which are most significant in terms of safety (e.g. where coordination between different activities is necessary,
use of special equipment, etc.) and on associated preventive measures to be adopted in order to prevent accidents, expressly requiring observance;
- indicate the equipment to be used, the necessary collective protective equipment and
personal protective equipment, requiring the control of efficiency of the workers before allowing their use;
- Entrust tasks, providing all further required explanations.
If some operations should change during the works or there is the perception of a rising danger, it is necessary to arrange a new Pre-Job Check (according to the proper EGP Policy) before continuing the works.
At the end of the meeting, the supervisor asks each team member to: - Confirm their understanding of the specific tasks assigned; - Focus attention to particular safety measures required in each work stage;
- Define the coordination activities with the other workers and any further specifications.
- Ensure that before the job preventive measures have been implemented or available.
The supervisor compiles a Pre-Job Check Summary Report in which are summarized the main key points arising from the meeting. The safety officer maintains documentation of the meeting. Workers attending the meeting shall sign the attendance sheet and participate by
reporting any known workplace hazards, equipment deficiencies, etc. The Client adopts his own procedure for the Toolbox talk, called Pre job check and Post-job review that could be submitted to the contractor in case it doesn’t have any implemented procedures.
Behavioral Safety Initiatives The client implements initiatives aimed at improving the safety and environmental culture,
at increasing the safety and environmental awareness of the workers and eliminate or mitigate the risks on site. Client could require to the contractors to join this commitment or projects, implementing in the sites those initiatives. Instructions and data reporting sheets
will be submitted to the contractors.
4. SECTION 4 - HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
4.1. CROSS ASPECTS
4.1.1. Communication system
Contractor shall ensure a fully functional system of communication within the site. No dead zone shall be present on site including road access: in case of working area with no mobile phone coverage a satellite mobile phone, a Wi-Fi network and/or a radio communication system must be implemented. A direct line of communication must be ensured between the
safety officers, the supervisors, the first aid and fire fighter personnel.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
17 di/of 37
The contractor in the sites without cover by phone signal will have to provide and install a
free phone system on the site reserved for workers,
4.1.2. Access to the worksite
All Contractors must comply with the provisions given by the Company Responsible for Camp Security as presented to other Contractors and subcontractors before authorize the access. The Contractor responsible for the Construction Camp Security service implements a system
to control the access to the site, both of people and vehicles. Each gate will be equipped with an “access control system”, guarded 24/7 by a security guard, if needed. Only authorized people and vehicles are allowed to enter on site. Contractor responsible for the Construction Camp Security service shall ensure an access control on site, aimed to verify possession of
any weapons, illegal drugs and an alcohol tester. The Contractor responsible for the Construction Camp Security service ensures that an alcohol and drug tester will be implemented at the main entrance using the alcohol tester to
all people entering site (each individual entering the main entrance, must be tested), conducted daily. The alcohol and drug test can be implemented immediately when site opens. Authorized people are those:
- workers, with all the necessary documentation already checked and available onsite, trained in conformity with their duty on site
- supervisor, contractors responsible with all the appointments signed and available on site
- Client representatives - visitors, allowed by the Client - Officials and public representatives authorized by law
All those authorized persons must wear an identity card/badge (with barcode type or similar
devices), and their presence recorded on a dedicated daily electronic spreadsheet by the
access control system. Attendance record must be submitted weekly to the client (mailing list to be communicated) Authorized vehicles are those checked by a competent person on their good maintenance and order. Authorized vehicles must be identified with proper label, and their entrance recorded on a dedicated daily electronic spreadsheet by the access control
system. Enel Green Power Plant in operation are not guarded but controlled by a Surveillance System
managed by Enel Security and are protected by an anti-intrusion system so the access gate shall be maintained constantly closed.
In case the worksite is realized internally to an existing Plant the “access control System”
shall be based inside and at the entrance of the Power Plant.
If permitted by the Applicable Law with the aim to increase Safety, Contractor shall implement a video Surveillance system that cover the site/work area with more presence of
people like canteen, recreation area, main entrance, waste management area, explosive storage (if any).
4.1.3. Visitors
All visitors shall obtain permission to enter the site (including undergoing an alcohol test) at the site office and/or contractor before entering the worksite. A site visitor log shall be
maintained. All visitors shall conform to the minimum PPE required at paragraph 4.10, in the HSP, whichever is more restrictive. All visitors shall be notified of the potential hazards and
the site safety rules and shall be accompanied by owner or contractor supervisory personnel at all times while onsite.
Safety officer shall explain in a HSE Induction: All receive a document, trifold or brochure with the main information of the site and with all the relevant contact details of the key people; emergency first aid staff, fire staff, safety officer, site manager, etc. Record of the
induction, signed by the visitor must be kept on site.
4.1.4. Facilities on site
The Contractor must consider these requirements described below in this paragraph as a further warning in order to complement the requirements required in the E&C technical specification called "Construction Site Camp" and annexed to contract. Therefore the
contractor must define a proper offer for "Construction Site Camp" technical specification. Each Contractor has to provide all the facilities on site as requested by local regulation and
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
18 di/of 37
Client’s prescriptions. Contractor can be required to provide at or within reasonable access
to the construction site:
- Sanitary facility for both sex - Changing facility for both sex
- Sheltered eating areas, sized with the number of workers on site. - Sheltered areas for trainings and meetings. - Communal kitchen
In case of an isolated site camp it might be requested to include:
- Dormitory for both sex - Recreation area with Satellite TV hall, Gym, Bar, games room
- Area dedicated to religious practice - Laundry with washing machine, dryer - Shower facility for both sex
Those trailers/rooms must be in place at the very beginning of the activity, equipped with internet connection, lights, air conditioning and with a proper housekeeping, from the start
of the project. Contractor and all other contractors must ensure lights, air conditioning from the beginning using the temporary generators if necessary. In areas considered with very hot or cold climate, the boxes must be equipped with special kit (very cold / very hot.).
Contractors might be requested to provide a system of transportation between the site and the homes in which the workers live, or to the area in which they are accommodated, particularly for those who are not able to reach the site with their vehicles. Also they have to
ensure the transportation between the working areas and the eating area.
Each Contractor might be requested to provide portable toilets and gazebo for area relax
with drinking fresh water on site, to be distributed on the different area of the site, in proper container, sheltered from the start of the project and the end of it. (Considering all the pre- activities performed)
All Contractors have in charge the Housekeeping of their area and main contractor keep clean all the Common area like canteen, common toilets, etc. In case of particular event like visit of Authorities or adverse meteorically events the Client reserves the right to ask the
Contractor for an extraordinary cleaning service before or after the extraordinary events. In particular, the client may request extra cleaning services at:
- contractor's offices - customer's offices - meeting rooms - kitchen spaces
- cafeterias rooms - changing and relax rooms - toilet facilities
- Dormitory rooms. The contractor must provide and install a lighting system with a twilight sensor in all the
crossing inside the site, in the parking areas and outside the facilities and along the entire pedestrian walkways on the site camp. The contractor in all enclosed buildings of site, must provide and install a smoke detection
system The contractor must provide a linen washing service reserved only for uniforms and work
clothes of on-site workers. The service must be guaranteed at least twice a week. Contractor Responsible of the Site Camp construction has to consider and update (or provide
if not existent) a Lightning Study and consequently shall install according to the study results a lightning Protection System on site in order to ensure full worksite protection. In operational plants, the Contractor and Client will agree the facilities needed and the use
of facilities already in place before start the activities in order to rationalize cost and resources. This point is not applicable for garbage and industrial waste collection.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
19 di/of 37
4.1.5. Traffic management
The Contractor shall set a procedure that has to describe the rules and preventive measures for traffic movement, including approaching and parking near Mobile Equipment. It shall
include key responsibilities and the processes to operate on site and speed limits for employees, visitors and general public. The traffic management plan shall be done in accordance to the applicable Law, Authorizations and to the requirements below:
- Enough and visible signs shall be utilized on site where travel ways are changed due to various circumstances (road restriction, obstacles on site)
- Speed limit: 30/20/10 km/hour (or the equivalents miles/hour) in the internal roads (depending on the condition of the roads), 20 km/hour around logistic area, in all car
parks and yards. Speed limit sings shall be placed on site and near pedestrian area (i.e. canteen, offices) a speed bump shall be placed. Speed limit can be modify only after evaluation with the client
- Irrespective of signage, speed should be restricted to suit weather, visibility and road conditions prevailing at the time. Following distances shall be increased and speeds shall be decreased to a maximum of 20 km per hour in inclement weather such as
mist (fog), rain, hail, thunderstorms or any similar difficult conditions just as dust or high wind speeds.
- Communication: Communication between vehicles and machinery which need to interact is of most importance. Drivers must follow communication procedures and
shall where applicable be trained in the correct use of two-way radios. Hand signals (Waving arms) to be used to draw attention of operator. The use of mobile phones while driving a vehicle are prohibited.
- The temporary park on site shall be well recognized using reflective cones, intermittent lights or other signals (visible also during the night);
- The parking on site shall be well define with a clear separation of the heavy
machinery, trucks, personal vehicles, etc. - The parking and the vehicle circulation roads shall be well define and separated of
the pedestrian areas such offices, paths, pedestrian crossing areas, etc. - In case of cable crossing the internal road shall be placed a cable protection ramp
Contractor shall take all the reasonable measures to manage the interferences with the local traffic. The presence of the activities site must be highlighted with proper number of signals.
Flagmen can be required in order to manage the traffic of site and local vehicles, in case the traffic shall be temporary interrupted the use of mobile traffic lights is recommended.
4.1.6. Interferences management
The Health Safety Plan of the Contractor Responsible of the Site Camp and of the Emergency must be updated with all relevant information from the other Contractors and must include the management of interferences among activities/ workers/ companies, and must provide
to the contractors the guideline to avoid or reduce any kind of risk related to interferences. At least weekly the above Contractor safety officer has to hold a HSE meeting with the client representatives and other contractors responsible to manage the coming activity. Report of
the meeting must be forwarded to the Client and to the other contractors within 48 hours. Enel will attend the meeting to support the coordination between all contractors. Before starting activities with interference space-time between several contractors or across
teams of the same contractor, Client representative has to call a pre-job check meeting
involving each safety officer of contractors so that:
1. Identify correctly risks of interference by each safety officers.
2. Ensure the identification and application of the prevention, protection and coordination choosing the CPE and/or PPE equipment, device, listed and quoted in the Interference Costs sheet in order to manage properly the interference risks.
3. Identify a single person of the team to manage human-machine interactions during activities.
At the end of pre-job check meeting, the Contractor representative has to report the meeting
content through paper or more simply with media tools (e.i: video by smartphone), and sharing it with all Foreman and Safety Officers. The Contractor representatives on site shall call HSE meetings if needed: Contractor and
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
20 di/of 37
contractors must attend the meetings.
The contractor for cranes and heavy vehicles must provide and install on site an ACTIVE SAFETY device to minimize the likelihood of accidents, assisting the Operator/Driver during
critical situations to prevent the occurrence of collisions or accidents in real time. This system is also recommend for all vehicles in case of isolated camp and Complex work. The Active Safety System shall be able to:
1) minimize the likelihood of accidents between Workers and Vehicles; 2) assist the vehicle driver during critical situations to prevent the occurrence of
collisions between vehicles and accidents with workers in real time; 3) monitor in real time the presence of personnel in one or more operating area
particularly dangerous; 4) Provide all the data to a central platform. 5) review Traffic Management Plan
4.1.7. Construction of Medium and High Voltage aerial line In order to ensure adequate safety standards for employees involved during the construction
and safe use of tools and machines, following and for further detail in Annex H are defined in EGP the general criteria to be applied during the construction of MV/HV overhead lines. The construction of an overhead power line is one of the most complex and difficult activities
both from the organizational and operative point of view. The multiple interferences that may be arising along the route of the power line (power and telephone lines above ground or below ground, buildings, roads, rivers, etc.) linked to the morphology of the territory and
climatic conditions, greatly increases the specific risks related to the activity.
The contractor shall therefore have to ensure that the following conditions are met:
The employees involved in the activities have to be highly skilled, trained and suitable from health point of view.
Tools, equipment and PPE used must be suitable, efficient and checked before and after use. In case of any deformation or weak points (cracks, fractures or other
defects), the tools must be immediately replaced. The main hazard for the employees involved is falling from height, which can be
managed adopting proper behavior, using proper equipment and PPE’s and
respecting the work procedures. The risk of falling objects is constantly present and should not be overlooked.
To minimize the interferences between workers working at height and those
positioned at support base. All equipment used at heights, must be secured with ties or chains in order to prevent
an accidental fall to the ground. To ensure adequate emergency management and taking into account that the construction
of high-voltage lines generally takes place away from the Site Camp medical center it is important to ensure on site or in surrounding area, trained First aid team and fully equipped ambulance.
The safe execution of the works on MV and HV overhead lines requires work planning, activities coordination among the employees involved, respect of operating procedures and use of proper equipment and PPE.
4.1.8. Overhead Power-lines/ Underground Pipelines / Aboveground Flow-lines
In case of transmission line crossing on site and/or access road Contractor must put in place any reasonable measure aimed to avoid any kind of risk of crush with vehicles (barricading, gates, etc.). Below the minimum requirements:
- Identification of the height of the line - Establishing of the limit height for a safe cross - Placement of portal before the rail or PL crossing
- Warning signals to be erected and visible - Specifics Safety Awareness meeting about the topic
In case of underground pipelines point out their presence, in order to avoid any accidental
hit. In case of risk of explosion and/or leakage of chemical materials it could be required the presence of fire fighter or skilled personnel of the provider.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
21 di/of 37
4.1.9. Cranes, Earth-moving Machinery, Forklifts
The contractor shall ensure that all machineries, tools and equipment are identified, safe to be used and maintained in a safe condition as prescribed by the Maintenance Manual. The
Contractor shall ensure the availability of a dedicated register containing all machinery, tools and equipment, including Appropriate Certification for use and maintenance manual. The identification numbers listed in the register shall be showed together with the Contractor
Logo in the lateral/front or in the rear of the machinery facilitating the identification of the owner.
4.1.9.1. Cranes
Any company operating, a crane or rigging on site shall have a program to address the hazards that includes the items below:
Only trained, qualified and certified personnel shall operate cranes and other truck equipped with such lifting equipment. Only approved and certified personnel shall be allowed to operate cranes. The contractor shall provide to the Client written certification for each employee who might operate a crane.
All cranes shall be strictly maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Maintenance Log has to be available for the Client. The following are requirements to minimize the possibility of an incident during crane and
rigging operations: - Define the crane access on worksite and locate its placement. It must also be defined
range of moving and lifting of loads and their storage.
- A lift plan is required for all heavy lifts, a heavy lift is at 75% of the cranes capacity.
All heavy lifts should be identified prior to construction and be included in contractors’ method statements.
- All personnel shall be clear of a load before it is picked up and shall remain clear at
all times. Personnel should face the crane in full view of the crane operator and/or signalman. Personnel, including those holding tag line(s), shall never be under suspended loads or go between the load and other objects where they may be
trapped or crushed. - The crane operator shall never leave the control while a load is suspended. Cranes
shall not be left connected to towers sections, whether erected or not, without an
operator at the crane controls. - Non-conducting tag lines shall be used to control all suspended loads. Chains or steel
cables are not acceptable. Tag lines shall be attached before a load is lifted. - A single designated signalman shall be used if the crane operator does not have full
view of operations, especially when moving in restricted area with the presence of other workers. Where practical, the use of radios or other communication equipment is also recommended. The crane operator shall respond only to signals from the
signalman, but shall obey a stop signal from anyone at any time. - Any vehicle shall have warning lights, appropriate lights if used at night, an alarm
signaling when the vehicle is backing up and for heavy vehicles a safety active device
to avoid interference man-machine - The crane operator shall inspect lift lines, rigging, slings and crane fittings/fasteners
daily when in use or prior to each lift and replace if necessary. This equipment shall be properly rated for the intended load and certification tags attached to all slings.
- A crane shall not be used to pull a load sideways. - A crane boom shall not be used as a ladder for walking, except for necessary
maintenance of the boom and its components.
- When not in use, the crane boom shall be kept in the cradle. - For rigging, never use a chain when it is possible to use a wire rope. - Determine the load weight before rigging it and do not exceed the safe working load
of any equipment. - Before being unhooked, all loads shall be safely landed and properly blocked. - A wind forces assessment should be conducted prior to starting with the task.
The Contractor shall ensure the safely management of the vehicles utilized for the supplier
of the materials on site. Their access must be registered on a dedicated log. Those Vehicles must be authorized only for the pit in the main storage area and the drivers are not allowed
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
22 di/of 37
to stand on site, unless they received a HSE Induction and they wear the appropriate PPEs.
4.1.9.2. Forklift
- Only trained and qualified personnel shall operate forklifts. - Training shall be conducted for the operator - The contractor shall provide written certification to the client for each employee who
might operate a forklift. - All forklifts shall be strictly maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Maintenance log has to be available for the Client. - Personnel shall not ride on forklifts.
- The forklift shall have warning lights, appropriate lights if used at night, and an alarm signaling when the vehicle is backing up.
- When a forklift is left unattended, the forks shall be fully lowered, controls put in “off”
or “neutral” position, the power shut-off, and the brakes set. Wheels shall be locked if the forklift is parked on an incline. Ignition keys shall be removed and stored in a secure place.
- The forklift operator shall ensure that the forklift’s wheels are properly locked before unloading.
- Seat belts shall be worn when operating any equipment. - All the movements must be carried out with the fork in low position.
- In case of slopes and irregular ground the operator must be instructed to avoid the overturning of the forklift.
All equipment must have a rollover protection system.
4.2. FOCUS ON DEDICATED RISK MANAGEMENT
For all activities with an high level risk or with complex interference Enel reserve the right to request and approve an expert person with the aim to plan, coordinate and supervise the execution of difficult activities like Lifting, Commissioning, Confined Spaces, Work at Height,
hot works.
4.2.1. Excavation and Trenching
An excavation is any man-made pit, trench, holes or cut into the ground formed by the removal of earth. All excavation and trenching operations shall be performed under the
supervision of a “competent” person and all requirements including excavation plan and the material disposal authorization shall be met.
- Excavations must be carried out and protected with measures aimed to avoid falls, dislodgment of materials, person buried or trapped in
- Excavation must be fenced with strong, visible, robust fence. No load or materials must be left on the edge of the excavation.
- Sides of excavations must be clean and neat.
- Drilling holes must be covered, signalized and fenced. - Locations of cables, communication wires and other underground hazards such as
pipelines shall be established and marked prior to beginning excavation or trenching
operations. - In case of excavation at the edge of a track/road, that has an impact on the
movement of the vehicles, the traffic must be managed with two flagmen or with traffic lights.
- It’s required a schedule, to be updated with the progress of the activity, of the excavated soil and the re-used soils, if authorized by local Authority.
- If an excavation or trench endangers the stability of buildings or walls, shoring,
bracing, or under pinning will be provided. - All excavations must be on register and inspected daily before work commences and
after inclement weather by the contractor’s appointed competent person, declared
safe and his findings noted in the said register. - No work shall commence in an excavation unless the excavation has been declared
safe by the competent person.
For further detail, consult Annex C “Management of excavated soil and rocks at EGP construction site”
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
23 di/of 37
4.2.2. Hot Work activities
Hot work is defined as welding, flame cutting, burning, grinding or using a torch. Each contractor working on site must have a hot work program, including a Permit To Work
process, when scheduled. Generally hot work should be performed in a shop, outside the facility, or in a “Safe Welding Area”. If not possible a “Safe Welding Area” (SWA) shall be established on site, implementing
the measures listed below: - All welding and flame cutting operations shall be done in the established “Safe
Welding Area” (SWA) unless otherwise authorized. - SWA’s shall be located with a safety distance from heavily vegetated areas,
combustibles (stored oil, diesel, etc.), and on a non-combustible surface. If there are oil and gas facilities in the immediate vicinity, such as pump jacks or pipelines or tank batteries, SWA’s shall be at least one hundred (100) feet/ 35 m away from such
facilities. - If hot work needs to be performed, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity shall be
removed to a safe distance or guards used to confine the heat, sparks and slag and
to protect the immovable fire hazards. - The hot work equipment and work area shall be inspected prior to beginning any hot
work operations to ensure safe working conditions. This includes checking for explosive atmospheric conditions in all vessels piping and confined spaces. Only
certified personal/welders shall be permitted to perform hot work. - When performing hot work all the fire protection must be taken, and reported in the
“Hot Work Program”. (ie. Fire extinguishers equipment, fire watch after competition
of hot work, water truck if there is potential for the spread of fire) - Operators shall wear brominated uniform and get a person with fire blanket and fire
extinguishers ready for the use;
- Regarding windfarm it must be stressed that inside a nacelle is forbidden the use of all welding and flame cutting operations.
4.2.3. Electrical Safety
The project site shall address and minimize personnel exposure to electrical hazards through effective equipment operation, design, specification, installation, and maintenance. All
electrical contractors working onsite shall have an electrical safety program, including a Permit To Work Process, that meets the requirements below.
- Electrical Safe Work Practices: All electrical work shall be done in accordance with
the latest codes, standards, and regulations. - Only qualified personnel with valid proof or certificate of electrical knowledge with
code requirements, safety standards, and experienced in the type work may work on electrical circuits and equipment.
- All live electrical work requires a live work permit. A qualified person shall discharge all stored electricity and shall verify the equipment is de-energized and proper Lockout/Tag out procedures implemented prior to beginning electrical work.
- Power Lines: All power lines shall be considered energized unless proper measures have been taken to de-energize.
- When work is performed near energized overhead power lines, equipment such as
boom, mast, crane, or its load shall never be permitted within evaluated distance limit from the power lines.
A site electrical installation, even if considered as provisional, must be planned and made in
a proper manner using materials and industrial electrical components in order to ensure the proper functioning of the equipment and employees integrity. The Annex B explains the minimum requirements for the electrical rules in a temporary site.
4.3. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT Handling, transportation and storage of hazardous material shall comply with applicable Law and with specific site operating instructions.
Contractors shall ensure that storage facility for any hazardous material like fuels, oils, explosives and chemicals on-site:
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
24 di/of 37
- Shall be sheltered and, in case of cylinder they shall be secured in an upright position;
- Has a containment a basin that contains possible spillage volume(volume in
compliance with applicable Law) - Anti leakages kit shall be available where there is the risks of liquid spill out.
- An Emergency Instructions sheet must be always available on site with instructions and all data sheets
All the Safety Data Sheets must be available in the storage and accessible in the working
area. The dedicated area shall be equipped with an eye wash station and an emergency shower.
4.3.1. Explosive
In case of activity to be performed with the use of explosive the risk must be evaluated and the contractor shall appoint a dedicated expert person trained to manage and prepare explosives and shall undertake all the safety and environmental preventive measures.
- License for transportation and storage of explosive materials must be obtained, as required by applicable Law
- Area of storage must be segregated, located far from any heavily vegetated areas,
combustibles (stored oil, diesel, etc.), and on a non-combustible surface - Remote Video surveillance system implemented full time - Specific Risk and Method Statement for the activities
4.3.2. Asbestos Where work involves Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs), the Client will provide indication
about its management. ACMs could be secured or removed prior to the work commencing
and contractor must keep under control all the prevention measures, legal authorizations for removal, transport and final disposal. The exact method may vary depending on many factors
but it will be subject to national regulations. Contractor must notify promptly to the Client every ACMs found in working area.
4.4. WORK AT HEIGHT
Work at height means work activity exposing workers to the risk of falling from a height of more than 2 m from a stable level (This height of reference can be lower according to the
local legislation) The risks involved in work at height can be linked with the following categories:
- Falls from height - Objects falling from heights - Interferences
The following are key rules for safe working and to minimize the possibility of an incident during operations at height:
- Identify and use the most appropriate equipment in relation to the work to be
performed and the risks involved
- Install scaffolding in compliance with legislation and good practice - Always clearly define the work area
- Prevent transit below the area and ensure proper handling of materials at height - Use PPE and CPE correctly
4.4.1. Scaffolding and mobile scaffolding
Scaffolding shall be used when appropriate. All scaffolding shall be erected according to the local act. If the scaffold has a different shape from the one calculated and certified a dedicated design shall be done. Any contractor using or constructing scaffolding must have a safety
procedure for scaffolding work that includes the items below: - Climbing or working from the handrail, mid-rail, or brace members of the scaffolding
is prohibited. - Ban to work continuously on every portable ladders
- Instructions for assembling and dismantling - Scaffolding and mobile scaffolding and ladder must be in good condition, placed in a
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
25 di/of 37
stable position (with platform completed, toe boards, middle-rail and top-rail at 1
m).
- Scaffolding shall be electrically grounded for each 20 meters high with a minimum cross section cable at last 25 mm2; All scaffolding must be assembled with
homogeneous and resistant materials. Where scaffold materials are used they shall be clean and corrosion free and free of incipient faults. Scaffold boards will be free from twists and splits and will not be painted.
- All scaffolding shall be inspected by a competent person on a daily basis as a minimum and also before use follow adverse weather conditions that could have made the scaffolding unsafe e.g. rain, wind which could cause the ground conditions to be unstable. The maximum load shall be indicated at the entrance. Each inspection
must be recorded. - Users of scaffolding shall carry out visual inspection on a daily basis before use. If
unsafe conditions are found or suspected, scaffold shall be isolated until thorough
inspection has been made by competent inspector. - Appropriate scaffolding tagging system shall be used to confirm the status of
scaffolding for use or not to be used.
- Scaffolds that provide access to areas where personnel can fall into a hazard or from a height of greater than 1.8 meter shall install a trap door at the access point to working area.
- List of competent persons appointed for the assembling, use and dismantling of the
scaffolding. (Check of scaffolding at the beginning of each shift) - List of PPE to use and signals (in assembling and dismantling) - A signboard on the scaffolding must be displayed on which lists the compliance about
the verticality, anchor points and completeness of all elements. Moreover it must contain the name of Responsible.
In case of PV power plant contractor and contractors must provide a mobile scaffolding, or a
safe mobile equipment for the installation of the panels installed in the highest level of the structure. Risk assessment and method of statement must include the use of the mobile scaffolding in the panels’ installation procedure. In case is needed a scaffolding higher than 10 m or with a particular geometry (not standard) a structural project is required.
4.4.2. Lifting Platform
Truck with Lifting platforms shall be used when appropriate. Only trained and qualified personnel shall operate the lifting platforms.
- Training shall be conducted for the operator
- The contractor shall provide written certification to the client for each employee who might operate a lifting platforms.
- All truck with lifting platforms shall be strictly maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
- Personnel shall not ride on lifting platforms. - The lifting platforms shall have warning lights, appropriate lights if used at night, and
an alarm signaling when the vehicle is backing up.
- When a lifting platforms is left unattended, the lifting platform shall be fully lowered, controls put in “off” or “neutral” position, the power shut-off, and the brakes set. Wheels shall be locked if the lifting platforms is parked on an incline. Ignition keys
shall be removed and stored in a secure place. - The lifting platform operator shall ensure that the lifting platform’s wheels are
properly chocked before unloading.
- Harness shall be worn when operating equipment.
- In case of slopes and irregular ground the operator must be instructed to avoid the overturning of the lifting platform.
- The lifting platform shall not be operated if wind speed overcome the limit indicated
by the Manufacturer.
4.4.3. Fall lifeline
Where is not possible to eliminate or isolate fall from height risk Contractor shall design and install a fall protection system. Fall protection system and fall prevention equipment shall be inspected and
maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and at the frequency required by local Act. Contractor shall:
Provide training and step-by-step instruction for installation
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
26 di/of 37
Perform the final and periodical inspection of the system
Perform any required load testing
Provide end user training
Provide all documents certificate required by the Law The length of the retention ropes must be proportionate to the height of the fall and
its anchor points shall be placed in a highest point, and in case of moving with double anchor point. Moreover, in case use of the rigid or flexible anchorage line, that must be adequate of at maximum workers number.
4.4.4. Guardrail/Parapet
Guardrails/Parapets are designed barriers erected to prevent workers from falling to lower levels for instance installed in proximity of an excavation area and shall be secured when installed to prevent accidental displacement by wind, equipment, or
workers, etc.
4.5. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall ensure that all, tools and equipment shall be regularly inspected at least
monthly or as required by legislation and risk assessments. All contractor personnel shall be competent when operating or using and tools and equipment. This shall include:
Appropriate certificate of professional competence
Certificate of task training, where required Tools with sharp points or edges in toolboxes must be protected with a cover. No make-shift (homemade) tools will be allowed on site.
All chisels used on site shall be fitted with a hand guard to prevent hand injuries in case of a miss with the hammer.
When using interlocking type of connection of an airline, whip lash arrestors
shall be in place to prevent accidental disconnection. Compressed air shall never be used for any purpose other than that for which it
is provided. In order to prevent injury to personnel and material loss, an emergency stop
device that permit workers to stop the machine during an emergency by pushing a button or pulling a rope (where needed).
If requested by the client, the contractor must provide a radio controlled "drones" device equipped with a camcorder for safety inspections at height. The user manual and battery charging system must be included provided for each device.
If in site will be use electrical vehicles, the contractor must prepare a dedicated area inside the site camp equipped with devices for charging the batteries.
4.6. SANDBLASTING
The potential hazards during sandblasting operations include, but are not limited to inhalation of dusts (including lead from the paint or silica from the blasting medium); high noise levels;
high operating pressure of equipment; etc. The following are requirements to minimize the possibility of an incident during sandblasting operations must be including in the contractors program:
- Approved respiratory and hearing protection shall be worn.
- Appropriate eye protection shall be worn, in any case a wash eye shower shall be present in the area
- The use of silica sand in the blasting medium is discouraged.
- Paint coatings being removed by sandblasting operations shall be considered as lead containing until proven otherwise.
- Check all hoses every day for leaks and signs of wear.
- Disconnect and lock out all electrical power before sandblasting. - Blasting nozzles shall be equipped with a cut-off device (dead man’s switch).
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
27 di/of 37
- Secure and hobble all high-pressure air hose connections.
- All air hose connectors shall be pinned or wired to keep them from coming apart.
- Warning signs shall be posted identifying potential hazards.
4.7. PAINTING
The potential hazards during painting operations include but are not limited to inhalation of toxic vapors or spray mist, fire hazard due to solvents in the paint, environmental impact etc The following are requirements to minimize the possibility of an incident during painting operations and must be included in the contractors program:
- Approved respiratory protection shall be worn. - Approved eye protection shall be worn, in any case a wash eye shower shall be
present in the area
- Be aware of and eliminate ignition sources in the work area. - Ventilation (either mechanical or natural) shall be adequate to keep the work
atmosphere less than 10% Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) and the oxygen (O2) content
greater than 19.5%. - Bleed or de-pressure all lines before disconnecting. - Warning signs shall be posted identifying potential hazards. - Contractor is responsible for complying with local act concerning the Volatile Organic
Compounds (VOCs) limits, training, selection of equipment cleanup and surface preparation solvents, recordkeeping, emergency and disposal. If not specifically regulated by the local authority Contractor shall prefer to purchase paints/solvents
with the lowest VOCs content as long as reasonably practicable.
4.8. CONFINED SPACE A "confined space" is defined as a space (not necessarily closed):
- not intended for continuous human presence
- with inlet/outlet openings or premises/passages of small dimensions (which cause difficult emergency management)
- where a hazardous atmosphere can be suspected.
Confined spaces, for example, include: storage tanks, silos, underground systems, tunnels, drainage pipes, condensers, feed water heaters, underground vaults, chemical tanks,
cavities, boilers, blades, hub, etc. Such spaces may present unfavorable ventilation conditions or other risk factors such as poor visibility and/or communication difficulties, the presence of hazardous and/or flammable and/or explosive materials.
The atmosphere in confined spaces may involve a number of risks (e.g. both toxic and explosive) without being indicated by warning signs such as strong smells or irritating effects. These areas of work require the installation of safety signs.
The following are key rules for safe working and to minimize the possibility of an incident during operations in confined spaces:
- Clean up the area before starting activities and monitor safety conditions - Verify the availability and operation of emergency equipment and devices - Do not enter in a confined spaces until all necessary checks have been carried out
- Personnel involved must be educated and trained on use of required PPE and collective protective equipment
- Continuously communication with worker inside confined space must be assured
Additional measures for monitoring the air quality have to be warranty by Contractor if required by Client.
4.9. COMMISSIONING ACTIVITY
The commissioning activity is one of the most complex and difficult activity both from the organizational and operative point of view.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
28 di/of 37
Before carrying out any operation on electrical systems or other activities near their, the risk
assessment must be carried out. This assessment must specify how the activities performed
and what security measures and precautions should be taken to ensure the safety.
All personnel involved in work on or near electrical installations must be instructed on the safety requirements applicable to their work. The personnel involved must be comply with these prescriptions, rules and instructions.
In particular:
No person shall be admitted in the Commissioning restricted area if not authorized. A list of persons authorized shall be exposed at the entrance of the Commissioning
area. A lot of warning signal informing about electrical hazard and allowed entrance only for authorize people shall be placed.
The commissioning activities, although not required by applicable Laws, shall only be
carrying out by qualified personnel who has been trained and possess a qualification that meets the standard EGP as indicated in Annex A in particular Permit To Work and LOTO and applicable procedures and shall not be performed without the Client
approval. When applicable Laws require specific qualifications, the contractor in collaboration
with HS staff of EGP must ensure that these requirements meet EGP standards as indicated in Annex A in particular Permit To Work and LOTO and applicable
procedures () provided by Commissioning Manager and made available to the Contractors.
No person shall be engaged in any work activity requiring technical knowledge or
experience to prevent electrical hazards or injuries without such requirements and without the supervision that the work requires.
4.10. PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT All visitors and employees on the worksite shall wear appropriate personal protective
equipment (PPE). Contractor and contractors shall ensure that their employees wear PPE as required by the specific task being performed, the potential hazards that person will be exposed to and the specifics of the job. All employees (included supervisors) shall wear a
shirt with long sleeves and long pants at all times. Tank tops, sleeveless shirts, and short pants or cutoffs are not permitted. Loose or floppy clothing is prohibited around rotating or moving equipment. Rings, neck chains or loose jewelry shall be removed.
Contractor must ensure that all the visitors and employees wear the minimal and proper PPE in all the different areas of the site. Work sites, roads, office area, etc. Provision of PPEs for visitors must be kept on site (minimum 5 pieces per each PPE). PPEs must be in good condition.
Below a list of minimum PPE required by the Client, to be adjusted in compliance with the risk assessment:
4.10.1. Head Protection An approved hard hat shall be worn by all visitors and employees working at the site at all times except while in vehicles, living quarters, offices, and control rooms (after construction
in control room is complete). Where high wind conditions are present, non-strangling chinstraps shall be worn. Where excessive heat conditions are present, sun brim shall be worn that must have a front
and back protector attached to bottom of brim.
4.10.2. Eye Protection Safety glasses with side shields shall be worn by all visitors and employees working at the site at all times except while in vehicles, living quarters, offices, and control rooms (after
construction in control room is complete). During night operations, only clear or amber colored glasses shall be worn. When safety glasses do not provide adequate protection, safety goggles or face shields shall be the means of protection (i.e.: splash hazards when working
with chemicals, high-pressure washers, chipping, buffing or grinding operations). Welding hoods shall be used during all arc-welding operations. Goggles or other suitable eye protection with appropriate filter lenses shall be used during all gas welding, gas cutting or brazing operations.
4.10.3. Foot Protection
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
29 di/of 37
Safety shoes or a non-conductive (electrician’s) safety boots shall be worn by all visitors and
employees working at the site at all times.
4.10.4. Hand Protection
Appropriate gloves shall be worn when the hands are exposed to hazards such as cuts, punctures or abrasions (cloth, leather, leather palmed); when handling chemicals or hazardous materials where absorption is a concern (rubber gloves); and when performing
electrical work. Flameproof gauntlet gloves shall be used during all arc welding, gas welding or gas cutting operations except when engaged in light work such as test fitting pieces.
4.10.5. Hearing Protection
Hearing protection shall be worn in all high noise areas or wherever a high-noise warning sign is posted.
4.10.6. Leg Protection In case of risk of snakes’ bites protection of leg (Snake Gaiters) shall be worn by visitors and employees from the beginning of any pre activity or activity on site.
The contract, through appropriate signs, must demarcate in each area the PPE needed and all free PPEs areas on site. The contractor must also prepare and provide a map with the identification of the free PPEs areas.
4.11. WARNING SIGNS/GUARDRAIL
Contractor must assure the placement of enough site signalizations on site. Minimum requirements are:
- Worksite Project information sign at the entrance
- Use of PPEs - Speed limit - Speed bump - Emergency Assembly point
- No smoking area - Danger signal - Signalization of eventual underground or air pipes crossing the site
- Emergency equipment Signals must be understandable to all the workers. A signal handbook translated at least in
three different languages shall be provided to all workers The contractor shall provide and install on site an emergency sound alarm system with multiple sources if necessary according to site extension.
4.12. ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS
4.12.1. Waste management plan
The contractor shall set a plan that has to be followed during classification, handling, storage, transportation and disposal of waste generated as a result of typical construction activities, in accordance to the applicable Law and to the requirements below:
- The first objective of the plan shall be to minimize the negative effects of the generation and management of waste on human health and the environment, so shall aim at reducing the use of resources and favor the practical application of the waste hierarchy :prevention, preparing for re-use, recycling, other recovery (e.g.
energy recovery, recyclable materials in catering services, etc.) and disposal
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
30 di/of 37
- Contractor shall prefer bio-based content materials, recyclable or reusable
components and recycled-content materials and in general use resources at their
highest potential throughout the lifecycle to improve efficiency (in product manufacture, design, construction, operation, refurbishment, and at end of life).
- Identification of designated place(s) to store different types of waste such as not recycled and hazardous waste materials. Before placing an order or a contract with a waste carrier, the carrier shall be asked to provide a copy of his Waste Carrier
License or proof of registration as a Waste Carrier by the local authority. A copy of this approval must be kept on site in the environmental file.
- Waste shall be segregated at source and removed by a licensed Waste Removal Contractor.
- Waste shall be removed on a regular basis in order to respect waste storage limits in compliance with applicable Law. If there is no specific requirement by Law, the Contractor must guarantee and respect the following limits: no more than 100 m3 of
not hazardous waste and no more than 20 m3 of hazardous waste and if not exceeding this quantity no more than 3 months for hazardous and 6 months for not hazardous.
- Waste storage on site out of the designated areas is absolutely prohibited and must be considered a severe noncompliance with HSE Requirements. The temporary storage on the work sites areas must be done in the proper containers and shall be limited to the time of activities execution.
- Broken PV panels must be segregated and collected as Waste of electric and electronic equipment(WEEE) paying particular attention to avoid dispersion in the environment of any fragments;
- Needed interventions to delimitate eventual polluted area ensuring environmental protection and Safety condition
- Chemical analysis of polluted soil, water.
For further detail, consult Annex D “Managing process waste areas at EGP worksites”
4.12.2. Air emission The main problems induced on the atmosphere are dust generation and gas and particulate
emissions. These impacts are related to excavation/demolition activities and to transit of heavy vehicles. Air Quality Sampling shall be ensured by Contractor in order to check conditions on site.
To prevent dust emission from vehicles ensure that all vehicles entering or leaving the site carrying a load that may generate dust are covered, except during loading and unloading. Install, operate and maintain dust control measures and/or equipment in the areas in which the risk is identified (such as mobile water tankers equipped with a pump and sprays to
suppress dust from unsealed roads or storage area or consider windy days in the plan of the activities). To prevent gases and particulate emissions use vehicles equipped with catalytic mufflers,
particulate filters for diesel engines and keep under control and maintenance all the vehicles used. In order to reduce the consumption of fossil fuel used by the generators, according to the
client request, the contractor shall provide and install within the site, a small photovoltaic system for the energy needs.
4.12.3. Water management
Contractor shall ensure that: - All the withdrawals are used only for the purpose of the authorization - There is a continuous monitoring of all the permits for water discharges and water
withdrawals according to local Act and/or authorization. - Erosion control measures and treatment device are installed before starting the
worksite in order to minimize the threat of flooding and loss of rich nutrient soil and
maintain the flow regimes of any water courses and prevent any deterioration in water and soil quality
- Drainage trough and from areas of disturbance is designed to minimize surface flow velocities
- Adoption where possible of a recirculation system for waters that allows the reuse of the treated water in the production process
- Loose soil is to be compacted as soon as possible after excavation, grading or filling
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
31 di/of 37
- Cleaning of equipment and flushing of mixers must occur in designated wash bays
(with contaminated water collected, stored / contained) to ensure that contaminated
wash water does not enter the environment. - Water Quality Sampling shall be ensured by Contractor in order to check condition
on site. For further detail, consult Annex E “Washing of vehicles at EGP worksites”
4.12.4. Noise and Vibration Particular attention should be given in evaluating noise and vibration impacts. The activities that generate the greatest contribution in acoustic terms are in general:
demolition, excavations and earthworks, concrete and cement production. The contractor and Subcontractors must ensure that the limit listed in the applicable Laware adhered to and measures to limit noise from the work site are implemented.
Hearing protectors distributors shall be available on site where is the presence of such activities Contractor must put in place these control measures:
- machines and apparatus construction must comply with the latest technical developments (ex: vibratory driver high frequency)
- Periodic maintenance of machines and equipment with internal combustion engine according to the manufacturer's instructions.
- in the choice of the location of the machines and stationary equipment must be privileged maximum distance respect to who is sensitive to noise
- Noise and vibration measured outside the site must be in compliance with applicable
Law minimizing the impact on sensitive targets; - Installation of provisional acoustic panels.
- Noise emissions check shall be ensured by Contractor through fixed and portable
measurement on site. -
4.12.5. Biodiversity
Preventive measures to preserve biodiversity on site have to be taken in compliance with applicable Law, authorizations and permits as well as the provisions of the approved
Environmental Management Plan report (EMPr) including the recommendations and the mitigation measures in the Environmental Impact Assessment report (EIAr) and in the specialist studies.
Contractor and the Sub-Contractors must comply with the following plans: - Alien Invasive Management Plan. This Plan includes mitigation measures to reduce
the invasion of alien species and ensure that the continuous monitoring and removal management of alien species is undertaken.
- Plant Rescue and Protection Plan, which allows for the maximum transplant of conservation important species from areas to be transformed.
- Re-vegetation and Habitat Re-habilitation Plan.
The contractor must ensure the protection of native animal species and in the case of injury during the work activities shall be ensured the veterinarian care.
4.13. SUSTAINABILITY WORKSITE AND SUSTAINABLE PLANT
The Client as renewable energy producer contributes to sustainable development. The widespread generation from water, sun, wind and the Earth’s heat favors the self-sufficiency
of nations while supporting environmental protection. However, Client’s approach to sustainability is not limited to its intrinsically “green” nature,
but also promotes a strategy that integrates sustainability into business processes and in the entire value chain. Any sustainable initiatives on voluntary bases or required by the authorization must be
reported to the client and keep under monitoring by dedicated KPI. The Client will manage the communication campaign about the initiative.
The Client it might require to the Contractor to participate and collaborate in the implementation of a “Sustainable Construction site” and “Sustainable Plant”.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
32 di/of 37
5. SECTION 5 - EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT
5.1.1. First aid and Injured Management
First Aid, Emergency plan and equipment on site shall be in compliance with the applicable
Law. The Contractor in charge of the Medical first aid (if any) hereinafter called CMS shall provide a dedicated survey to localize the nearest and specialized “hospitals" available considering the most possible critical situations like: hearth attack, internal hemorrhage, fracture, etc.
An Agreement with a helicopter service it might be requested when the public hospital is located more than 100 km away from the site.
Emergency trial must be performed before the start of the activity, including the path between the site and the closer hospital. The closer hospital must be informed, prior to start the works, of the presence of the
construction or main activities. Due to the size of the site, the number of workers expected on site and the distance from the main built up area the Client could require:
- Emergency/First aid room with paramedics always present on site from the start to
the end of the activities (when activities are ongoing)
- At least two paramedic and a nurse 24/7 available on site (generally adopted when
the worksite is in a remote area, with a camp for the workers)
- First aid personnel and first aid kits, at every work area for each contractor and working area shall be identified and communicated to the CMS
- An automated external defibrillator (AED) shall be present on site - Each company vehicle on site shall contain as a minimum a first aid kit.
- 4 x 4 emergency vehicle with the proper equipment and medical tools to assist and stabilize any injured person on site, with radio communication system to guarantee the communication within the area between Supervisors and the First aid personnel
and the ambulance or emergency services.
Before decide to transport an injured person to the closer hospital should be done by the
paramedic a previous assess of the injured person condition, the distance, the number of workers injured, the time from a hospital ambulance arrival. Depending on that assessment the First Aid team it might be requested to use the ambulance if present or to call for an external ambulance or to request the helicopter emergency service.
Contractors must ensure that all the first aid equipment, vehicles and personnel are on site from the start of the activities on site, considering any kind of pre-activity with workers on
site and according with the total amount of the workers on site, and must ensure that the emergency services assist the Client Personnel on site and the transport to the hospital if necessary.
Contractor and subcontractor shall ensure a prompt First Aid intervention (not the Medical First Aid) to his employees.
5.1.2. Fire
The Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall consider the risk in the emergency plan and implement all the reasonable measures to avoid it. The contractors shall implement such measures as defined by the applicable Law. Moreover the client could requires:
- Preliminary survey of the local fire station available (distance, equipment) - Inform the fire station of the activity on going
- Firefighting vehicles full time present on site (the number must be sized in relation to the season and the activities on going and in relation to site if is necessary 4x4
vehicles). - fire extinguishers and means of emergency notification at every work area.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
33 di/of 37
Emergency trial must be performed before the start of the activity.
- Firefighter Staff, trained firefighting personnel must be appointed, in relation to the
number of workers present on site, and as required by applicable Law. -
On site the measures aimed to avoid the risks shall be in compliance with the authorization requirements.
5.1.3. Environmental hazards
Possible Emergencies cause are: - Spills of pollutants (oil, fuels, waste waters, etc.),
- contamination of polluted water, white and black waste water An emergency procedure for chemical spills or other potential incidents shall be developed.
All sensitive sites will be identified such as rivers and wetlands and procedures developed to ensure proper handling of oil/fuel or chemical spillages in these areas. It will be ensured that all employees are aware of the procedure to be followed in case of accidental spills and leaks.
It will be ensured that the necessary materials and equipment for dealing with spills and leaks is available in the working area at all times. All employees will be trained to handle all accidental leaks and spillages on site appropriately. To minimize the risks the preventive measures reported in this document about sources of
possible contamination should be performed at the worksite areas. For further detail, consult Annex F “Refueling of vehicles and machinery at EGP worksites”
5.1.4. Animals hazard
The Contractor and sub-contractors shall consider the risk of animals, such as snakes, reptiles, spiders and wild animals in their emergency plan and implement all the reasonable measures to avoid it. The client requires a preliminary assessment of the most common animals present on site. In case of presence the client could requires:
- Procedure to follow in case of snake’s bit or animal’s attack (reference person to call). - Training on all the workers regarding the animals’ procedure - Appointments of valid, trained persons in charge for the snake’s bites and safely
handle/capture reptiles. - Training to a group of employee of the staff to be able to catch and relocate
dangerous animals, spiders, snakes.
- Use of appropriate PPEs - In case of presence of wild dangerous animals the contractor is required to take all
the reasonable measure to avoid the risk, such as: - Training on all the workers regarding the risk and the measures implemented
- Agreement with a trained animals’ wrangler, to assist the contractor in the management of the wild animals’ presence.
- Use of appropriate PPEs
- Provide a full time surveillance patrol (especially before the erection of the fence)
6. HEALTH
The contractor shall provide and install on site a meteorological forecasting system that also
includes the monitoring of UV radiation The contractor in all enclosed buildings of site, must provide and install an ultrasonic rodents-repeller.
The catering contractor must have a procedure according to the HACCP (Hazard Analysis & Critical Control Point) protocol in order to guarantee an adequate hygienic degree with regard
to all processes involving food: manufacture, processing, packaging, storage, transport, distribution, preparation, handling, sale and deliver.
The catering service supplier shall provide for every meal served to users, a satisfaction survey.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
34 di/of 37
In order to saving energy in tropical country, the contractor shall install in the main canteen
access an energy saving air barrier.
7. SECTION - ANNEXES
A. POLICIES AND OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PACKAGES
B. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS OF WORKSITE
C. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR EXCAVATED SOIL AND ROCKS MANAGEMENT AT EGP WORKSITES
D. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANAGING AREAS OF WASTE/MATERIAL REMAINING AT EGP WORKSITES
E. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR WASHING OF VEHICLES AT WORKSITES
F. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR REFUELLING OF VEHICLES AND MACHINERY AT WORKSITES
G. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKS AT NIGHT IN EGP WORKSITES
H. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF MV/HV AERIAL LINE AT EGP
WORKSITES
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
35 di/of 37
POLICIES AND OPERATIONAL INNSTRUCTIONS
PACKAGES
Kind of document
Download
PRE-JOB CHECK & POST-JOB REVIEW Policy n°123
(ex.35) PL 123 (ex 35) Pre-Job Check and Post-Job Review.pdf
GUIDELINE FOR SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBCONTRACTORS
Policy n°135 (ex.52) PD_PL_135_Guidelin
e_for_safety_and_environmental_requirements_for_subcontractors.pdf
GUIDELINE FOR WORKSITE EMERGENCY PLAN
Policy n°141 (ex.57) PD_PL_141_Guidelin
e_for_the_Worksite_Emergency_Plan.pdf
PERMIT TO WORK Policy n° 208
(ex.275) PD_PL_208_Permit to Work (PtW).pdf
LOCKOUT/TAGOUT “LOTO Policy n°274 policy 274 (loto).pdf
SAFE USE OF MOBILE PHONE AT WORK Policy n°291 PD_PL_291_SAFE USE OF MOBILE PHONE AT WORK.pdf
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY RISK ASSESSMENT Policy n°261 PD_OHS RiskAssessment.pdf
LIFTING ACTIVITIES SAFETY RULES
Operational Instruction
n°790 PD_OI_790_Lifting
Activities Safety Rules.pdf
WORK AT HEIGHT SAFETY RULES
Operational Instruction
n°791 PD_OI_791_Work at
Height.pdf
ANNEX A
Organizational Area GROUP
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
POLICY N. 35 dated 21/12/2012
Object: Pre-Job Check & Post-Job Review
1/4
INTERNAL USE
INDICE
1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA................................................................................. 2
2. DEPARTMENT IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT ............................................................................ 2 3. REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................... 2
4. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE GROUP PROCESS MAP ............................................ 2 5. DEFINITION AND ACRONYMS ................................................................................................... 2
6. THE PRE-JOB CHECK .............................................................................................................. 3
7. POST-JOB REVIEW ................................................................................................................. 4
8. ATTACHMENT ........................................................................................................................ 4
THE CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
Francesco Starace
Organizational Area GROUP
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
POLICY N. 35 dated 21/12/2012
Object: Pre-Job Check & Post-Job Review
2/4
INTERNAL USE
1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA
This document aims to provide guidelines to ensure in Enel Green Power Group the adoption of a common
practice to hold a safety meeting before the start of any operational activity (Pre-Job Check) and also at the
end of its undertaking (Post-Job Review), in order to improve safety standards during works execution and prevent accidents occurrence.
This document applies to Enel Green Power Group.
2. DEPARTMENT IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT
The Safety, Environment and Quality function is in charge of drafting, interpreting and updating this
document.
The document has been authorized by Human Resource and Organization function.
3. REFERENCES
• Enel Code of Ethics; • The Enel Group Zero Tolerance of Corruption (ZCT) Plan; • Organization and management model as per Legislative Decree no. 231/2001 and Guidelines 231 for
non Italian Subsidiaries;
• Enel S.p.A. Policy no. 11 dated 5 March 2009 “Policy on Health and Safety in the Workplace”; • Operational Instruction n. 1 dated 10/6/2010 “Reporting and analysis of work accidents, near miss”; • Enel S.p.A. Organizational Procedure no. 132 dated 5 August 2009 “Communication, management
and reporting of near misses”; • Organizational Procedure 47 rev.01 dated 23/07/2012 “Project Management”.
4. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE GROUP PROCESS MAP
Macro-process: Health & Safety
5. DEFINITION AND ACRONYMS
Worker: Person who materially undertakes an operational activity.
Supervisor: Person to whom the task is entrusted, within the limits of the conferred task, to ensure that the working activity is undertaken in compliance with health and safety regulations and company rules,
monitoring that work is undertaken correctly, in terms of methods and procedures defined, monitoring the use of Collective Protective Equipment (CPE) and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and informing the line
managers in case of violations. The appointment of the supervisor must be done before starting the working activity according to criteria and
methods which make clear the appointment to the interested party and to other team members. There must
be only one single foreman for every work area.
Safety Manager: experienced person with a vast knowledge of Safety items and Operation & Maintenance and Engineering & Construction activities
Organizational Area GROUP
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
POLICY N. 35 dated 21/12/2012
Object: Pre-Job Check & Post-Job Review
3/4
INTERNAL USE
6. THE PRE-JOB CHECK
This procedure is applied to the following activities:
• Operation & Maintenance (O&M)activities, only in case the supervisor is an EGP employee; • Engineering & Construction (E&C)activities, only in case a preliminary meeting is considered
necessary.
In the case of operational activities which involve two or more workers, the supervisor, before starting the
working activity, must organize a meeting with the components of the team, called “Pre-Job Check”, aimed at guaranteeing, with the support of the appropriate checklist, that all the workers:
• are informed on the work to be undertaken and the operational methods to be followed; • are aware of the related risks; • consequently adopt all the necessary measures to ensure that the work is executed in safety. • wear the suitable PPEs.
Regarding O&M activities, “pre Job Check” meeting will be carried out for those operative activities that are not a work routine and not managed by a different specific documentation related to risk assessment (eg.
Permit-to-Work activities).
Office activities and activities related to a trivial value of risk are also excluded from the application of the
procedure, while activities in which a clear risk is evaluated have to be included.
In the “Pre-Job Check” the supervisor and team members re-examine all phases of the work and related tasks, evaluate together the situation of potential risk to health and safety which could arise and what
behaviors have to be adopted in order to prevent accident.
Regarding E&C activities, in case of activities managed by contractors, the external supervisor will carry on
the “Pre-job check” meeting, with the aim to check on site if all the risks listed in the Risk Assessment have
been evaluated.
The Safety Manager remains, in any case, the person that can evaluate the possibility and the periodicity of
carrying out the meeting, according to the type of the worksite and the on-going activities, sharing his
decision with the Site Coordinator named in the Project Team.
6.1. METHOD OF UNDERTAKING
The supervisor, before executing the work gathers the team members and proceeds to:
• describe in detail the main phases of work to be undertaken and their associated risks, with a level of detail adequate to the level of complexity of the activity to be undertaken;
• draw the attention of the workers to the work stages which are most significant in terms of safety (e.g. where coordination between different activities is necessary, use of special equipment, etc.) and
on associated preventive measures to be adopted in order to prevent accidents, expressly requiring
observance;
• indicate the equipment to be used, the necessary collective protective equipment and personal protective equipment, requiring the control of efficiency of the workers before allowing their use;
• entrust tasks, providing all further required explanations. If some operations should change during the works or there is the perception of a rising danger, it is
necessary to arrange a new Pre-Job Check before continuing the works.
Organizational Area GROUP
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
POLICY N. 35 dated 21/12/2012
Object: Pre-Job Check & Post-Job Review
4/4
INTERNAL USE
At the end of the meeting, the supervisor asks each team member to:
• confirm their understanding of the specific tasks assigned; • focus attention to particular safety measures required in each work stage; • define the coordination activities with the other workers and any further specifications.
The supervisor compiles a Pre-Job Check Summary Report in which are summarized the main key points arising from the meeting.
The checklist that can be used to perform a Pre-Job Check Summary Report will be customized and sent
directly to Safety Managers from Safety Environment and Quality central function.
There is also the possibility to use other standard checklists to support the meeting, at least it will contains
minimal requirements showed in Attachment 1.
These minimal requirements are the name of the supervisor, the date, hour and information relating the activity to be undertaken, a short explanation of the briefing performed before starting the activity,
additional information required by workers and the explanations provided. The record certifies the effective
execution of the above described activity, in order to guarantee the common agreement and understanding
of the work process to be undertaken.
After the acquisition of the reasonable confidence that all workers have understood how to proceed, the supervisor allows start of the working activities reminding the team members to signal immediately any
unforeseen event or any situation which could give rise to a Near Miss.
7. POST-JOB REVIEW
At the end of the operational activities, in the case of particularly complex works, the supervisor has to organize a moment for collective reflection on safety, called “Post-Job Review”, in which the activities already
closed are re-examined, highlighting further attention points emerging or additional unforeseen episodes and
defining together the improvement actions to be reported to the line managers in order to enhance safety standards during work execution.
Also in this case there is the possibility to use the “Post-Job Review” section contained in the customized
checklist or to refer to another different checklist, that contains at list the contents of Attachment 1.
The supervisor will collect and conserve in the respective Unit or worksite all the documentation obtained
from the checklists and records.
8. ATTACHMENT
8.1. ATTACHMENT 1: EXAMPLE OF PRE-JOB CHECK SUMMARY REPORT AND POST-JOB REVIEW – MINIMAL REQUIREMENTS
Organizational Area GROUP RENEWABLE ENERGIES
POLICY N. 35 dated 21/12/2012 Object: Pre-Job Check & Post-Job Review
1/2
INTERNAL USE
1. ATTACHMENT 1
Pre-Job Check Summary Report
Date______________
Description of Work ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Health and Safety Risks and attention points ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Preventive and Protective Measures to be adopted ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ The signature of the supervisor indicates that this document has been filled, shared and underwritten by team members assigned to undertake this work, before starting the activity
Supervisor Signature ___________________________ ________________________________________ Participants: Signature ___________________________ __________________________________________ ___________________________ __________________________________________ ___________________________ __________________________________________ ___________________________ __________________________________________ ___________________________ __________________________________________ ___________________________ __________________________________________
Organizational Area GROUP RENEWABLE ENERGIES
POLICY N. 35 dated 21/12/2012 Object: Pre-Job Check & Post-Job Review
2/2
INTERNAL USE
Post-Job Review Attention points or unforeseen events happened ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Further improvement actions to be suggested for the future ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________
POLICY No. 52 dated 30/01/2014 INTERNAL USE
Organizational Area GROUP
Subject: Guideline for safety and environmental requirements for subcontractors
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
INDEX
0. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................. 2 1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA ..................................................................................... 2 2. UNIT IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT ................................................................................................ 2 3. REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................................. 2 4. ALLOCATION WITH RESPECT TO THE GROUP PROCESS MAP ................................................... 3 5. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS .............................................................................................................. 3 6. RELIANCE ON SUBCONTRACTORS ....................................................................................................... 5 6. SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 6
7. MANAGEMENT OF SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 7
THE CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER Francesco Starace
1 / 7
POLICY No. 52 dated 30/01/2014 INTERNAL USE
Organizational Area GROUP
Subject: Guideline for safety and environmental requirements for subcontractors
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
0. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
• Objectives This policy aims to create a minimum standard on safety and environmental performance among the subcontractors, performing works or services on behalf of the Companies of Enel Green Power Group.
• Key elements The main features of this process are: reliance on subcontractors, safety and environment requirements management of safety and environment requirements.
1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA
This policy aims to define the minimum requirements on safety and environment that subcontractors, performing works or services due to the contract and on behalf of the Companies of Enel Green Power Group, must meet. This policy doesn’t substitute the actual national laws or regulations about subcontracting.
This policy shall be implemented and applied to the extent possible within the Enel Green Power Group and in compliance with any applicable laws, regulations and governance rules, including any stock exchange and unbundling relevant provisions, which in any case prevail over the provisions contained in this document.
2. UNIT IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT
Responsible for the elaboration of the document
Safety, Environment and Quality
Responsible for the authorization of the document
Human Resources and Organization
3. REFERENCES
· Code of Ethics of the Enel Group; · Enel Group Zero Tolerance (ZTC) Plan; · Organizational and management model as per Italian Legislative Decree No. 231/2001 and
231 Guidelines for non Italian Subsidiaries; · Policy No. 50 dated 06/02/2012 "One Company Handbook" of Enel S.p.A.; · Organizational Procedure No. 95 dated 21/02/2013 “Enel Green Power Group Health and
Safety Handbook”; · National regulations, European and International laws about Health & Safety at workplace; · European Community Regulations about public contracts concerning works, services and
supplies, Civil Code principles and national laws about subcontracting;
2 / 7
POLICY No. 52 dated 30/01/2014 INTERNAL USE
Organizational Area
GROUP Subject: Guideline for safety and environmental requirements for subcontractors RENEWABLE ENERGIES
· Organizational Procedure No. 132 dated 5/8/2009 “Communication, management and
reporting of near misses”; · Policy No. 49 dated 28/12/2011 “Definition, implementation and reporting of Health & Safety
Key Performance Indicators (KPI)”; · Policy No. 65 dated 17/12/2012 “Guideline about health & safety requirements for
subcontractors”; · Operational Instruction No. 137 dated 10/25/2013 “Reporting and analysis of accidents, first
aid cases, near misses, environmental incidents and/or damages, litigations”; · Operational Instruction No. 65 rev.01 dated 04/09/2013 “Management of Subcontracts for the
construction of renewable energy plants”.
4. ALLOCATION WITH RESPECT TO THE GROUP PROCESS MAP
Process Area: HSEQ Macro-Process: Health and Safety
5. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
EGP Enel Green Power Group.
Client Head of the Unit on behalf of whom activities are realized.
Company’s Safety Document Document, prepared by the employer of the contractors, that regulates works execution in order to ensure the compliance with safety rules in work areas.
Contract With regards to the present policy for contract is intended an act with certain benefits for involved
parties (EGP and chosen firm), that defines the rights and obligations of both parties, including
execution, terms and conditions of the works and/or services and/or supplies, that represent the
object of the contract.
Contract Manager Accountable for administration and expense issues in the process of contractors management, belonging to the Unit/Organizational Structure that manages the contract on behalf of the Client.
Contractor Company that stipulated the Contract with the Client and that can subcontract the execution of the
Contract, within the limits and conditions valid for each national legislation (for example,
authorization of the Buyer/Employer).
Relevant Unit Each Unit involved within EGP.
SEQ Safety, Environment and Quality Function.
3 / 7
POLICY No. 52 dated 30/01/2014 INTERNAL USE
Organizational Area GROUP
Subject: Guideline for safety and environmental requirements for subcontractors
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
SEQA
Safety, Environment and Quality Area/Country unit within SEQ.
Subcontracting
Contract by means of which the Contractor, prior authorization of the Client, subcontracts a third
company for the execution of works, services or supplies, that require the use of manpower as an
object of the Contract/Agreement, within the limits and at the conditions defined by each national
legislations.
Subcontractor Company that stipulated the subcontract agreement with the Contractor and that should fit the following requirements:
· manages independently the organization of personnel, means, tools and materials necessary for the execution of the works as defined in the subcontract agreement;
· is responsible for the administration of own employees and the organization of work; · assumes the risk of the company;
· performs independently the works in compliance with the contractual agreement and with
any further indications received by the Contractor during execution;
· assumes the responsibility in case of damages as a consequence of non-fulfilment of the tasks defined in the subcontract agreement.
Work accident (Lost time injury accident)
An injury-causing event due to violent cause and at work (with the meaning of “related to work”),
that caused death or permanent inability to work, total or partial, that is a temporary total inability
involving an absence from work for at least one day, excluding the one on which the incident
occurred. Regarding to accidents, can be distinguished: · Fatal accident - An injury-causing event that causes the death of the injured person. · Severe accident – An injury-causing event with:
- first prognosis, reported on the first medical certificate issued, of over 30 (calendar) days;
- guarded prognosis, until the injured employee is taken off the hospital/emergency room danger list;
- unknown prognosis but which is estimated of over 30 (calendar) days by an initial assessment by the involved Division/Company.
When the injured employee is taken off the hospital/emergency room danger list or the prognosis
is defined, the accident has to be considered severe only if the first prognosis is over 30 (calendar)
days. Whenever the injured employee is not taken off the hospital/emergency room danger list or
the prognosis is still unknown within 30 (calendar) days of the date of the accident, the accident has
to be classified as severe.
· Non severe accident – An injury - causing event with a first prognosis, reported on thefirst medical certificate issued, up to 30 (calendar) days.
First Aid Case (No Lost time injury Accident)
An injury-causing event that occurs due to a violent cause and at work (with the meaning of “related
to work”), and requires first aid at a healthcare establishment or the use of a first aid kit, with work
being resumed immediately or abandoned only for the rest of the day or of the shift during which it
takes place.
4 / 7
POLICY No. 52 dated 30/01/2014 INTERNAL USE
Organizational Area GROUP
Subject: Guideline for safety and environmental requirements for subcontractors
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
Near Miss
An unplanned work-related event that did not result in injury or illness but had the potential to do so. Only a fortunate break in the chain of events prevented an accident.
Commuting accident
Accident occurring during direct transfer/journey from the employee’s home to workplace or vice
versa or, if no company canteen is available, during the normal journey to and from the workplace
to the area where meals are consumed. Commuting accidents are considered, for the purposes of
this Policy, only if happened to EGP employees.
Environmental incident
Event with the potential to contaminate an area intended in its various environmental matrices (soil,
subsoil and groundwater). Example: spill of hazardous substances, or more generally, an event can
potentially contaminate the site and/or create environmental damage.
Environmental damage
An event that affects the environment, causing damage to it, altering, impairing or destroying, in
whole or in part (e.g. deterioration, compared to its original condition, caused to protected
species and natural habitats; unauthorized felling of trees, etc.).
Penalties and litigation
Offence, of administrative or criminal type, related to safety or environment, including the birth of
litigations between private parties that could lead to a complaint to the judicial authority (e.g.
request for reimbursement by a private individual for environmental damage, threat to sue EGP for
noise pollution, etc.).
6. RELIANCE ON SUBCONTRACTORS
The Contractor must carry out own works, services and supplies, as an object of the Contract. It is
forbidden to entrust the contract to third parties. Taking into account the previous points, all the
performances can be subcontracted within the limits allowed by the national legislation and by any
internal rules established by EGP.
For the works - as regard the main category - limit in subcontracting is normally up to 30% of
contractual amount. For services and supplies this limit is referred to the total amount of the
contract/agreement. Any possible variation of this amount, will be object of a specific
authorization1.
Taking into account national legislation or internal rules defined by EGP, the subcontracting should respect the following conditions:
· competitors during bidding or the main contractor, also in case of eventual changes during
execution, in the act of contracting have indicated the works/part of works or the services or
supplies/part of services or supplies that are the matter of subcontracting;
· main contractor guarantees the registration of the subcontracting agreement to the Client before the effective start of activities;
· at the moment of registration of subcontracting agreement to the Client, the main contractor
transmits to the Client a certification proving subcontractor meets all the requirements of
subcontracted activities and also provides the Client with declaration that
1 This authorization is not necessary for the EPC contractor
5 / 7
POLICY No. 52 dated 30/01/2014 INTERNAL USE
Organizational Area GROUP
Subject: Guideline for safety and environmental requirements for subcontractors
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
states the compliance with general requirements;
· the execution of subcontracted activities can’t be the object of another level of
subcontracting, excepting the requirements of local law of each Country.
The Contractor pays the safety & environmental costs2, related to the activities entrusted in
subcontracting3, to Subcontractor without any reduction. The Client checks the effective application
of these provisions by referent appointed for contractor management and supervision.
The Contractor must respect the economic and normative conditions established by “collective work
contracts” in force in every Country; where applicable in compliance with local regulations, there
should be joint responsibility between Contractor and subcontractors for the fulfilment of the above-
mentioned rules towards - as indicative and not exhaustive – safety, salary, contributions and
insurance obligations - provided to the employees involved in the execution of the subcontracted
activities. However the Contractor remains completely and exclusively responsible towards the involved Company of EGP for the execution of Procurement Contract/Agreement.
6. SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS
In order to guarantee a proper selection of subcontractors, Contractors must check if subcontractors
meet the Safety & Environment requirements requested by the national regulations and by the
Client relevant to subcontracted activities, such as: · Company Safety & Environment Policy; · safety & Environment risk assessment related to the activities to be performed;
· safety & environment documents and procedures, that regulate clearly the activities execution; · internal Safety & Environment organization with S&E representatives appointed with clear roles
and responsibilities; · safety & Environment procedures referring to:
- Safety & Environment training for all personnel; - Personal Protective Equipment (PPE); - safety & environment inspections execution; - accident analysis and remediation plans implementation;
· copy of the Accidents Record (or similar document certified by the National Institute for work accidents);
· figures relevant to work accidents occurred in the last 3 years and for every year (i.e.
frequency rate, severity index4); · figures relevant to environmental incidents/damages occurred in the last 3 years and for
every year; · any certification according to the standard OHSAS 18001/2007, ISO 14001:2004 (or
similar); · any document issued for insurance purposes by the National Institute for work accidents,
that reports the applied assurance rate.
These requirements can vary on the basis of subcontract typology and will be defined by relevant Safety, Environment & Quality Unit, with the support of Technical experts, who are qualified to
2 Cost for the measures adopted to eliminate, or if it’s not possible, to reduce safety and environmental risks caused by
works interfering. 3 When provided by each National legislation.
4 Frequency rate: (No. of accidents/worked hours) x 1.000.000. Severity Index: (lost days/worked hours) x 1.000.
6 / 7
POLICY No. 52 dated 30/01/2014 INTERNAL USE
Organizational Area GROUP
Subject: Guideline for safety and environmental requirements for subcontractors
RENEWABLE ENERGIES
provide support and check on the technical part of an offer
For the necessary checks for insurance purposes, the Contractor will have to send to relevant EGP
units, under his own responsibility, a self-declaration that proves subcontractor meets safety and
environmental requirements. The Contractor will also have to keep the relative subcontractor
documentation for all contract duration, in order to permit relevant Units carry out checks.
Relevant Units, on the basis of received declaration, will evaluate if proceed on the acquisition of
above-mentioned documentation in order to grant the authorization to subcontract, according to
national laws or regulations. Before granting authorization to subcontract, relevant Units will be able to carry out further checks
about the Subcontractor requirements compliance, if isn’t explicitly inconsistent with national laws
or regulations.
7. MANAGEMENT OF SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS
For all the Contract duration contractor must provide documentation on safety and environmental
topics relevant to the activities contracted, according to requirements of national laws and
regulations and in compliance with collaboration and coordination obligations towards their own
subcontractors.
Subcontractors safety and environmental documents must be kept where the activities object of Contract are performed, for their application and for being showed on request to:
· Client personnel in charge of contract management and control; · employees in charge of inspections/operational controls;
· National Authorities in charge of control on compliance with safety & environmental
regulation.
Subcontractor must appoint at least one safety & environment supervisor and communicate his name and any eventual variation to Contractor. However, subcontractors can’t perform the activities in absence of a safety & environment supervisor.
Contractor must immediately communicate to Client each event (including near misses) that involves
or could involve workers’ health and safety during works execution and /or environmental impact,
also referring to activities performed by subcontractors. In case of environmental accidents or accidents occurred to workers employed and/or eventual
subcontractors and/or any other Companies involved by Contractor in contract execution, the
Contractor must attach a copy of each accident communication, submitted to the National Competent
Authorities, to fore-mentioned communication and a Root Cause analysis Report including the
corrective and preventive actions.
7 / 7
INTERNAL USE
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 1 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
INDICE
0. eXECUTIVE SUMMARY .......................................................................................................... 3 1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA ............................................................................. 3 2. Unit in charge of the Document ............................................................................................. 3 3. References .......................................................................................................................... 3 4. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS .............................................................................................. 4 5. PROCESS DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 4 6. plan DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................................................. 4
6.1. Identification of the Hazards ............................................................................................. 4 6.2. Identification and implementation of the emergency measures ............................................. 5
6.2.1. Medical Services and First aid...................................................................................... 5 6.2.1.1. Fire Safety ................................................................................................................ 5 6.2.2. Environment ............................................................................................................. 6 6.2.3. other risks ................................................................................................................ 6 6.2.4. Communication system .............................................................................................. 7
6.3. Information and Trainings ................................................................................................ 7 6.4. Administration of the Plan ................................................................................................ 7
7. Emergency Plan contents ...................................................................................................... 7 7.1. General Information ........................................................................................................ 7 7.2. General features and layout ............................................................................................. 8 7.3. Vulnerable area .............................................................................................................. 9 7.4. Emergency MAnagEment ................................................................................................. 9 7.5. Local Pubblic Emergency facilities .................................................................................... 10 7.6. Emergency team ........................................................................................................... 10 7.7. Workers and people on site ............................................................................................ 10 7.8. Information and training ................................................................................................ 11 7.9. Emergency drills ........................................................................................................... 11 7.10. Emergency Equipment ................................................................................................... 11 7.11. Emergency Response Procedure ...................................................................................... 11
8. ANNEX .............................................................................................................................. 11 0. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .......................................................................................................... 2 1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA ............................................................................. 2 2. UNIT IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT ..................................................................................... 2 3. REFERENCES ....................................................................................................................... 2 4. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS .............................................................................................. 3 5. PROCESS DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 3 6. PLAN DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................................................ 3
6.1. Identification of the Hazards ............................................................................................. 3 6.2. Identification and implementation of the emergency measures ............................................. 4
6.2.1. Medical Services and First aid...................................................................................... 4 6.2.1.1. Fire Safety ................................................................................................................ 4 6.2.2. Environment ............................................................................................................. 5 6.2.3. Other risks ............................................................................................................... 5 6.2.4. Communication system .............................................................................................. 6
6.3. Information and Trainings ................................................................................................ 6 6.4. Administration of the Plan ................................................................................................ 6
7. EMERGENCY PLAN CONTENTS ............................................................................................... 6 7.1. General Information ........................................................................................................ 6 7.2. General features and layout ............................................................................................. 7
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
Formatted ...
INTERNAL USE
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 2 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
7.3. Vulnerable area .............................................................................................................. 8 7.4. Emergency MAnagEment ................................................................................................. 8 7.5. Local Pubblic Emergency facilities ...................................................................................... 9 7.6. Emergency team ............................................................................................................. 9 7.7. Workers and people on site .............................................................................................. 9 7.8. Information and training ................................................................................................ 10 7.9. Emergency drills ........................................................................................................... 10 7.10. Emergency Equipment ................................................................................................... 10 7.11. Emergency Response Procedure ...................................................................................... 10
8. ANNEX .............................................................................................................................. 10
THE CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
Francesco Venturini
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 3 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
0. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Objectives
This policy aims to provide the necessary information in the developing of the emergency plan and in the design of the emergency preventive measures.
The following information must be considered as minimum requirements to be integrated and personalized with the specific characteristic of the project.
This policy is valid for all the EGP construction sites.
Key Elements
The main features of this policy are:
- Sequences to follow in order to develop a complete and full emergency plan;
- Elements to analyse in the preliminary stage of the design, during the preliminary assessment;
- Minimum contents of the emergency plan, body of the document and minimum terms requested by
EGP.
1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA
Enel Green Power requires that each construction site has his own Emergency plan. This document provides information to assist in developing these plans and in designing the emergency measures.
This document shall be implemented and applied in compliance with any applicable law, regulation and governance rules, including any stock exchange and unbundling relevant provision, which in any case prevail
over the contents of this document.
The policy is addressed to all the EGP’s employees, external collaborators and external services who are
involved in the drawing up of the emergency plan of the worksites.
2. UNIT IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT
Responsible for the documents elaboration of the document:
Health, Safety, Environment and Quality Responsible for the authorization of the document
Human Resources and Organization
3. REFERENCES
Enel Group Code of Ethics; Enel Group Zero Tolerance (ZTC) Plan;
Organizational and management model as per Italian Legislative Decree No. 231/2001 and 231 Guidelines for non Italian Subsidiaries;
Policy No. 50 dated 06/02/2012 "One Company Handbook" of Enel S.p.A Safety and Environment Management System Manual of EGP S.p.A.;
Organizational Procedure No. 95 dated 21/02/2013 “Enel Green Power Group Health and Safety Handbook”;
Organizational Procedure No. 125 dated 06/12/2013 “Incident and Crisis Management”; Policy No. 29 dated 21/3/2012 “Occupational Health & Safety and Environment improvement system of
Enel Green Power”;
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 4 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
Operational Instruction No. 137 dated 25/10/2013 “Reporting and analysis of accidents, first aid cases, near misses, environmental incidents and/or damages, litigations”.
4. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
EGP Enel Green Power S.p.A.
E&C Engineering and Construction Function
HSEQ Health, Safety, Environment and Quality Function
5. PROCESS DESCRIPTION
The emergency plan must be prepared by the Main Contractor or by an external service of the Client, depending on the local law and by the type of contract. The emergency plan shall be ready at least 30 days
before the start of the construction activity, submitted to the Client for approval. Because construction sites are frequently fast-changing, the process of hazard assessment must be ongoing to accommodate the dynamic
environment, and the emergency plan must be periodically reviewed during the construction, and tested with periodic emergency drills.
6. PLAN DEVELOPMENT
Emergency preparedness helps to minimize the human suffering and economic losses that can result from
emergencies. The methodology to develop the emergency plan should be:
1. Identification of the hazards
- Preliminary assessment 2. Identification and implementation of the emergency measures
- Prevention measures - Emergency equipment
3. Information and training - Information and instruction - Training
4. Administration of the Plan
6.1. IDENTIFICATION OF THE HAZARDS
Prior to elaborate the emergency plan and define the emergency measures it’s necessary to conduct a
preliminary assessment aimed to identify the characteristic of the site and the peculiarities of the area. This assessment shall be carried out through a site visit, interviews with local communities and inspection to the
local emergency services. The process of Hazard identification/assessment involves a thorough review that should include, but not be limited to, the following points:
- Accessibility of the site: how to reach the site is one of the first aspects to consider while planning the
emergency of the worksite. The mandatory use of 4X4 vehicles depends on the condition of the main
road (gravel or paved). If the access to the site is located in a remote area, signals indicating the
access must be placed along the main road, in order to facilitate the arrive of the emergency services.
- Proximity to traffic and public ways.
- Distance from the main built up area: the main built up area is the closest area in which there are
clinics, banks, fire stations, hotels and restaurants. Main parameters influences the emergency
measures of the site depending on the distance from the main built up area. The distance (km), the
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 5 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
time needed to reach the site and the local clinic, the quality and the services and the guarantee of a
prompt service must be evaluated during the assessment.
- Communication: within the site and in the access road the communication must be guarantee. In case
of area with no phone signal the contractor must implement alternative solution, such as satellite
phone, installation of repeater. In case of emergency no dead zone must be present on site.
- Vegetation: a worksite located in an area full of vegetation, dry and windy has a high risk of fire. The
fire can belong form the worksite (by activities with open flames) and from the surrounding area. The
emergency plan must consider both the situations. A special fire risk assessment must be carried out.
- Watercourses: the presence of a river or of a watercourse near the worksite can represent the risk of
flood. In this case it’s needed an agreement with a rescue service, to call in case of emergency.
- Animals: a specific assessment focused on all the species of animals present in the area close to the
worksite must be undertaken. The assessment must be part of the emergency plan and communicate to
all the workers, supplier and visitors. In case of wild animals, poisonous or dangerous the specific
emergency kit must be taken on site (when possible) or arranged a prompt rescue with the local
hospital.
- Socio-politic situation: the possibility of an armed attack or insurrections must be evaluated in the risk
assessment. The worksite must be fenced (as a preliminary activity), the access controlled and in case
of serious risk of external attack the security must be on site 24/7.
Record of the preliminary assessment must be kept in the emergency procedure file
6.2. IDENTIFICATION AND IMPLEMENTATION OF THE EMERGENCY MEASURES
It is important to identify which resources are available and have contingency plans in place to make up for any
deficiencies. The emergency plan shall be set also in conformity with the local law and local emergency procedure. The service to provide depends on the results of the preliminary assessment and on the risk
assessment.
6.2.1. MEDICAL SERVICES AND FIRST AID.
Depending on the quality/the distance/the availability of the existing local services the measure to adopt can
be:
4X4 ambulance on site, with a paramedic always present on site when the activities are
ongoing(option to adopt when the distance from the local clinic is more than 40 km, or when the
local clinic can’t guarantee a prompt service);
First aid room on site, with a paramedic and a nurse 24/7 available on site (when the construction
site is in a remote area, with a camp for the workers)
Agreement with a helicopter service (when the public hospital is located more than 100 km away
from the site)
First aid Staff, trained first aid personnel must be appointed, in relation to the number of workers
present on site, and as required by local law First aid kit available on site
The option listed and their rules of application are not binding. They depend also on time needed to assist the injured. Case by case the options must be evaluated.
6.2.1.1. FIRE SAFETY
The emergency measures to provide onsite depend on various aspects. First of all the location of the site
(distance from fire stations) and the surrounding environment (dry vegetation).
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 6 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
Furthermore the locations, type and amounts of various potential fuels (combustibles) should be considered. All workplaces may contain simple combustibles such as paper, packing materials and furniture. Some workplaces
may contain large quantities of highly flammable or extremely flammable materials such as solvents, fuel or gases.
It’s also important consider the potential ignition sources and frequency and duration of occurrence (hot works, electrical equipment).
The assessment must also take into account the number of people who might be harmed. Special consideration must be given to those who might be more at risk of fire (workers in isolated locations, lone workers, etc.).
A range of preventive and precautionary measures will be necessary for the workplace. These could include the following issue:
Fire prevention, ways of minimizing the risk of fire occurring. Prevention of the spread of smokes and flames, ways of minimizing the risk to people should a fire
occur Fire detection and alarm, to ensure that a fire is detected as soon as possible once it has started and
everybody is aware of the risk Firefighting equipment, portable extinguishers
Fire fighter team on site Tanker of water on site if the fire station is too far from the site
6.2.2. ENVIRONMENT
Possible cause’s emergencies are:
- Spills of pollutants (oil, fuels, waste waters, etc.), - Contamination of water, white and black waste water.
An emergency procedure for chemical spills or other potential incidents shall be developed. Environmental kit (necessary materials and equipment for dealing with spills and leaks) must be placed in the worksite. All sensitive sites will be identified such as rivers and wetlands and procedures developed to ensure proper handling of oil/fuel or chemical spillages in these areas. It will be ensured that all employees are aware of the procedure to be followed in case of accidental spills and leaks.
6.2.3. OTHER RISKS
EGP worksites are frequently located in remote area, wild and isolated region. In the assessment it’s important
to investigate on the hazards belonging from animals, rivers and earthquakes.
In case of river within or close to the worksite the emergency plan shall include an evacuation procedure that
establishes:
- Prompt Information of E&C and HSE&Q EGP personnel of the upstream flood
- Issuing of the warning level of the upstream flood
- Evacuation warning alarm
- Procedure for the evacuation
In case of presence of poisonous snakes the measures to adopt could be:
- Procedure to follow in case of snake’s bit or animal’s attack (reference person to call).
- Training on all the workers regarding the animals’ procedure.
- Appointments of valid, trained persons in charge for the snake’s bites and safely handle/capture reptiles.
- Training to a group of employees of the staff to be able to catch and relocate snakes.
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 7 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
- Use of appropriate PPE´s.
In case of presence of wild dangerous animals the measure to adopt could be:
- Training on all the workers regarding the risk and the measures implemented.
- Agreement with a trained animals’ wrangler, to assist the contractor in the management of the wild animals’ presence.
- Use of appropriate PPE´s.
- Provide a full time surveillance patrol (especially before the erection of the fence).
6.2.4. COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Key factor of the effectiveness of the emergency response is a communication system that can relay accurate information quickly. To do this reliable communication equipment must be used, with a back-up system on
place. The equipment must be periodical checked. -
6.3. INFORMATION AND TRAININGS
All the personnel on site must be informed of the specific risks of the site, the emergency measures and the
procedure to follow in case of event. The safety officer (or the HS appointed person of the site) must explain to all the workers the emergency plan, during the initial induction. Any update of the plan must be communicated.
Log of the induction must be kept on site. Flyer with the emergency numbers to call must be posted in the logistic area and given to the supervisors.
Emergency numbers refer to the public local number and the number of the Client/contractor reference person.
Also Visitor and supplier that enter on site must be informed of the emergency procedure. It’s required a special induction to inform them about the risks and the behaviour to follow during the visit. A flyer (see annex
A) must be given to them. Log of the induction must be kept on site.
6.4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE PLAN
It is important to review the emergency plan on regular basis and especially after an emergency has occurred. Changes become necessary where deficiencies become apparent as the construction site starts.
7. EMERGENCY PLAN CONTENTS
The emergency plan must include and evaluate the following minimum contents. The emergency plan must
assure the assistance and the rescue of personnel in every situation, including also injured in confined space, in gallery, in remote area.
7.1. GENERAL INFORMATION
Data related to the location of the worksite, including address and geographic coordinates (both of the logistic
area and the main area of the worksite), data of start and end construction. It’s also important to specify name of the Client, reference person appointed by the Client, main contractor, and expected number of workers.
- Project Description - Project Contact
Facility Name:
Address
Geographic Coordinate
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 8 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
Site Phone Number
- Directions to this location: - Contact Numbers:
Agency Phone
Emergency (police, fire, medical)
Project Site Phone
Fire Department – non emergency
Police Department – non emergency
Poison Control Centre
Regional Office
- EGP Project Personnel
Title Name Office Cell
Project Manager
Site Manager
Safety & Environment
Safety & Environment
- Principal Contractor / Staff
Company Name Office Cell
- Medical Facility:
Facility Name:
Address
Phone Number
7.2. GENERAL FEATURES AND LAYOUT
Data related to the general characteristic of the project. A map of the site must be included, with the highlight of the main area relevant for emergency (meeting point, exit way, fire extinguishers). This layout will be also
used in the worksite to inform and communicate the emergency procedure to workers/supervisors/ visitors. The map will be posted in the main area of the site.
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 9 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
7.3. VULNERABLE AREA
Vulnerable area means zone with weakness for a logistic and emergency point of view. For example area in
which the rescue of people could be complicated due to presence of natural obstacles, or dead zone in which it is impossible to communicate in case of event. This area must be highlighted in this dedicated chapter,
providing also the preventive measure adopted.
7.4. EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT
In this part of the emergency plan, it is described a list of any possible risk occurring in the worksite, belonging from the kind of activities and peculiarities of the site. Below an example of the list:
- Injuries
- Fire , explosion
- Earthquake
- Storm, hurricane, tornado
- Flood
- Spills of pollutants (oil, fuels, waste waters, etc.), - Contamination of water, white and black waste water. - Terroristic threat
Those risks will be specified and described in special card, in the following part of the emergency plan.
Goal of the emergency plan is to evaluate for each risk how to:
Location of the First aid room and first aid kit
Location of the main emergency means of communication.
Location of the meeting point
Location and number of fire extinguishers
Location of firefighting equipment
Main building/area of the site
Exit ways
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 10 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
- Operate promptly, in order to limit the effect on the workers;
- Plan the measures aimed to protect the personnel
- Coordinate the emergency services and the emergency team;
- Evacuate in time towards a safe place;
- Inform and train all the personnel.
7.5. LOCAL PUBBLIC EMERGENCY FACILITIES
List here all the emergency facilities available in the nearby of the worksite: hospital, fire station, police station.
For each of them it must be specified the contact number, address, distance from the worksite and time needed to reach the site. The time to reach the site must be calculated with dedicated drill.
It is also necessary a good coordination with the local facilities. Before the start of construction the public facilities must be informed of the activity to be performed. Those agreements must be reported in the
emergency plan. If the local facilities can’t guarantee a prompt service, or if they are not reachable in quick time, an agreement
with private services will be necessary. In order to facilitate the arrival of the emergency vehicle it is important to install signalization on the main
route and within the site. In case of vast worksite, with different micro area, it would be good to identify also the different part of the site (signal with number identification code of the WTGs)
The efficacy of the emergency procedure depends also on the communication within the site. First of all no dead zone must be present in the area (in case of no availability of the signals other communication equipment must
be installed). Then it’s important to clarify role and responsibility and define the person in charge to call the emergency number.
7.6. EMERGENCY TEAM
List here the name and the role of the person in charge for emergency (fire fighter, first aid, and rescue). It’s
important to underline for each person the duty and the activity assigned. Emergency team must be skilled for the role (in compliance with the requirements of the local law) and trained
for the job. The list below must be posted in the different area of the worksite.
Name Role and Company Duty Telephone
Provide the member of the emergency team with all the necessary equipment (helmet, visibility jacket, first aid
kit, flash light) and daily inform them about number of workers present on site and location of the daily activity.
7.7. WORKERS AND PEOPLE ON SITE
Record of the persons present on site (workers, supervisors, visitors and any other external person) must be communicated daily to the emergency team. It’s also fundamental their location within the site, and the area in
Subject: Guideline for the Worksite Emergency Plan
Pagina 11 di 11
Policy No. 57 dated 09/01/2015 Organizational Area: Group
which the activity is concentrated during the day. When the ambulance is on site, it must be located where the dangerous activity of the day is ongoing.
7.8. INFORMATION AND TRAINING
The emergency procedure shall be shared with all the personnel on site and the emergency plan shall include
the way, the means and the planning of the communication. Generally the emergency plan should be part of the preliminary induction of the workers, periodically refreshed (or whenever it is updated). Give all visitors a
brochure (see Annex 1) describing the rules to follow on site.
7.9. EMERGENCY DRILLS
The emergency procedure must be tested during planned emergency drills. The type and the number of drills depend on:
- Duration of the worksite (a preliminary drills is required at the beginning of the activity) - Technology (some drills are applicable in all the construction site, some are specific for the technology,
for example the emergency drill form the nacelle in a wind farm) - Distance from the local public facilities (the path between the public local service and the worksite
must be included in the emergency drill, especially when the distance is significant) Documentation of the drills must be part of the emergency plan.
7.10. EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
List here all the emergency equipment (including the number) present on the worksite and their location, using
the layout to better identify their position. It’s a good practice to specify the maintenance of that equipment, reporting the date of expiring.
- Fire extinguishers
- hydrants
- showers (in case of chemical risk)
- masks
- first aid kit
Depending on the characteristic of the site it may be important to consider the installation of warning devices.
7.11. EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURE
Describe the behaviours and the procedure to follow in case of emergency event. Include also the coordination between the emergency team of different contractors.
The circumstances may change during the construction and the emergency plan must be periodically updated. It’s also important define the good practices to follow in case of emergency event:
- Stay calm - Assess the situation - Do not waste time collecting your belongings - Follow the emergency procedure
- Do not leave the meeting point until the cease alarm
8. ANNEX
Annex 1 – Brochure HSE Mandatory Rules
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275_Vers.1
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Permit to Work (PtW)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 1/8
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
CONTENTS
1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA ........................................................................................ 2
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 2
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT ............................................................................................... 2
4. REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................... 2
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONOMY ......................................... 3
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS .............................................................................................................. 3
7. PROCESS DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 5
7.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLE ...................................................................................................................... 5
7.2 ORGANIZATION, COMPETENCES AND TRAINING ....................................................................... 5
7.3 INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTATION ......................................................................................... 6
7.4 COMMUNICATION ............................................................................................................................ 6
7.5 PERMIT TO WORK ACTIVITES ........................................................................................................ 6
7.6 IMPLEMENTATION OF A PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM ................................................................. 7
8. ANNEXES................................................................................................................................................... 8
THE HEAD OF GLOBAL RENEWABLE ENERGIES
Francesco Venturini
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275_Vers.1
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Permit to Work (PtW)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 2/8
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA
This document aims to define mandatory basic rules for performing permits to work of the activities involving
hazardous energies, confined spaces and hot works.
The Knowledge and application is mandatory to all employees and contractors working in Global Renewable
Energies Power plants and/or construction sites.
This policy shall be implemented and applied to the extent possible within Global Renewable Energies
business line and in compliance with any applicable laws, regulations and governance rules, including any
stock exchange and unbundling-relevant provisions, which in any case prevail over the provisions contained
in this document.
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT
Version Data Main changes description
1 06/09/2016 Issuing of GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275 policy.
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT
Responsible for drawing up the document:
Health, Safety, Environment and Quality;
Responsible for authorizing the document:
Human Resources and Organization;
4. REFERENCES
Group Code of Ethics;
Zero Tolerance of Corruption Plan (ZTC);
Legislative Decree no.231/2001 and 231 Guidelines for non-Italian Subsidiaries;
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.147 Control of hazardous energy; Lock Out Tag Out;
OSHA 29CFR 1910.269 Electric power generation, transmission and distribution;
Safety, Environment and Quality Management System Manual - GRE S.p.A.;
Policy No. 11 dated 5/3/2009 “Policy on health and safety in the workplace”;
Policy No. 24 dated 22/12/2011 “Substation and Transmission Lines Maintenance”;
Policy No. 45 dated 09/08/2013 “Guidelines for high specialized maintenance technical activities”;
Policy No. 63 dated 05/06/2015 “Operation”;
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275_Vers.1
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Permit to Work (PtW)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 3/8
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
Policy No. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274 dated 06/09/2016 “Lockout/Tagout (LOTO”
Organizational Procedure No. 50 dated 23/7/2012 “Renewable plants start-up”;
Organizational Procedure No. 55 dated 4/8/2011 “Solar Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 56 dated 4/8/2011 “Wind Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 57 dated 4/8/2011 “Hydro Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 58 dated 4/8/2011 “Geothermal Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 64 dated 28/10/2011 “Hydro operation process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 65 dated 28/10/2011 “Wind Operation Process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 66 dated 28/10/2011 “Solar photovoltaic operation process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 68 dated 14/11/2011 “Geothermal Power Plants Operation”;
Organizational Procedure No. 76 dated 2/4/2012 “Biomass Operation Process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 77 dated 2/4/2012 “Biomass Power Plants Maintenance”.
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONOMY
Level 1 Process: Health and Safety
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
Acronym and Key words Description
Confined Spaces
A confined space is an enclosed or partially enclosed space that:
is not primarily designed or intended for human occupancy
has a restricted entrance or exit by way of location, size or means
Can represent a risk for the health and safety of anyone who
enters, due to one or more of the following factors:
o its design, construction, location or atmosphere
o the materials or substances in it
o work activities being carried out in it, or the
o Mechanical, process and safety hazards present.
GRE Global Renewable Energies Business Line
Hazardous Energy
Any energy (Electrical, Mechanical, Hydraulic, Pneumatic, chemical,
etc) that could provoke injuries to the personnel working on an
Operational Plant or Work Site
Electrical Potential Energy:
It is the energy newly derived from electric potential energy or kinetic
energy. Electrical energy can occur in a number of forms, such as:
Electrical power
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275_Vers.1
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Permit to Work (PtW)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 4/8
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
Static electricity
Electrical storage devices
Batteries
Capacitors – store electrical energy: they must be discharged
before work begins.
A common electric shock can cause bruises, bone fractures and even
death resulting from collisions or falls (i.e. fall from a ladder after
receiving a small shock).
Hydraulic Potential Energy:
It is the energy stored within a pressurized liquid. When under
pressure, the fluid can be used to move heavy objects, machinery, or
equipment. When hydraulic energy is released in an uncontrolled
manner, individuals may be crushed or struck by moving machinery,
equipment or other items.
Pneumatic potential energy:
It is the energy stored within pressurized air. Like hydraulic energy,
when under pressure, air can be used to move heavy objects and
power equipment. When pneumatic energy is released in an
uncontrolled manner, individuals may be crushed or struck by moving
machinery, equipment or other items
Chemical potential energy:
It is the energy released when a substance undergoes a chemical
reaction. The energy is normally released as heat, but could be
released in other forms, such as pressure. A common result of a
hazardous chemical reaction is fire or explosion.
Mechanical potential energy:
It is the energy contained in an item under tension. For instance, a
spring that is compressed or coiled will have stored energy which will
be released in the form of movement when the spring expands. The
release of mechanical energy may result in an individual being
crushed or being caught by dangerous moving parts.
Hot Work
Hot work is any work that can be a source of ignition. Hot works
usually involves burning, welding, using fire- or spark-producing tools.
A common result of hot work reaction is being burned by fires or
explosions during hot work.
O&M Operation and Maintenance unit
Permit to Work (PtW)
Is the document that specifies the work to be done, related risk and
preventive measures to be taken during the work; defines the safety
instructions. It is clear evidence that previous analysis of harms, risks,
and the preventive measures has been taken in order to eliminate
interferences, and unawareness during the job that could make an
accident happens.
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275_Vers.1
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Permit to Work (PtW)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 5/8
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
7. PROCESS DESCRIPTION
7.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLE
PtW is a formal written system used to control types of work which are identified as potential hazardous. It is
also means a proper communication between site/facility management, plant supervisors, site managers
and/or operators and those who carry out the jobs.
Essential characteristics of PtW system are:
Clear identification of who can authorize the job and who is responsible for specifying the
necessary precautions.
Training and instructions in the approval and use of permits to work
Monitoring and auditing to ensure that the permit to work system works as projected
The types of work for which PtW systems are normally applied include maintenance and repair, inspection
testing, construction, dismantling, modification and cleaning.
One of the main goals of Enel green power is developing, through information, training and coaching
activities, the capacity of staff to adopt safe behavior, improve awareness and sense of responsibility of their
own role and their potential, for the prevention of risks inherent to health and safety.
For this goal, PtW system has to:
Ensure the proper authorization of designated work.
Make clear to the people that are carrying out PtW the identification of hazards involved, nature and
extend of the job. Specify preventive measures to be taken during the permit to work.
Ensure that the person in charge of the worksite or power plant is aware of all the work being done
there.
Provide a system of continuous control.
7.2 ORGANIZATION, COMPETENCES AND TRAINING
Region/Country HSEQ and O&M defines with Human Resources unit:
Optimal Organizational structure in order to guarantee a correct Permit To Work System
Skills and basic training for the different participant roles on the PtW system.
Training programs and competences standards to be established and maintained considering
legislation, company policy, local rules and procedures, responsibilities and cases of accidents or
near misses involving failure of PtW. Training shall reflect the different responsibilities of:
The person issuing the permit to work
The person in charge of the work
The workforce
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275_Vers.1
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Permit to Work (PtW)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 6/8
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
7.3 INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTATION
Permit to work System will include all the important information or documentation associated to the jobs in
order to eliminate or reduce risks. The following points should be noted
Facilities and equipment affected
Work Description
Number of Contractors and workers
Type of hazardous energy
Date and time of work
Start and end date/time of maneuvers and verifications
Delivery and Reception of the protected and Work Area
Replacement time in case of emergency
PtW Responsible and Work Responsible appointment.
Pre Risk Assessment
Preventive Measures and Collective and Individual Protection Equipment
Date and Sign of applicant
7.4 COMMUNICATION
Number of people who may be involved in the PTW System, distance between the different key people and the potentiality large number of interferences during the job, are most important areas of PTW System and they cannot be overstated. Special attention shall be paid to the possibility of communication problems on sites. Areas of specific emphasis are:
Signal on the worksites or power plants
More than one language is spoken
Ensure interference coordination
7.5 PERMIT TO WORK ACTIVITES
To perform a safe PtW is important to assure the different phases of a PTW System. This means planning, coordination and a strict execution of PtW to avoid risk caused due to misunderstandings, unclear instructions, unplanned or unapproved activities. With the purpose of assure a correct PtW process Region/Country HSEQ and O&M unit shall clearly define PtW phases within their organizations:
PtW Application: Specifying how the person requesting the work shall ask for the validation/approval
of the permit to work.
PtW Validation: Defining by who and how PtW is validated and PtW is ready to be sent for approval
PtW Approval: Establishing minimum requirements to approve a PtW and the outputs to be attached
to the PTW
PtW Execution: Description of the different steps during the PtW performance (coordination,
precautions, isolation, verification, Interferences, signatures, …)
PtW Closing: As well as for the PtW execution, PtW Closing activities shall be define in order to
eliminate risk during works.
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275_Vers.1
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Permit to Work (PtW)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 7/8
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
Minimum structure of Country Operational instruction is defined on the Annex 2 Baseline Country Operational Instruction
7.6 IMPLEMENTATION OF A PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM
Region/Country HSEQ and O&M unit have to analyze GRE Permit to Work system established on this policy,
and strictly following it they must elaborate the Country Permit to Work Operating Instruction according to the
local circumstances (organization, Types of activities on going, type of Contractors and its contracts …)
Besides the points written on this policy this Country Operating Instruction must include the following
elements and activities:
Table establishing both local roles and responsibilities defined on this policy (annex 2) and those implemented at Country Level should be an annex of the Country Operating Instruction. Roles defined in this Country Operating Instruction has to be appointed at least in two different people/unit. This correlation table must be reviewed and approved by Central units of HSEQ and O&M.
Definition of a PtW Training process (Roles, Responsibilities and execution of a PtW), establishing an initial training and also refresh training.
Definition of the experience, skills and basic training for the Energy Control Coordinator and PtW Responsible roles.
Definition of an interference process among GRE and Contractors in order to assure the communication of the PtW Operating Instruction communication.
Audit Process Definition (Plan, Execution, improvement and follow up) ensuring effective PtW process.
The audit reports and actions follow-up have to be available for the HSEQ and O&M units.
If necessary, specific Country PtW forms. Always in completely compliance with the general requirements of this organizational procedure.
For specific urgent cases where people or facilities are in a risky situation, every Country should develop an urgent procedure.
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275_Vers.1
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Permit to Work (PtW)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 8/8
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
8. ANNEXES
Annex 1: Electrical Risk
Annex 2: Baseline Country PtW Instruction
Annex 3: PtW Flowchart
Annex 4: PtW Form
All the above listed annexes are available at the following link.
Electrical risk
Disconnect and isolate the power
Rule 1
Lock out the circuits to prevent unexpected current fl ows and place warning signs
Rule 2
Test, verify and demonstrate the absence of voltage
Rule 3
Apply Grounds and short-circuit
Rule 4
Rule 5 Seclude and control the work area and protect from nearby power sources
ANNEX 2
BASELINE COUNTRY PTW INSTRUCTION
Contents
1. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS 2
2. PERMIT TO WORK PROCESS DEFINITION 4
2.1 PERMIT TO WORK APPLICATION 4
2.2 PERMIT TO WORK VALIDATION 4
2.3 PERMIT TO WORK ANALYSIS AND APPROVAL 4
2.4 PERMIT TO WORK EXECUTION 5
2.5 PERMIT TO WORK CLOSING 5
2.6 SPECIAL SITUATIONS 5
3. PERMIT TO WORK PROCESS IMPLEMENTATION 6
PERMIT TO WORK PROCESS DEFINITION
Any work in proximity or with hazardous Energies (electric, mechanical, hydraulic, etc.), confined spaces or Hot Work has to be authorized with a PtW.
Thus, whenever a work has been planned in proximity or with hazardous energies, an approved PtW is needed to carry out the works.
Permit to work request must have the following work information:
· Facilities and equipment affected
· Work Description
· Number of Contractors and workers
· Type of hazardous energy
· Date and time of work
· Start and end date/time of maneuvers and verifications
· Delivery and Reception of the protected and Work Area
· Replacement time in case of emergency
· PtW Responsible and Work Responsible appointment.
· Pre Risk Assessment
· Preventive Measures and Collective and Individual Protection Equipment
· Date and Sign of applicant
PtW application should be requested with sufficient time in advance before of the execution works day.
Once PtW application has been received by Site Responsible, he has to verify:
· Feasibility and need of the Works
· Interferences with others Works/activities
After this verification, Site Responsible has to decide if the works are possible or not. In case rejection the PtW application has to be returned to the PtW Applicant; in case of a valid PtW, it has to be sent to the Energy Control Coordinator in order to continue PtW process application. In both cases, Site Responsible decision has to be written on the PtW Form.
PERMIT TO WORK ANALYSIS AND APPROVAL
Once Energy Control Coordinator has received PtW Validated by Site Responsible, he has to analyze carefully:
· Description of Works
· Hazardous Energies during the Works
· Work Area – Equipment Involved (MV Switchgear, valves, …)
· Equipment and/or machinery to carry out the works
After analysis Energy Control Coordinator have to assess risk of work and consequently establish following minimum points on the PtW Form:
· Energy Sources (accumulated or stored)
· Isolating points
· Protected Area
· Work Area
· Safety Maneuvers and verifications in order to isolate all energy sources, and when needed release stored energy
· Lock Out Method.
This analysis and preventive measures definition have to be placed on the PtW Form jointly with the draws and/or schemes specifying, when necessary, the isolating points, protected and work area.
Permit to work Form has to be aligned with LOTO Instruction for the activities requested. For the specific equipment/machine, at the first service or maintenance measures definition and LOTO Instruction are elaborated from scratch and, after works completion, they will be filed, as they can be at everyone disposal in case of any other similar activity. In case there are preceding measures definition and LOTO Instruction for that equipment/machine, they can be used for the current activity, taking care to reviewing them and pointing out any possible improvement. The definition of all the preventive measures on the PtW Form (isolating activities, verifications, protected and work area …) jointly with his signature (sign and date) of the Energy Control Coordinator will be the final approval of the works; and it shall to be sent to PtW responsible and Site Responsible.
PtW Responsible, after reception of PtW Approval, will carry out or lead the preventive measures defined on PtW Form by Energy Control Coordinator.
The sequence and activities on the PtW Form must be strictly respected and always taking into account the five golden rules.
If any issue or deviation from initial working plan may occur, work have to be stopped and then reviewed together with Energy Control Coordinator in order to define which steps have to be followed.
PtW Responsible must verify, in person, step by step, the sequence of measures defined on the PtW. This verification has to be placed on the PtW Form.
Once all the activities defined on the PtW Form have been done, protected and work areas have to be signalized and consigned to the work responsible. Work Responsible, in person, shall verify the work area, certifying that every measure has been taken and consequently works are safe.
This consignation has to be formalized on the PtW Form.
When the Works defined on the PtW Form have finished, it is necessary to carry out the inverse sequence of activities:
· Work Responsible will hand over the work area assigned to the PtW Responsible, signing and placing the finalization date and time on the PtW Form.
· PtW Responsible will receipt the work area and will verify that work area is transferred in the conditions that it was consigned (Clean, Housekeeping, Isolating points, signalization, …) leaving writing the reception and conformity.
· After reception of all work areas, PtW Responsible will strictly carry out or lead, in person and step by step, the inverse sequence of activities indicated on the PtW Form. Verifying the accomplishment of it and leaving evidence on the PtW Form.
· PtW Responsible after the putting on operation the installation or equipment, will sign the PtW (Date and end time) communicating to the Power Plant Responsible the Release of the installation or equipment.
7.6.1 CONTRACTORS INTERFERENCIES
When in PtW Form exists more than one work group, GRE and/or Contractors, however the maneuvers and verifications are the same, it will be needed a release of different PtW, specifying the connection on the different PtW. This situation is specially required on Power Plant Commissioning phase.
In addition, before the start of the Works, it is required an interference meeting between all contractors and GRE putting the attention focus on the common areas, interferences between different activities and contractors and, if needed, definition of a detailed timing plan for all activities.
7.6.2 SHIFT CHANGE
When works are longer than one shift, new workers shall place the handover on the PtW Form (Sign, date and time) confirming conditions are safe.
7.6.3 TESTS
If a partial release or re-energization of the facility or equipment with the aim to test or replacements, it is allowed to modify the protected area and work areas when the following conditions are satisfied:
· PtW reviewed, analyzed, defining new measures (protected and work area), modified and approved to the new situation according with the PtW process defined on this document.
· Realization of an Interference Meeting between all contractors and subcontractors and GRE informing about the changes and new measure to put in place.
PERMIT TO WORK PROCESS IMPLEMENTATION
After the release of this organizational procedure, HSEQ and O&M Managers of each country have to analyze GRE Permit to Work process established on this organizational procedure, and strictly following it they must elaborate the Country Permit to Work Procedure according to the local circumstances (organization, Types of activities on going, type of Contractors and its contracts …) This Country Operational Instruction must include the following elements and activities:
· Correlation table between roles and responsibilities defined on this organizational procedure and those implemented at Country Level should be an annex of the Country Operational Instruction. Roles defined in this organizational procedure have to be assumed ate least by two different people/units. This correlation table must be reviewed and approved by Central units of HSEQ and O&M.
· Definition of a PtW Training process (Roles, Responsibilities and execution of a PtW), establishing an initial training and also refresh training.
· Definition of the experience, skills and basic training for the Energy Control Coordinator and PtW Responsible roles.
· Definition of an interference process among GRE and Contractors in order to assure the communication of the PtW Operational Instruction communication.
· Audit Process Definition (Plan, Execution, improvement and follow up) ensuring effective PtW process.
· The audit reports and actions follow-up have to be available for the HSEQ and O&M units.
· If necessary, specific Country PtW forms. Always in completely compliance with the general requirements of this organizational procedure.
· For specific urgent cases where people or facilities are in a risky situation, every Country should develop an urgent procedure.
5/6
| PERMIT TO WORK APPLICANT | POWER PLANT OR SITE RESPONSIBLE | ENERGY CONTROL COORDINATOR | PERMIT TO WORK RESPONSIBLE | WORK RESPONSIBLE |
1
Permit to work application
Permit to work validation
no
Yes
Permit to work analysis
Maneuvers/Verifications definition
Permit to work approval
Work analysis and pre-risk assessment
Maneuvers/Verifications implementation (“Up –down”)
Rescheduling
Work responsible appointment
Work responsible appointment
Protected area delivering
Maneuvers/Verifications check
Protected area return
Works implementation
Implementation of measures against interferences risk
Maneuvers/Verifications implementation (“Down-up”)
Plant returns in operation
Plant returns in operation
Foglio1
| PERMIT TO WORK | ||||||
| Progressive number | ||||||
| Correlated Permits | ||||||
| Correlated LOTO Instructions | ||||||
| A | REQUEST - EDITED BY PERMIT TO WORK APPLICANT | |||||
| Delivering of protected area: | Expected starting date and time: | Expected ending date and time: | Return of protected area: | |||
| Number of Contractors involved: | Number of workers: | Evacuation time in case of emergency: | ||||
| INSTALLATION OR EQUIPMENT OBJECT OF THE WORK: | ||||||
| WORK ACTIVITY DESCRIPTION: | ||||||
| HAZARDOUS ENERGIES INVOLVED: | ||||||
| q Electric energy | q Hydraulic energy | q Thermal energy | q Other | |||
| VEHICLES AND EQUIPMENT USED: | ||||||
| See attached PRE-RISK ASSESSMENT, with the undertaken measures and personal and collective protection equipments | ||||||
| PERMIT TO WORK APPLICANT | ||||||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| WORK RESPONSIBLE | ||||||
| Appointment of Work Responsible | ||||||
| Corresponds to Permit to Work Applicant? | Yes | [ ] | No | [ ] | ||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| B | VALIDATION - EDITED BY PLANT MANAGER | |||||
| LOCATION OF INSTALLATION OR EQUIPMENT: | ||||||
| SAFETY MEASURES ARE REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING INSTALLATIONS AND/OR EQUIPMENT: | ||||||
| Request Approved? | Yes | [ ] | No | [ ] | ||
| PLANT MANAGER | ||||||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| C | ANALYSIS DEFINITION AND IMPLEMENTATION - EDITED BY ENERGY CONTROL COORDINATOR AND PERMIT TO WORK RESPONSIBLE | |||||
| MANOEUVRES/VERIFICATION | ||||||
| Nr. | Description | Type of isolation | Lock Nr. | Tag Nr. | Up-down Execution (PtW Responsible) | Down-up Execution (PtW Responsible) |
| 1 | ||||||
| 2 | ||||||
| 3 | ||||||
| 4 | ||||||
| 5 | ||||||
| 6 | ||||||
| 7 | ||||||
| 8 | ||||||
| 9 | ||||||
| 10 | ||||||
| 11 | ||||||
| 12 | ||||||
| 13 | ||||||
| 14 | ||||||
| 15 | ||||||
| 16 | ||||||
| 11 | ||||||
| 12 | ||||||
| 13 | ||||||
| 14 | ||||||
| 15 | ||||||
| 16 | ||||||
| 17 | ||||||
| … | ||||||
| LOCK OUT METHOD: | ||||||
| q Individual Control | q Single Lock | q Multiple Locks | q LOTO Box | |||
| See attached SCHEMEs and DRAWs, in order to identify isolation point | ||||||
| ENERGY CONTROL COORDINATOR | ||||||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| PERMIT TO WORK RESPONSIBLE | ||||||
| Appointment of Permit to Work Responsible | ||||||
| Corresponds to Energy Control Coordinator? | Yes | [ ] | No | [ ] | ||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| D | WORK EXECUTION - EDITED BY PERMIT TO WORK RESPONSIBLE AND WORK RESPONSIBLE | |||||
| See attached SCHEME and DRAW, in order to identify working areas assigned | ||||||
| FURTHER MEASURES TO MITIGATE INTERFERENCES RISK: | ||||||
| PERMIT TO WORK RESPONSIBLE | ||||||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| WORK RESPONSIBLE | ||||||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| E | WORK COMPLETION - EDITED BY WORK RESPONSIBLE, PERMIT TO WORK RESPONSIBLE AND PLANT MANAGER | |||||
| WORK RESPONSIBLE | ||||||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| PERMIT TO WORK RESPONSIBLE | ||||||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| For the Permit to Work Responsible: | ||||||
| Go to the "B" section, in order to perform the down-up execution of manoeuvres/verifications | ||||||
| The work is completed, the further safety measures were removed, the workers were sent away and the installation is available for normal operation | ||||||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
| PLANT MANAGER | ||||||
| Name: | Company: | Date and Time: | Signature: | |||
Foglio2
Foglio3
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 1/8
Application Areas Perimeter: - Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
CONTENTS
1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA ........................................................................................ 2
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 2
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT ............................................................................................... 2
4. REFERENCES .......................................................................................................................................... 2
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONMY ........................................... 3
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS ............................................................................................................. 3
7. PROCESS DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 5
7.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLE ...................................................................................................................... 5
7.2 ORGANIZATION, COMPETENCES AND TRAINING....................................................................... 5
7.3 DOCUMENTATION ........................................................................................................................... 6
7.4 LOTO DEVICES ................................................................................................................................ 6
7.5 IMPLEMENTATION OF A LOTO SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 7
8. ANNEX 1.................................................................................................................................................... 8
THE HEAD OF GLOBAL RENEWABLE ENERGIES
Francesco Venturini
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 2/8
Application Areas Perimeter: - Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
1. DOCUMENT AIMS AND APPLICATION AREA
This document aims to define mandatory basic rules for implementation of LOTO System to protect employees
from hazardous energies when can exist activation or unexpected restart of machines or equipment.
The Knowledge and application is mandatory to all employees and contractors working in Global Renewable
Energies Power plants and/or construction sites.
This policy shall be implemented and applied to the extent possible within Global Renewable Energies
business line and incompliance with any applicable laws, regulations and governance rules, including any
stock exchange and unbundling-relevant provisions, which in any case prevail over the provisions contained
in this document.
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT
Version Data Main changes description
1 [06/09/2016] Issuing of GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274 policy.
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT
Responsible for drawing up the document:
Health, Safety, Environment and Quality;
Responsible for authorizing the document:
Human Resources and Organization;
4. REFERENCES
Group Code of Ethics;
Zero Tolerance of Corruption Plan (ZTC);
Legislative Decree no.231/2001 and 231 Guidelines for non-Italian Subsidiaries;
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.147 Control of hazardous energy; Lock Out Tag Out;
OSHA 29CFR 1910.269 Electric power generation, transmission and distribution;
Safety, Environment and Quality Management System Manual;
Policy No. 11 dated 5/3/2009 “Policy on health and safety in the workplace”;
Policy No. 24 dated 22/12/2011 “Substation and Transmission Lines Maintenance”;
Policy No. 45 dated 09/08/2013 “Guidelines for high specialized maintenance technical activities”;
Policy No. 63 dated 05/06/2015 “Operation”;
Policy No. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_275 dated 06/09/2016 “Permit to work (PtW)”
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 3/8
Application Areas Perimeter: - Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
Organizational Procedure No. 50 dated 23/7/2012 “Renewable plants start-up”;
Organizational Procedure No. 55 dated 4/8/2011 “Solar Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 56 dated 4/8/2011 “Wind Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 57 dated 4/8/2011 “Hydro Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 58 dated 4/8/2011 “Geothermal Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 64 dated 28/10/2011 “Hydro operation process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 65 dated 28/10/2011 “Wind Operation Process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 66 dated 28/10/2011 “Solar photovoltaic operation process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 68 dated 14/11/2011 “Geothermal Power Plants Operation”;
Organizational Procedure No. 76 dated 2/4/2012 “Biomass Operation Process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 77 dated 2/4/2012 “Biomass Power Plants Maintenance”.
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONMY
Level 1 Process: Health and Safety
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
Acronym and Key words Description
Affected Employees
An employee whose job requires operation of equipment on which
servicing or maintenance is being performed under LOTO, or whose job
responsibilities require the employee to work in area in which such
service or maintenance is being performed.
GRE Global Renewable Energies Business Line
Hazardous Energy
Any energy (electric, Mechanical, Hydraulic, Pneumatic, chemical,
thermic, kinetic …) that could provoke injuries to the personnel working
on an Operational Plant or Work Site.
Electrical Potential Energy:
It is the energy newly derived from electric potential energy or kinetic
energy. Electrical energy can occur in a number of forms, such as:
Electrical power
Static electricity
Electrical storage devices
Batteries
Capacitors – store electrical energy: they must be discharged
before work begins.
A common electric shock can cause bruises, bone fractures and even
death resulting from collisions or falls (i.e. fall from a ladder after
receiving a small shock).
Hydraulic Potential Energy:
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 4/8
Application Areas Perimeter: - Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
It is the energy stored within a pressurized liquid. When under pressure,
the fluid can be used to move heavy objects, machinery, or equipment.
When hydraulic energy is released in an uncontrolled manner,
individuals may be crushed or struck by moving machinery, equipment
or other items.
Pneumatic potential energy:
It is the energy stored within pressurized air. Like hydraulic energy,
when under pressure, air can be used to move heavy objects and power
equipment. When pneumatic energy is released in an uncontrolled
manner, individuals may be crushed or struck by moving machinery,
equipment or other items
Chemical potential energy:
It is the energy released when a substance undergoes a chemical
reaction. The energy is normally released as heat, but could be
released in other forms, such as pressure. A common result of a
hazardous chemical reaction is fire or explosion.
Mechanical potential energy:
It is the energy contained in an item under tension. For instance, a
spring that is compressed or coiled will have stored energy which will
be released in the form of movement when the spring expands. The
release of mechanical energy may result in an individual being crushed
or being caught by dangerous moving parts.
Lockout Device
A device using a positive means such as a keyed lock to hold an Energy
Isolating Device in a safe position. This Device shall hold an energy-
isolating device in the "Off" or "Safe Position" and prevent the
unexpected startup or energization of a piece of equipment during
serving or maintenance.
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
The placement of a lock and tag on the energy-isolating device in
accordance with an established procedure, to secure isolation points to
prevent unexpected start-up or release of hazardous energy. The tag
and lock indicate that the energy-isolating device shall not be operated
until removal of the lock and red tag, in accordance with an established
procedure.
Tag Out Device
A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of attachment,
which can be securely fastened to an Energy Isolating Device in
accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the
equipment being controlled, may not be operated until the Tagout
Device is removed.
In case of usage of a specific LOTO padlock with adequate
identification indicating that the equipment being controlled may not be
operated, only the lock can be used.
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 5/8
Application Areas Perimeter: - Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
Work Responsible
Is/are the qualified person/people properly authorized, always present
during the work execution, that lead the work being responsible of
safety rules and Operating procedures accomplishment. He receives
the work area from PtW Responsible and assigns it to his collaborators.
Work responsible and PtW Responsible could be the same person
when there is only one work order or one contractor.
7. PROCESS DESCRIPTION
7.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLE
LOTO System is a program aimed to protect workers from unintended release of energy or machine motion
that could cause any injury. It requires that hazardous energy sources be "isolated and rendered inoperative"
before work is started.
The types of work for which LOTO systems are normally applied include set up, adjustment, repair, service,
installation, or maintenance work on equipment, machinery.
One of the main goals of Global Renewable Energies is developing, through information, training and coaching
activities, the capacity of staff to adopt safe behavior, improve awareness and sense of responsibility of their
own role and their potential, for the prevention of risks inherent to health and safety.
For this goal, LOTO system has to guarantee:
Personnel Qualification methods.
Qualified and Authorized people to carry out LOTO activities.
Written LOTO instructions.
Definition and use of Lock Out and Tag Out devices.
Audit process and updating LOTO instructions.
Contractors coordination.
7.2 ORGANIZATION, COMPETENCES AND TRAINING
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 6/8
Application Areas Perimeter: - Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
In order to guarantee a good implementation of a LOTO system, Region/Country HSEQ, O&M and E&C
defines with collaboration of Human Resources unit:
Skills and basic training for the different participant roles on the LOTO system.
Training programs and competences standards to be established and maintained considering
legislation, company policy, local rules and procedures, responsibilities and cases of accidents or near
misses involving failure of LOTO. Training shall reflect the different responsibilities of:
o Affected person o Work Responsible o Person in charge of review and elaboration of LOTO Instructions
7.3 DOCUMENTATION
LOTO Program is based on the elaboration of documents, operating instructions, aimed to assure the
application of methods, avoid errors and minimize the risk of accidents of injuries.
Operating instructions shall follow these principles:
Have to be documented, identifying relevant equipment;
Identification of the energy sources;
Elaborate an individual operating instruction for each equipment. There are exceptions in which
multiple machines can be grouped in a single operating instructions;
Define specific steps to shut down, isolate, block and secure equipment to control hazardous energy;
Shall also include specific steps to place, remove and transfer lockout/tagout devices;
In case of changes on equipment, maintenance method, or integration of a new equipment, it is needed
check operating instructions to define if necessary update of the document.
Region/Country O&M and E&C unit has to designate and empower individuals who will be responsible for the
implementation of this program. Furthermore, they will ensure an environment where personnel are
encouraged to follow this guideline.
Minimum structure of Country Operational instruction is defined on the Annex 1 - Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
7.4 LOTO DEVICES
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 7/8
Application Areas Perimeter: - Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
The success of the LOTO system is the proper and persistent application of lockout/tagout tools, according to established procedures.
With this aim, it is very important to know and document what devices are acceptable for use in all and each of the locking points.
O&M and E&C units shall define locks, tags and method of management in order to assure:
Correct use of lockout and tag devices
Codification and traceability of devices
Management process
7.5 IMPLEMENTATION OF A LOTO SYSTEM
Region/Country HSEQ and O&M units have to analyze LOTO system guidelines established on this policy,
and strictly following it they must elaborate the Country LOTO Operating Instruction according to the local
circumstances (organization, Types of activities on going, type of Contractors and its contracts…) Besides the
points written on this policy Country Operational Instruction must include the following elements and activities:
Table establishing both local roles and responsibilities defined on this policy (annex 1) and those
implemented at Country Level should be an annex of the Country Operational Instruction. Roles
defined in this Country Operational Instruction has to appointed at least in two different
people/function. This correlation table must be reviewed and approved by Central units of HSEQ and
O&M;
Definition of a LOTO Training process (Roles, Responsibilities and execution of a LOTO),
establishing an initial training and also refresh training;
Definition of the experience, skills and basic training for all roles;
Definition of an interference process among GRE and Contractors in order to assure the
communication of the LOTO Operating Instruction communication;
Audit Process Definition (Plan, Execution, improvement and follow up) ensuring effective LOTO
process;
The audit reports and actions follow-up have to be available for the HSEQ and O&M central units.
Periodical Checks process on Machines and Equipment.
Definition of LOTO Locks management (Color, size, shape, type, or format).
Policy no. GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_274
Version no.1 dated 06/09/2016
Subject: Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 8/8
Application Areas Perimeter: - Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
8. ANNEX
Annex 1 – Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
Annex 1 - Baseline
Country LOTO Instruction.docx
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
1/14
CONTENTS
1. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS ............................................................................................................. 2
2. LOTO RESPONSIBILITIES ....................................................................................................................... 4
3. LOTO TRAINING ....................................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 AFFECTED EMPLOYEES AND WORK RESPONSIBLE TRAINING ............................................... 4
3.2 PERMIT TO WORK RESPONSIBLE TRAINING .............................................................................. 5
3.3 ENERGY CONTROL COORDINATOR TRAINING .......................................................................... 5
4. LOTO PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................................... 6
5. LOTO DEVICES AND MANAGEMENT ..................................................................................................... 7
5.1 LOTO LOCKS .................................................................................................................................... 7
5.2 TAGS ................................................................................................................................................. 8
6. LOCK OUT METHODS ............................................................................................................................. 8
6.1 INDIVIDUAL CONTROL .................................................................................................................... 8
6.2 SINGLE LOCKS ................................................................................................................................ 8
6.3 MULTIPLE LOCKS ............................................................................................................................ 8
6.4 LOTO BOX......................................................................................................................................... 8
7. OUTSIDE PERSONNEL ............................................................................................................................ 9
8. LOTO PROCESS DEFINITION ................................................................................................................. 9
8.1 LOTO BASIC RULES ........................................................................................................................ 9
8.2 LOTO ANALYSIS AND APPROVAL ................................................................................................. 9
8.3 LOTO EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 10
8.4 LOTO CLOSING .............................................................................................................................. 11
9. SPECIAL SITUATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 11
9.1 SHIFT CHANGE .............................................................................................................................. 11
9.2 REMOVING PERSONAL LOCK OF A MISSING PERSON ............................................................ 11
9.3 PROLONGED STOPPAGE ............................................................................................................. 12
10. REMOVING PERSONAL LOCK FORM .............................................................................................. 12
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
2/14
1. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
Acronym and Key words Description
Affected Employees
An employee whose job requires operation of equipment on which
servicing or maintenance is being performed under LOTO, or whose job
responsibilities require the employee to work in area in which such
service or maintenance is being performed.
Control LOTO Lock
A keyed lock or set of locks not assigned to an individual employee as
an Individual LOTO Lock. This lock has only one key and master keys
are not available. Multiple locks may be keyed alike provided there is
only one key for the entire set of locks. This lock may be used to lock
out energy-isolating sources when a group LOTO is used.
Energy Control Coordinator
Is/are the qualified person/people with skills, knowledge and
experience on construction, operation, maintenance and trouble
shouting of the facilities/equipment, that has received Safety training on
hazardous Energies, risks and preventive measures in order to
recognize and reduces/eliminates risk related to works.
Energy Isolating Device
A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or
release of energy.
Hazardous Energy
Any energy (electric, Mechanical, Hydraulic, Pneumatic, chemical,
thermic, kinetic …) that could provoke injuries to the personnel working
on an Operational Plant or Work Site.
Electrical Potential Energy:
It is the energy newly derived from electric potential energy or kinetic
energy. Electrical energy can occur in a number of forms, such as:
Electrical power
Static electricity
Electrical storage devices
Batteries
Capacitors – store electrical energy: they must be discharged
before work begins.
A common electric shock can cause bruises, bone fractures and even
death resulting from collisions or falls (i.e. fall from a ladder after
receiving a small shock).
Hydraulic Potential Energy:
It is the energy stored within a pressurized liquid. When under pressure,
the fluid can be used to move heavy objects, machinery, or equipment.
When hydraulic energy is released in an uncontrolled manner,
individuals may be crushed or struck by moving machinery, equipment
or other items.
Pneumatic potential energy:
It is the energy stored within pressurized air. Like hydraulic energy,
when under pressure, air can be used to move heavy objects and power
equipment. When pneumatic energy is released in an uncontrolled
manner, individuals may be crushed or struck by moving machinery,
equipment or other items
Chemical potential energy:
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
3/14
It is the energy released when a substance undergoes a chemical
reaction. The energy is normally released as heat, but could be
released in other forms, such as pressure. A common result of a
hazardous chemical reaction is fire or explosion.
Mechanical potential energy:
It is the energy contained in an item under tension. For instance, a
spring that is compressed or coiled will have stored energy which will
be released in the form of movement when the spring expands. The
release of mechanical energy may result in an individual being crushed
or being caught by dangerous moving parts.
Locked Out
Locked Out is the process of isolation of all sources of energy, releasing
stored energy, verifying the isolation and de-energization of equipment
and lock isolation devices according to a written instruction.
Lockout Device
A device using a positive means such as a keyed lock to hold an Energy
Isolating Device in a safe position. This Device shall hold an energy-
isolating device in the "Off" or "Safe Position" and prevent the
unexpected startup or energization of a piece of equipment during
serving or maintenance.
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
The placement of a lock and tag on the energy-isolating device in
accordance with an established procedure, to secure isolation points to
prevent unexpected start-up or release of hazardous energy. The tag
and lock indicate that the energy-isolating device shall not be operated
until removal of the lock and red tag, in accordance with an established
procedure.
Permit to work (Ptw)
Is the document that specifies the work to be done, related risk and
preventive measures to be taken during the work; defines the safety
instructions. It is clear evidence that previous analysis of harms, risks,
and the preventive measures has been taken in order to eliminate
interferences, and unawareness during the job that could make an
accident happens.
Permit to Work Responsible
It represents a person who locks out or tags out machinery or
equipment in order to safely perform service or maintenance on that
machine or equipment and who has met training requirements.
Personal LOTO Lock
A type of key lock used for no other purpose, having one key, and for
which master keys are not available. Such locks are individually
assigned to authorized employees, or can be obtained from a central
repository of LOTO locks, whereupon they become personal locks while
in use by an individual.
Tag Out
Tag Out is the process of placement of a Tagout Device on an Energy
Isolating Device, in accordance with a written procedure, to indicate that
the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the Tagout
Device is removed.
Tag Out Device
A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of attachment,
which can be securely fastened to an Energy Isolating Device in
accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the
equipment being controlled, may not be operated until the Tagout
Device is removed.
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
4/14
In case of usage of a specific LOTO padlock with adequate
identification indicating that the equipment being controlled may not be
operated, only the lock can be used.
Work Area
Is the area in which is allowed to work, with a previous assignation from
PtW Responsible. There is included in Work definition the access to
areas, which would not be safe unless the equipment was disconnected
and de-energized.
Work Responsible
Is/are the qualified person/people properly authorized, always present
during the work execution, that lead the work being responsible of
safety rules and Operating procedures accomplishment. He receives
the work area from PtW Responsible and assigns it to his collaborators.
Work responsible and PtW Responsible could be the same person
when there is only one work order or one contractor.
2. LOTO RESPONSIBILITIES
Affected employee
Will work under the direction and under the Locked Out established by the Person in Charge (PtW Responsible/Work Responsible).
Will apply his Personal lock(s) directly to the Energy Insolating device(s) or to the LOTO Box (depending on the LOTO Method chosen, see chapter 11) in order to establish a lock before accessing a work area according to his responsible and written instruction.
Permit to Work Responsible:
Is in charge of LOTO Process ensuring safety locks (Control and Personal Locks) are applied according to the written PtW and LOTO Instruction.
Will apply Control LOTO Locks to padlock all sources of energy according to the written instruction.
Will ensure that Work Responsible works safely and applies locks according to LOTO Instruction.
Work Responsible:
Will work under the direction of PtW Responsible and under the Locked Out established by LOTO Instruction and PtW Responsible.
Will ensure that affected employees use locks safely according to Control Program Energy
Energy Control Coordinator:
Will analyze Permit to Work (Machine, equipment, Energy Sources, Stored Energy, Lock Out and Tag Out Activities).
Will review and approve outside LOTO Procedures.
Will elaborate LOTO instructions.
Will approve Permit to Work jointly with LOTO Instructions.
Will be responsible for LOTO instructions management.
3. LOTO TRAINING
3.1 AFFECTED EMPLOYEES AND WORK RESPONSIBLE TRAINING
Affected employees will attend a training, LOTO Basic Training, with at least the following content:
General LOTO standards and practices:
o The purpose and function of energy control procedures;
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
5/14
o Not to tamper with or remove tags or locks from energy isolation devices, values, components
or equipment;
o No to attempt to restart or energize tagged out or locked out equipment;
o ….
Verification activities during Work area delivery.
Personal Lock use and Safety LOTO Box.
Complex Locks and Safety LOTO Box Management.
Safety Lesson Learnt related to Permit to Work and LOTO activities.
Training will be theoretical and practical, and is not allowed on-line Course.
In addition to the initial training, it is mandatory a training refresher course, as maximum, every two years. It
could be composed of the material of the initial training updated with the new lessons learnt related to permit
to work and LOTO occurred during the last two years.
3.2 PERMIT TO WORK RESPONSIBLE TRAINING
Permit to Work Responsible’s Training, LOTO Training Level 2, will include:
LOTO Basic Training.
Technical Schemes Knowledge (Electrical and Hydraulic as minimum).
Proper use of Energy Isolating Devices.
Medium voltage isolating tools and techniques.
Site specific safety precautions and handling (ex: Flushing systems for chemical and reactants, lime
and activated coal systems, ash systems).
Training will be theoretical and practical, and is not allowed on-line Course.
In addition to the initial training, it is mandatory a training refresher course, as maximum, every two years. It
could be composed of the material of the initial training updated with the new lessons learnt related to permit
to work and LOTO occurred during the last two years.
3.3 ENERGY CONTROL COORDINATOR TRAINING
Energy Control Coordinator’s Training, LOTO Training Level 3, will be composed of:
LOTO Training Level 2.
Technical Knowledge of machines, equipment and the main energy sources (electrical, mechanical,
Hydraulic, Thermal, etc.) in terms of Energy Control.
How to identify and disconnect energy sources.
Formal Interference activities and different relevant and complex scenarios where is required
PTW/LOTO coordination with third parties.
Training will be theoretical and practical, and is not allowed on-line Course.
In addition to the initial training, it is mandatory a training refresh, as maximum, each two years. It could be
composed of the material of the initial training updated with the new lessons learnt related to permit to work
and LOTO occurred during the last two years.
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
6/14
4. LOTO PROCEDURES
The following shall be implemented as part of the LOTO procedures for electrical powered equipment:
a) Review the proposed work with the supervisor, project engineer, PtW Responsible or leader in charge of the equipment or facility. Reach agreement of potential operating interference and whether an immediate shutdown is required to protect personnel or equipment.
b) Use normal stop procedures to shut down equipment. c) For complex isolation requirements, use an equipment isolation sheet as a guide (photos and
instructions) to identify energy isolation devices, valves, components or equipment to be manipulated or upon which work is to be performed and to determine the required status.
d) If a distinct form of marking or labeling is not already available, use tags to ensure personnel manipulate or perform work on the correct energy isolation devices, valves or equipment.
e) Stand to the side of the panel when opening disconnect switches or circuit breakers. f) Tagout/lockout the switch in the off or safe position. Personnel shall perform their own tagout/lockout,
even if another person has taken the equipment out of service. With approval from each member of the crew, the supervisor, Site Manager, PtW Responsible or leader may be responsible for applying the group tags and locks. This responsible individual must sign the tag, perform the group tagout/lockout, and be responsible for the integrity of the group tagout/lockout.
g) Test the disconnection or switch handle after lockout to make certain it cannot be moved to the "on" position.
h) Try the machine's "start" controls after tagout/lockout to make sure the main isolation device is open or in the safe position. This shall be done before other personnel who have tagged/locked begin work and while they are positioned safely. Return the controls to the off or safe position.
Where the potential for unintentional or inadvertent contact with exposed energized parts exists, the following shall be performed:
a) When possible, verify blade openings visually when working on electrical conductors for any potential disconnect failure.
b) Test for no voltage on phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground before beginning any work on conductors. Use a properly calibrated test meter.
c) Allow only qualified electrical or other specifically authorized personnel to open an enclosure to test or operate a disconnect device on the electrical system.
i) Do not permit the use of pushbuttons, toggle switches, pressure switches, limit switches, and similar control circuit devices for isolation purposes.
j) Never allow pulling a fuse to be the sole substitute for tagout/lockout. One switch may feed several motors individually fused, and switch tagout may shut down equipment unnecessarily. In this case, disconnect, tape, and tagout the wires from the load side of the fuse clips, as well as removing the fuses.
Besides of the above requirements, the following shall be implemented as part of the LOTO procedures for mechanically powered equipment such as equipment powered by internal combustion engines, air, gas, water, or steam:
k) To disconnect the energy supply to the equipment, operate mechanical isolation device such as a valve, or lever, to the safe position.
Note: In some cases for example, 2 or more valves could be required between the pressure zone and the work to be completed on a high pressure steam system.
l) Test and inspect for stored air, gas, steam, hydraulic fluid, etc., that remains under pressure in piping, accumulators, and cylinders. Operate enough combinations of controls to eliminate stored energy in the mechanical systems. Compare equipment component positions with those shown on equipment drawings to bring energy stored in springs or elevated devices latched into position to a safe energy state.
In case of vessels, valves and pipes the following shall be implemented as part of the LOTO procedures. These systems require preplanning to identify all potential hazards before starting work. The supervisor and other personnel shall be in complete agreement of the procedures to be followed.
m) The potential for a leaking valve or a closed valve to leak shall be assessed especially if entrance or release of fluids may constitute a hazard. Bleeding, purging, capping, blanking, blinding or
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
7/14
disconnecting all service, process, vent, or overflow lines are examples procedures that may be required.
n) Upstream and downstream pressure may exist adjacent to a hydraulic or pneumatic valve. For pneumatic valves, pressure must be relieved by bleed off. For hydraulics, stored energy must be controlled. Continue after these planning steps are complete.
o) Determine the scope of the isolation required. p) Check the isolation and verify. Test and inspect for stored air, gas, steam, hydraulic fluid, etc., that
remains under pressure in piping, accumulators, and cylinders. Operate enough combinations of controls to eliminate stored energy in the mechanical systems. Compare equipment component positions with those shown on equipment drawings to bring energy stored in springs or elevated devices latched into position to a zero energy state.
5. LOTO DEVICES AND MANAGEMENT
The locks, tags and devices shall be provided to GRE employees and they shall use only these locks, tags
and devices to lockout equipment. Contractors are allowed to use their own locking and tagging devices, but
in any case locks and tags shall adhere to the following requirements:
Standardized according to one of the following: Color, size, shape, type, or format.
Distinctive in appearance, easily recognizable and clearly visible.
Designed to convey all information required for the application.
Designed to deter accidental or unauthorized removal.m
Designed to withstand the environment to which they are exposed for the duration of their application.
Only one key shall be issued to each person for each of their locks.
5.1 LOTO LOCKS
LOTO locks shall be non-mastered, serialized, identified as LOTO locks, and assigned to a specific individual,
either as issued or from a LOTO station.
There are two different kinds of LOTO locks:
CONTROL LOTO LOCKS This kind of locks (or set of locks) are not assigned to an individual employee, and has only one key. Multiple locks may be keyed alike provided there is only one key for the entire set of locks. This lock is used to lock out energy-isolating sources. This lock is left for the entire duration of the work (that could last more than one shift).
Key of Control Locks shall be kept by Permit to Work Responsible or locked in a Safety LOTO Box. In case of Safety LOTO Box, this box shall be locked by one unique Control Lock.
It is not allow master Keys for different Serial Control Locks (Set of Locks).
Control Locks have to be tagged with “DANGER – DO NOT OPERATE” Labels. This Label shall be included permanent “CONTROL LOCK” identification.
PERSONAL LOTO LOCKS Such locks are individually assigned to authorized employees, or can be obtained from a central repository of LOTO locks, whereupon they become personal locks while in use by an individual.
Personal LOTO Locks are issued to each Permit to Work responsible and Work Responsible (affected employee, if needed) and their color shall depend on the trade of the person.
The Personal LOTO Locks could be applied directly on the energy-isolating sources, in case of “Single Lock” or “Multiple Locks” methods, or put directly in the box while using the “LOTO Box” method.
All Personal Locks shall have different keys and these keys have to kept and conserved by the “owner” of Lock. They have to be labeled with “DANGER – DO NOT OPERATE”. Label shall be able to include Name and Surname, Company Name, international number phone number (if it exists) and initials of the name of the affected employee.
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
8/14
5.2 TAGS
Tags shall be attached with a material having the general design and characteristics equivalent to a one-piece, all environment tolerant nylon cable tie, which is non-reusable, attachable by hand, self-locking, and require a minimum unlocking strength for release. “DO NOT OPERATE” Tags shall be used with Control LOTO Locks and shall be attached to the energy isolating (primary disconnecting) device for the machine or system (e.g., electrical disconnect).
6. LOCK OUT METHODS
All Locks shall be done according to the following methods:
6.1 INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
Individual Control is allowed for simple activities with no interaction with other employees or activities, and when the affected person can see and control the energy sources. If for any reason the affected person have to move away from the area where the individual control is applied, application of other Lock Method must be applied.
6.2 SINGLE LOCKS
When the Energy Control Coordinator decides that the equipment shall be de-energized operating on only one energy source point and there is no any possibility of stored energy, equipment could be locked applying a lock in the unique isolating-point.
6.3 MULTIPLE LOCKS
This method is used when individual Lock Control or Single Lock Methods are not applicable. Permit to Work Responsible shall carry out the Lock Out activities, according to specific Control Instructions, using Control Locks. PtW Responsible will keep Control Lock Keys always under control. Work Responsible will place his personal lock or Locks in each isolating-point accordingly with the Specific LOTO instruction. . If Permit to Work Responsible is also working on the equipment, he shall be place, besides Control Lock, his Personal Locks. A Complex LOTO Activity can become a Safety LOTO Box method at any moment if needed. Permit to Work Responsible is in charge of leading all personnel during this process change.
6.4 LOTO BOX
This method is used when Individual Control or Single Lock Methods are not applicable. Safety LOTO Box Method is a variant of Multiple Locks Method. Instead of require to each Work Responsible (or individual affected employee) a Lock Out in every isolating points, Work Responsible (or individual affected employee) only apply his personal lock to the Safety LOTO Box. Safety LOTO Box will keep keys of Control Locks which have been placed on the equipment isolating-points by the Permit to work responsible. Once isolating-points have been isolated, Permit to Work Responsible put Control Lock Keys inside of the Safety LOTO Box. Thus, Permit to Work Responsible shall lock Safety LOTO Box with one unique Control Lock and shall keep key of this Lock during the works. If Permit to Work Responsible is working also on the equipment, he will put also his Personal Lock on the Safety LOTO Box in addition to the Control Lock.
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
9/14
7. OUTSIDE PERSONNEL
Whenever outside personnel shall be engaged in activities covered by the scope and application of LOTO activities, it is the responsibility of the Energy Control Coordinator to review the hazards associated with the work to be performed and inform each other of their respective Lock Out and Tag Out instructions.
The Permit to Work Responsible shall ensure that outside personnel understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the outside contractor’s energy control procedures.
The following are requirements for contractors:
The Energy Control Coordinator will make the GRE Lockout / Tagout procedures available for the contractor employer’s execution.
Contractor employer must inform the GRE about Contractors LOTO Procedures.
Contractors must supply their own padlocks and tags that meet the criteria outlined in this policy and Local Instructions.
Contractor training must be completed prior to the contractor participating/conducting Lockout / Tagout.
8. LOTO PROCESS DEFINITION
8.1 LOTO BASIC RULES
All GRE Countries shall create, implement and maintain a local specific energy control program that complies with this policy and applicable local regulations. No machine, vehicle, crane, piece of equipment, or process shall be operated when any tag or lock is attached to an associated energy isolation device. GRE Countries shall be permitted to perform an assessment and determine on a case-by-case basis, energy isolation devices, components or equipment that are similar in location and appearance, and develop procedures to ensure personnel do not manipulate or perform work on incorrect energy isolation devices, components or equipment Tags and Locks shall be easy to identify by personnel. Failure of personnel to comply with the requirements of the local specific energy control program shall be considered a major and serious safety violation with consequences equal to the potential risk. Permit to Work has to be requested and approved before carrying out any LOTO Activity. LOTO activities are not allowed without Permit to Work approval (Permit to Work form fulfilled and approved) Any affected employee that works in an equipment or machine shall lock it with his Personal Lock. Anyone is allowed to take off the lock of other person except in the case defined on section 14.2. REMOVING PERSONAL LOCK OF A MISSING PERSON. All energy isolating devices used as Lock Out points must be able to (or must be made able) to accept a Lock Out device approved to physically prevent any operation of the energy isolating device. Where this is not feasible or practicable, it shall comply with the labeling requirements.
8.2 LOTO ANALYSIS AND APPROVAL
Energy Control Coordinator has to review, during analysis and approval phase, the following points:
Machines and/or equipments;
Energy Sources;
Possible Stored energy;
Lock Out to be done.
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
10/14
After reviewing them, Energy Control Coordinator shall elaborate a LOTO Instruction for the activities requested, aligned with the Permit to work Form, identifying:
Isolating Points;
Type of Lock Devices to be used: o Lock and tag out all Energy Isolating Devices by use of hasps, chains, valve covers, etc. with
an approved LOTO lock as described in the equipment specific procedure.
LOTO Activities sequence;
Lock Out Method;
Tag Out Devices;
Stored Energy Release;
Machines/Equipment Status (Shut, down, off, …): o Lockout Devices will be affixed in a manner that will hold the Energy Isolating Devices in the
“safe” or “off” position.
For the specific equipment/machine, at first service or maintenance this Instruction is elaborated from scratch and, after works completion, it will be filed, as it can be at everyone disposal in case of any other similar LOTO Activities. In case there is a preceding Instruction for that equipment/machine, it can be used for the current LOTO Activity, taking care to reviewing it and pointing out any possible improvement. After approval of the PtW, Energy Control Coordinator shall send PTW jointly with Specific LOTO Instructions for the works requested to the PtW Responsible. Energy Control Coordinator shall be the responsible of LOTO Instructions control and management; this responsibility and activity will be included on the Local Integrated Management System LOTO instructions elaborated and approved by outside personnel have to be reviewed by Energy Control Coordinator in order to ensure that external LOTO instruction is correct and safe, and then can be approved. In case of LOTO Instruction changes, they must be sent to the Energy Control Coordinator for his approval
8.3 LOTO EXECUTION
When a PtW has associated a LOTO Instruction, PtW Responsible shall carry out or manage to execute it. PtW responsible shall review, verify and understand the operation/safety activities PtW (Schemes, Draws …) delivered by Energy Control Coordinator with the aim to provide correct number and type of Control LOTO Locks and Tags for the work. Once PtW Responsible has Control LOTO Locks and Tags, Permit to Work Responsible shall apply Control LOTO Locks and Tags to Lock Out Energy Isolating points and set them on “Safe” or “Off” position. Following PtW sequence. Following the application of the Lockout or Tagout Device(s) to the Energy isolating Device(s), all potential or residual energy will be relieved, disconnected, restrained, and otherwise rendered safe. Where the re- accumulation of stored energy to a hazardous energy level is possible, verification of isolation will be continued until the maintenance or servicing is complete. Stored energy (capacitors, springs, elevated members, rotating fly wheels, and hydraulic/air/gas/steam systems, etc.) must be relieved or restrained by grounding, repositioning, blocking and/or bleeding the system. Prior to starting work on machines or equipment that have been Locked or Tagged Out, all Permit to Work responsibles and Work responsibles will verify that isolation or de-energization of the machine or equipment has been accomplished. After ensuring that no employee will be placed in danger, test all of the Lock Outs and Tag Outs by following the normal start up procedures (depress start button, etc.). After test, return all controls to the safe/neutral position. This step shall be repeated every time a shift starts if the work was not completed at the last shift. Once verification phase has been accomplished, in case of “Single Lock” or “Multiple Lock” methods each Permit to Work responsible and each Work Responsible (and/or each affected employee) shall apply his Personal LOTO Lock on the Energy Isolating Devices, in addition to the Control LOTO Locks, in accordance on what described in sections 10.1 and 10.2. Instead, in case of “LOTO Box” method (as described in chapter
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
11/14
9), Permit to Work responsible shall put Control LOTO Locks keys inside the LOTO Box and apply a Control LOTO Lock to the box keeping its key until the end of the works. Every Work Responsible will apply his Personal LOTO Lock to the box.
8.4 LOTO CLOSING
When the works have finished, each Work Responsible will inform the PtW Responsible, removing his own Personal LOTO Lock form the box, if “LOTO Box” method is used, or from each Energy Isolating Device, if “Single Lock” or “Multiple Lock” methods are used. The PtW Responsible, after having verified that work area has been transferred in the conditions in which it was consigned, will remove the Control LOTO Lock from the Box (in case of “LOTO Box” method), releasing the keys of Control LOTO Locks applied on Energy Isolating Devices. In case of “Single Lock” or “Multiple Lock” methods, this passage doesn’t exist and the Permit to Work Responsible has already these keys. Then, Permit to Work Responsible will remove Control LOTO Locks from Energy Isolating Devices strictly carrying out or leading, in person and step by step, the inverse sequence of activities indicated on the PtW Application form. Verifying the accomplishment of it and leaving evidence on the PtW application form. Finally, Permit to Work Responsible will file the LOTO Instruction, as it can be at everyone disposal in case of any other similar LOTO Activities. In case this Instruction has been improved with respect to the preceding one, any improvement has to be written on it.
9. SPECIAL SITUATIONS
9.1 SHIFT CHANGE
About Personal LOTO Locks, when work extends beyond one shift, Work Responsibles entering the work area must affix their locks in place before departing Work Responsibles remove theirs.
Transition Locks are an approved alternative to use of direct LOTO hand-off, in the event there is a gap in works on a system that has been locked and tagged-out. Use of transition locks and tags communicates the system remains unsafe to operate and assures that the LOTO process remains intact during the work transition.
Transition locks are never to be used alone for Lock Out.
It is the departing Work Responsible responsibility to inform the entering shift of the Lockout/Tagout and review methods for its safe removal.
In any case, the entering Work Responsible shall perform the aforementioned verification step, in order to verify that the machine or the equipment keep be isolated and de-energized.
9.2 REMOVING PERSONAL LOCK OF A MISSING PERSON
In case a person is missing and not available, Permit to Work Responsible can decide to take off Personal LOTO Lock (and Personal LOTO Tags) of the missing person, subject to the following conditions:
Before to take off Personal LOTO Lock of other person:
a) Verify that missing person, that applied his Personal LOTO Lock, is not actually present on the Site.
b) Make all reasonable efforts to contact the missing person and inform him/her that his/her personal lock and tag shall be removed.
c) Make all reasonable efforts to contact the supervisor of the missing person and tell him/her that Personal LOTO Lock and Tag of his/her employee will be removed.
Authorization to take off the Personal LOTO Lock and Tag shall be obtained from the following responsible:
a) In all cases, it is mandatory to obtain authorization by direct responsible/supervisor of missing person. If he is not available then authorization has to come from next hierarchical level.
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
12/14
b) In case of contractors, authorization shall be obtained from Contractor Responsible according to his LOTO Procedure.
Permit to Work Responsible will take off Personal LOTO Lock and keep it.
To cancel a Personal Lock of a missing person Permit to Work shall follow the points of Annex 1.
Personal Tags applied on the Personal LOTO Locks positions are subject to be taken off with the same conditions.
9.3 PROLONGED STOPPAGE
In case of prolonged stoppage of an equipment or machine (more than one shift change), equipment or machine have to remain Locked Out. Permit to Work Responsible shall keep the possession of the Personal LOTO Lock Key. This requirement will be applied in any of the following circumstances;
a) Status equipment is remained in a state which is not possible its operation or start.
b) Commissioning of the equipment could signify a danger for the nearby people.
c) Commissioning of the equipment could represent an environment incident (for example, oil spillage)
d) Commissioning of the equipment could provoke damages to the equipment.
When Permit to Work need to transfer responsibility of LOTO, Control LOTO Locks Keys are delivered in person to the new Permit to Work Responsible.
New Permit to Work Responsible will register LOTO Responsibility transfer on the Permit to Work Form.
When equipment have been Locked Out during several shifts with anyone have worked on this Locked Out Equipment or area, Permit to Work Responsible shall verify again LOTO instruction before allowing the work to continue.
Permit to Work Responsible shall confirm that isolation of the equipment is still effective, verifying physically each Control LOTO Lock and LOTO device. Verification of de-energization is not needed except Lock Device have been compromised.
10. REMOVING PERSONAL LOCK FORM
Management Removal of a Personal LOTO Lock
GRE Location: _____________________________________ Date: _______________
1. Why does the lockout need to be removed?
2. Name of the person(s) who’s name appears on the LOTO Device:
3. Has the person(s) authorized removal of the LOTO Device? Yes No Comments:
4. If no, why? Please document:
5. Name of the equipment that the LOTO Device is to be removed from:
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
13/14
6. Have all affected employees been notified? Yes No
7. Document: how affected employees have been notified?
8. Name of person authorizing the removal of the LOTO Device:
9. Name of person who will remove the LOTO Device:
10. Has the Regional Manager, Operations Supervisor and HSEQ approved the removal of the LOTO Device? Yes No
11. Have all procedures been followed according to GRE Safety requirements in the removal of the LOTO Device? Yes No
12. - If the answer to the above question is yes and the removal of the device has been approved the Lockout device can be removed.
Permit to Work Responsible: _______________________________________ Date: ____________
Completed forms must be maintained in the Power Plant/Site files
Annex 1
Baseline Country LOTO Instruction
14/14
- THE HEAD OF GLOBAL RENEWABLE ENERGIES
- Francesco Venturini
Policy no. 291
Version no. 1 dated 23/10/2017
Subject: Safe Use of Mobile Phone at Work
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 1/6
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_291_Vers.1
CONTENTS
1. PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT AND AREA OF APPLICATION .......................................................... 2
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 2
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT ............................................................................................... 2
4. REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................... 2
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONOMY ......................................... 3
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS .............................................................................................................. 3
7. PROCESS DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3
7.1 Basic Rules ......................................................................................................................................... 4
7.2 Use of MCD at office .......................................................................................................................... 4
7.3 Use of MCD while driving ................................................................................................................... 5
7.4 Use of MCD while walking .................................................................................................................. 5
7.5 Use of MCD at worksite or Power Plant ............................................................................................. 6
8. ACTION TO BE IMPLEMENTED TO REDUCE THE RISK ....................................................................... 6
THE HEAD OF GLOBAL RENEWABLE ENERGIES
Antonio Cammisecra
Policy no. 291
Version no. 1 dated 23/10/2017
Subject: Safe Use of Mobile Phone at Work
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 2/6
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_291_Vers.1
1. PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT AND AREA OF APPLICATION
The aim of this document is to provide common minimum standards for safe and healthy use of mobile phone
and smartphone or similar devices at work.
Knowledge and application are mandatory for all Global Renewable Energies (GRE) employees and
contractors in GRE Regions/Countries.
Local HSEQ, in consideration of their geographical and organizational extension, may define their own
operating instructions linked to this policy.
This policy shall be implemented and applied to the extent possible within the Global Renewable Energies
Business Line and in compliance with any applicable laws, regulations and governance rules, including any
stock exchange and unbundling-relevant provisions, which in any case prevail over the provisions contained
in this document.
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT
Version Data Main changes description
1 23/10/2017 Issuing of “Safe Use of Mobile Phone at Work” Policy
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT
Responsible for drawing up the document:
Health, Safety, Environment and Quality
Responsible for authorizing the document:
Human Resources and Organization Global Renewable Energies
4. REFERENCES
Group Code of Ethics;
Zero Tolerance of Corruption Plan (ZTC);
Organizational model under Law-Degree 231/2001 and Enel Global Compliance Program (EGCP);
IMS Manual
Quality Safety Environment Policy of Enel Green Power.
List of documents issued by external organizations (laws, guidelines, regulations):
ISO 9001: Quality Management Systems – Requirements
ISO 14001: Environmental Management Systems– Requirements with guidance for use
Policy no. 291
Version no. 1 dated 23/10/2017
Subject: Safe Use of Mobile Phone at Work
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 3/6
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_291_Vers.1
OHSAS 18001 Occupational health and safety management systems – Requirements
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONOMY
Process Area: HSEQ
Macro Process: Health and Safety
Process: Safety guidelines definition
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
Acronym and Key words Description
GRE Global Renewable Energies Business Line
Contractors employees employee of a contractor who is employed by GRE for business (i.e
Maintenance Services, Construction Services, …..)
QSE Health, Safety, Environment and Quality unit within GRE
Local HSEQ Health, Safety, Environment and Quality unit within GRE
Region/Country
Mobile phone Device that allow to make telephone calls and send and receive
short messages (SMS)
Smartphone
Device that allow to make telephone or internet call (i.e. Skype),
send and receive short messages (SMS) and other messages by
App, have an internet connection, read and send e-mail, use App
Tablet Device generally larger than a smartphone that can allow all the
same function of a smartphone
Mobile Communication Device (MCD) Mobile phone, Smartphone, Tablet
Safe Area A signposted and demarcated area (see prohibition pictogram) near
a work zone that is maintained as being free from work activities.
Hands free kit Set of equipment designed to enable the use of a mobile phone
without the hands
Earphones Device worn on the ear to receive radio or telephone
communications
7. PROCESS DESCRIPTION
Incorrect use of mobile phones or similar devices, either to a lack of attention during operative activities or to an unsafe use, can suppose a serious threat to Safety within Company. For that reason, GRE aims to ensure peoples’ safety at work by providing clear requirements on where and when it isn’t safe to use such MCD devices and suggestions for a healthy use of the MCD.
Policy no. 291
Version no. 1 dated 23/10/2017
Subject: Safe Use of Mobile Phone at Work
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 4/6
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_291_Vers.1
7.1 Basic Rules
In order to assure the health and safety of all employees working at GRE sites, power plants or offices, when
using a mobile phone, GRE or Contractors employees need to consider the following principles of safety:
Be aware of this policy and be familiar with any legal restrictions on using MCD phones;
Take reasonable care and consideration of others when operating mobile phones;
Do not use a mobile phone in the following cases:
o Working in Control Room
o Combustible storage (i.e Biomass Plant)
o Zones classified/marked as explosive atmosphere (ATEX)
o In areas that are marked with the prohibition pictogram:
o During operational activities
During the operational activities, it is not possible to abandon work to attend calls, to read
messages, email or to use internet or an app, unless it is urgent;
Texting during driving is forbidden.
Exceptions in which it is allowed to use mobile phone or similar devices during work:
During breaks and outside of the work/risk area;
For emergency/safety reasons, and outside of the work/risk area;
When MCD is a work tool, and it has been carried out in a risk assessment, job hazard analysis or pre
job check and introduced measures to eliminate or control significant risks related to the use of MCD
(i.e. internal communication during lifting activities, communication of mechanical/electrical
manoeuvres);
At the offices.
7.2 Use of MCD at office
Distraction can be a casual factor in the dynamics of an accident, which is why it is important to pay attention to behaviors with the mobile phone in the office. Rules for the use of mobile phone during use in the office:
Do not use the MCD while walking or walking down or up stairs.
Furthermore, the use of the mobile phone in the office, besides being a safety hazard, can also be a health hazard (i.e., a stress-triggering component). Accordingly, it must be respect the space and territory of other people who may be annoyed or distracted by your mobile phone. Recommendations for the use of mobile phone in the office:
Policy no. 291
Version no. 1 dated 23/10/2017
Subject: Safe Use of Mobile Phone at Work
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 6/6
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_291_Vers.1
It always recommended the use of earphones while listening to audio or during a call, but only for one ear, so that is always possible listen other sounds.
7.5 Use of MCD at worksite or Power Plant
Talking on a mobile phone in a worksite, in any phase construction or commissioning, or a power plant in operation can be dangerous in many ways. If you are involved in work and you are not paying your full attention to what you do, structural integrity can be compromised and damage can be very costly. But beyond of this things, talking on your cell phone can make you forget about the dangers that exist in most construction sites that threaten people's lives, resulting in injury or death.
So, in order to make a call or use messages or other functions of a MCD without affecting the safety of yourself
and others around you, following rules must be respected when using a mobile phone in a worksite/work area:
Do not use the mobile phone during operational activities (see point 7.1 Basic Rules);
In case of need to talk by phone during work or to use other MCD, people should remove themselves
to a safe area once they have informed supervisor/foreman/construction referent.
Personal calls should be made during breaks or in exceptional circumstances;
In case of authorized call or use other MCD, use only one earphone in order to be allowed to hear any
sound present in the surroundings;
Keep mobile calls brief;
Do not walk during the call.
8. ACTION TO BE IMPLEMENTED TO REDUCE THE RISK
To reduce Safety and Health risks related to the use of MCD, the following actions will be implemented in the countries and companies:
all the GRE’s vehicles will have a hands free kit for the mobile call;
all the company mobile phone and smartphone provided to the colleagues will have earphones;
there are regularly made information campaign about the risks related to the use of MCD and the right
behaviors using the MCD;
any accident recorder in the company due to the use of MCD will be shared in the company as worst
case of the use of MCD;
The list of the improvement action adopted to avoid the occurrence of accident due to the worst use
of the MCD will be shared and controlled at Country and Central Level;
In all the drive safe training, will be dedicated specific sessions to the risk related at the use of MCD
driving;
Spread this policy to contractors in GRE Regions/Countries.
Policy no. 261
Version no.1 dated 30/05/2017
Subject: Occupational Health & Safety Risk assessment
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 1/9
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_261_Vers.1
CONTENTS
1. PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT AND AREA OF PPLICATION ............................................................ 2
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 2
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT ............................................................................................... 3
4. REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................... 3
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONMY ............................................ 4
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS .............................................................................................................. 4
7. IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS ............................................................................................................... 5
7.1 Identification of homogeneous groups ............................................................................................... 6
7.2 Identification of areas/sub-areas ........................................................................................................ 6
7.3 Identification of activities .................................................................................................................... 6
8. RISK ASSESSMENT.................................................................................................................................. 7
8.1 Model of risk assessment ................................................................................................................... 7
9. PREVENTION, PROTECTION AND IMPROVEMENT OBJECTIVES ...................................................... 8
9.1 Drafting and updating of the Risk Assessment Document................................................................. 8
10. ATTACHMENT ....................................................................................................................................... 9
THE HEAD OF GLOBAL RENEWABLE ENERGIES BUSINESS LINE
Antonio Cammisecra
Policy no. 261
Version no.1 dated 30/05/2017
Subject: Occupational Health & Safety Risk assessment
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 2/9
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_261_Vers.1
1. PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT AND AREA OF PPLICATION
This policy defines the criteria for the ongoing health and safety hazard identification, risk assessment, and
determination of necessary controls related to Global Renewable Energies Business Line employees and other
interested parties (contractors, suppliers and visitors).
The Employer, in accordance to any applicable legal obligation and in consideration of their geographical and organizational extension, must define an organizational procedure at region/countries level based on this Policy and taking into account:
1. hazards present in the workplace and those of the activities, infrastructure, equipment, materials,
and organizational/psychosocial aspects that may affect staff in the performance of their duties;
2. the assessment of the risk related to the hazards identified and elimination or reduction of risks
identifying priorities for action;
3. determination of controls and monitoring of their effectiveness;
4. definition of objectives to improve health and safety.
The analytical methodology for the identification of hazards (risk factors), meaning every aspect that can generate or influence the level of occupational risk, takes into account both material factors (hazardous substances, machinery, etc.) and organizational and procedural factors. Within the EGP Integrated Management System, the methodology described below identifies, from the conceptual point of view, the elements and phases of the overall assessment process which is developed in each territorial unit with their own methods which take in count the IT tools in use and local law. This document cancels and replaces the System Procedure EGP QSE SP SAF 431 rev.04 “Risk assessment” dated 15/12/2014.
This policy shall be implemented and applied to the extent possible within the Global Renewable Energies
Business Line and in compliance with any applicable laws, regulations and governance rules, including any
stock exchange and unbundling-relevant provisions, which in any case prevail over the provisions contained
in this document.
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT
Version Data Main changes description
1 30/05/2017 Issuing of policy No. 261
Policy no. 261
Version no.1 dated 30/05/2017
Subject: Occupational Health & Safety Risk assessment
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 4/9
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_261_Vers.1
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONMY
Level 1 Process: Health, Safety, Environment and Quality
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
GRE Global Renewable Energies Business Line
QSE Health, Safety, Environment and Quality Unit within GRE
Workspaces
Offices, sites and plants and, more generally, areas and places within
which risks are present and where staff carry out their activities.
Work sub-areas Division of area into units with a minimum surface area that presents
homogeneous hazards-risks.
Homogeneous group Set of one or more persons who, within the same workplace, carry out
similar activities in terms of method and time, and exposed to the same
hazards-risks.
Risk Assessment Document Set of risk assessment in the workplace documentation.
Hazard Source, situation or act that may cause harm such as an injury, an
occupational disease, or a combination of these.
A hazard is also defined as an "agent of risk" and "hazard factor".
Risk Combination of the likelihood of an occurrence of a hazardous event or
exposure(s) and the severity of injury or ill health that can be caused
by the event or exposure(s)
Acceptable risk Risk reduced to a level that can be tolerated by the organization with
respect to the obligations of law and the contents of policy.
Magnitude or Damage Potential effect caused by exposure to work-related risk; for example,
the noise agent of risk can cause a reduction in the hearing threshold,
i.e. the onset of hearing loss (damage).
Unit of risk Perimeter for which the Risk Assessment Document is drafted, which
may coincide with the territorial unit, operational unit, plant, company,
etc.
Probability The measure of the likelihood that a damage will occur.
Territorial unit Organizational structures at global or local level as reported in IMS
Manual.
SAF Health and Safety unit within QSE
Prevention and Protection Services Local team dedicated to prevention and protection activities on health
and safety matters that supports the Employer in the application of
health and safety regulations, policies and company standards.
Policy no. 261
Version no.1 dated 30/05/2017
Subject: Occupational Health & Safety Risk assessment
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 5/9
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_261_Vers.1
Employer Heads of territorial units that has the responsibility, defined by the local
law and / or by the company organization, to assure the care of the
health and safety of the people that work for the company.
Occupational Physician
Medical doctor in charge of health surveillance activities in the
organization
PPE Personal protection equipment
IMS Quality, Safety and Environment Integrated Management System
7. IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS
Depending on the nature of the technological cycles, equipment and process phases or processing, and based
on acquired experience, SAF identifies and prepares a list (non-exhaustive) of general hazards risk and
provides it to the territorial units which in turn arrange to check it and specify its presence within the scope of
their activities and then proceed to assess them.
The non-exhaustive list “General list of hazards/risks in the Global Renewable Energies Business Line” is the
Attachment 1.
To define the general hazards/risks, SAF takes into account:
workplaces and work equipment;
changes in the organization or activities;
functional areas divided into sub-areas in relation to the different phases of the production process (fluids, substances used, machinery, etc.);
the main products and substances used in production;
legal standards, the provisions of supervision bodies and standards of good practice;
the results of the campaigns carried out for monitoring the working environment;
statistical data on workplace accidents and diseases in the company;
experiences acquired in the company or at other similar production facilities.
The identification of hazards, functional for the risk assessment, must be carried out:
within each sub-area if the area is divided into several parts (hazards present in the area – sub-area independently of tasks carried out);
job hazard analysis made for each task performed (hazards that depend only on activities independently from the area).
The hazards identified by the territorial units, which may interact with workers, including suppliers and guests,
are examined and assessed in conditions of:
normal and non-normal exercise, such as incidents or emergency situations reasonably foreseeable on the basis of events that have occurred in the territorial unit or other similar plant;
ordinary and extraordinary maintenance;
organizational changes in work (restructuring, changes in working methods, etc.).
Policy no. 261
Version no.1 dated 30/05/2017
Subject: Occupational Health & Safety Risk assessment
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 6/9
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_261_Vers.1
o Whenever, with respect to Unites of Risk, the Employer highlight hazards-risks that are not
included in the general list, they enter them in their list of hazards-risks, arrange for assessment
and notify to SAF, which will consider updating the general list.
7.1 Identification of homogeneous groups
According to the activities and elementary tasks performed, workers are allocated to homogeneous groups by
exposure to hazards-risks.
To identify homogeneous groups, reference is made to the provisions that establish the roles and
responsibilities of the organization, identifying the set of one or more persons who carry out, within the same
workplace, similar activities in terms of method and time and are exposed to the same hazards-risks.
The resulting lists are available and uploaded in IT systems.
The Heads of territorial units identify the homogeneous groups of their units with the following sequence of
activities:
indication of the personnel making it up;
identification and description of the areas/sub-areas where it carries out its work.
For each of these phases, the territorial units can use the catalogues prepared by QSE or insert new entries.
7.2 Identification of areas/sub-areas
Before proceeding with risks assessment, it is necessary to map out all work areas/sub-areas. To to this, the work areas of the territorial unit are identified and divided into areas and sub-areas, that are functional for the risk assessment. This activity should be carried out simultaneously with the process of identification of hazards- risks, starting from a functional division of plants into areas and sub-areas that will need to be optimized to the needs of the risk assessment.
7.3 Identification of activities
Once all areas and sub-areas have been identified, all the activities (jobs) performed are mapped. To do this,
the processing and related tasks performed, and where necessary the daily frequences of their performance,
are identified. Having performed the aforementioned activities, the areas and sub-areas in which these are
carried out are connected to related tasks performed.
Policy no. 261
Version no.1 dated 30/05/2017
Subject: Occupational Health & Safety Risk assessment
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 7/9
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_261_Vers.1
8. RISK ASSESSMENT
With the support of the Prevention and Protection Service, the Employer acquires the elements needed to
assess the sources of danger, quantifying the risk associated with them and taking into account all the
prevention and protection measures adopted and the mitigation measures implemented in all operating and
maintenance conditions (normal and not).
The Employer, acquired all the necessary information, in collaboration and with the involvement of all the
figures provided by local legislation (e.g. Occupational Physician, workers' representatives, etc.) under his/her
own responsibility, drafts the Risk Assessment Document(s) for his/her territorial unit. The document must
contain at least the following elements:
description of the territorial unit;
identification of the figures charged with health and safety, with reference to local legislation (e.g. Employer, Prevention and Protection Service, persons responsible for emergency management, etc.),;
hazard identification (analysis);
identification of areas/sub-areas;
identification of homogeneous groups;
identification of processing/tasks for each homogeneous group;
description of the methodology to develop the risk assessment;
assessment of the likelihood and magnitude of the risk and an indication of the priority interventions (immediate, urgent, etc.).
identification of prevention and protection measures adopted and containment measures implemented and/or planned (improvement objectives, program, procedures, etc.), indicating the person/structure responsible for the process of improvement;
communication to workers of the risks related to their activities.
8.1 Model of risk assessment
Regarding the method of calculation adopted, in accordance to local law, the risk is brought back to a variable
value R, as the product of the probability (P) or frequency of a given event by the impact (I), that is the
magnitude or severity of the consequences of the event according to the following general equation:
R = P x I
In the GRE region/country, it is calculated with methods that are supported by IT tool on the basis of a matrix
of at least nine factors (3x3) which, without prejudice to the validity of the general assessment formula, consider
and apply in a different way the cancellation of the risk through the effect of improvement measures put in
place (procedures, PPE, etc.).
On the basis of that situation, taking into account the operational procedures implemented over time in different
region/country, QSE, as part of the continuous improvement of IMS, takes action aimed at identifying a single
assessment model that uses an information system that is consistent and can be integrated with those used
for the carrying out of other activities of the business line. Such action develops in a progressive manner and
Policy no. 261
Version no.1 dated 30/05/2017
Subject: Occupational Health & Safety Risk assessment
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 8/9
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_261_Vers.1
must in any case ensure the continuous and timely coverage of the risk assessment and ensure compliance
with the requirements of local reference standards.
9. PREVENTION, PROTECTION AND IMPROVEMENT OBJECTIVES
On the basis of the assessments performed, the Employer, with the involvement of the Prevention and
Protection Service and Occupational Physician, identify the control measures to be applied within their own
unit for each hazard -risk and decide the objectives for improvement.
The main prevention and protection measures associated with each hazard-risk are reported in specific
operational documents or in the information system.
These measures are summarized in the following types:
Technical;
Training and information;
Organizational and procedural;
Health protocol;
PPE.
The risk-hazard association with the main prevention and protection measures is an instrument for definition
of the objectives for improvement of the results of the system.
9.1 Drafting and updating of the Risk Assessment Document
The results of the phases described above for hazard identification and risk assessment are contained in the
Risk Assessment documentation.
The documentation is managed in each unit by QSE and updated according to the criteria established by the
applicable local law and by this procedure:
in the event of changes in the production process or the organization of work significant for the health and safety of workers;
in relation to the degree of evolution of technique, prevention and protection;
as a result of significant accidents;
when the results of health surveillance show the need.
QSE and the Employer have the task of checking implementation and effectiveness through audits, analysis of accidents and injuries, health surveillance, etc.
Policy no. 261
Version no.1 dated 30/05/2017
Subject: Occupational Health & Safety Risk assessment
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without the
previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A. 9/9
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_261_Vers.1
10. ATTACHMENT
Attachment 1.
General list of hazards/risks in the Global Renewable Energies business line
The non-exhaustive list below shows hazards/risks present in the Global Renewable Energies business line :
1. Falling from same level.
2. Falling from heights.
3. Objects Falling.
4. Landslide and collapse.
5. Struck against and crushing.
6. Struck by moving parts.
7. Entrapment.
8. Cutting.
9. Material Projection.
10. Thermal Contact.
11. Electrical.
12. Explosion.
13. Fire.
14. Confined Spaces.
15. Traffic (outside work center).
16. Hostil Conduct.
17. Thermal-Weather Hazard.
18. Noise.
19. Vibration.
20. Ionizing radiation.
21. Non Ionizing radiation.
22. Lighting.
23. Chemical Agents.
24. Biological Agents.
25. Overexertion and clumsy movements.
26. Psychological.
27. Workplace environment conditions.
28. Ergonomics.
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
1/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
CONTENTS
1. PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT AND AREA OF APPLICATION .......................................................... 2
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 2
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT ............................................................................................... 2
4. REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................... 2
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONMY ............................................ 3
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS .............................................................................................................. 3
7. LIFTING MANAGEMENT PROCESS ........................................................................................................ 4
7.1 DEFINING OF THE LIFT .................................................................................................................... 4
7.2 LIFTING ASSESSMENT .................................................................................................................... 5
7.2 LIFTING PLANNING .......................................................................................................................... 6
7.2.1 Lifting equipment ............................................................................................................................ 7
7.2.2 Loads .............................................................................................................................................. 7
7.2.3 Workers .......................................................................................................................................... 8
7.2.4 Training ........................................................................................................................................... 9
7.2.5 Work Area ....................................................................................................................................... 9
7.2.6 Positioning of machinery .............................................................................................................. 10
7.3 LIFTING EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 11
7.3.1 Communication of Lift Plan .......................................................................................................... 11
7.3.2 Hosting devices, transport vehicles and machines ...................................................................... 11
7.3.3 Handling tools and accessories.................................................................................................... 12
7.3.4 Personal protective equipment ..................................................................................................... 12
7.3.5 Signalization ................................................................................................................................. 12
7.3.6 Job Hazard Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 13
7.3.7 Preparation of the Load ................................................................................................................ 13
7.3.8 Conducting Lifting Operation ........................................................................................................ 14
7.3.9 Moving the load ............................................................................................................................ 14
7.4 CHANGING CONDITIONS .............................................................................................................. 15
7.5 LEARN AND RECORD .................................................................................................................... 15
8. ANNEXES................................................................................................................................................. 16
THE HEAD OF HEALTH, SAFETY, ENVIRONMENT AND QUALITY
Maria Galainena De Carlos
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
2/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
1. PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT AND AREA OF APPLICATION
This document aims to define mandatory basic rules (assessment, planning, preparation and execution) for
lifting activities (hoisting, Loading, unloading) in order to prevent any safety event.
The Knowledge and application is mandatory to all Global Renewable Energies Business Line employees and
contractors working in GRE Power plants and/or construction sites.
This operating instruction shall be implemented and applied to the extent possible within the Global Renewable
Energies Business Line and in compliance with any applicable laws, regulations and governance rules,
including any stock exchange and unbundling-relevant provisions, which in any case prevail over the
provisions contained in this document.
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT
Version Data Main changes description
1 24/07/2017 Issuing of the Operating Instruction “Lifting Activities Safety Rules”.
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT
Responsible for drawing up the document:
Health and Safety Unit within HSEQ
Responsible for authorizing the document:
Human Resources and Organization Global Renewable Energies
4. REFERENCES1
Group Code of Ethics;
Zero Tolerance of Corruption Plan (ZTC);
Enel Global Compliance Program (EGCP);
Safety, Environment and Quality Management System Manual - GRE S.p.A.;
Policy No. 113 dated 22/12/2011 “Substation and Transmission Lines Maintenance”;
Policy No. 128 dated 09/08/2013 “Guidelines for high specialized maintenance technical activities”;
Policy No. 146 dated 05/06/2015 “Operation”;
Policy No. 108 dated 16/12/2017 “Solar Maintenance Strategy”;
1 To find the documents, please use the “Conversion list” available at this link
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
3/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
Policy No. 276 dated 24/07/2017 “Lifting Policy;
Organizational Procedure No. 86 rev.1 dated 23/7/2012 “Renewable plants start-up”;
Organizational Procedure No. 90 dated 4/8/2011 “Wind Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 91 dated 4/8/2011 “Hydro Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 92 dated 4/8/2011 “Geothermal Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 95 dated 28/10/2011 “Hydro operation process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 96 dated 28/10/2011 “Wind Operation Process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 97 dated 28/10/2011 “Solar operation process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 98 dated 14/11/2011 “Geothermal Power Plants Operation”;
Organizational Procedure No. 100 dated 2/4/2012 “Biomass Operation Process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 101 dated 2/4/2012 “Biomass Power Plants Maintenance”;
Operating Instruction No. 9 dated 21/12/2012 “Health & Safety Standard”.
List of documents issued by external organizations (laws, guidelines, regulations):
ISO 9001: Quality Management Systems – Requirements
ISO 14001: Environmental Management Systems– Requirements with guidance for use
OHSAS 18001 Occupational health and safety management systems – Requirements
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONMY
Level 1 Process: Health and Safety
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
Acronym and Key words Description
GRE Global Renewable Energies Business Line
QSE Health, Safety, Environment and Quality Unit within GRE
Lifting A lifting operation is an operation concerned with the lifting and lowering of a load. A load is the item or items being lifted. A lifting operation may be performed using lifting equipment.
Operation Series of activities for handling (sling, hoist, transport, unload) or transfer of any material using hoisting equipment, transport systems, mixed machinery, handling tools and accessories;
Maximum Lifting Load
Refers to the maximum weight that can be manipulated in certain conditions by a lifting equipment, means of transport or any hoisting equipment. You must follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer. All equipment and tools must have indication of the maximum weight.
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
4/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
Lifting Equipment Includes any equipment used at work for lifting or lowering loads, including attachments used for anchoring, fixing or supporting it.
Operation Manager person who defines the work area for the operation to avoid interference and keep any additional hazards in the area under control.
Operator person responsible for the performing operation using appropriate means in safe conditions and following the directions of the riggher.
Rigger
Worker designated for providing relevant information to the operator(s) during execution of the operation. Must be fully acknowledged with the standard signs used during operation with hoisting/lifting devices and be able to perform these signals clearly
Worker Any person who may be subject to the hazards appearing due to hoisting and transporting loads using mechanical systems.
Lifting plan
A specific plan developed by competent person for all complex hoisting/transporting operations. Plan has to include for lifting: dimensions and/or weight of the load, simultaneous use of apparatus, use of specific tools; for transport: limitations along the route.
7. LIFTING MANAGEMENT PROCESS
7.1 DEFINING OF THE LIFT
In order to define the lift the following parameters are established:
Load weight, shape, center of gravity and availability of adequate lifting points
Initial and final load positions and how it will get there
The environment in which the Lifting Equipment will be used
Layout or work environment
The basic principles applicable to lifting operations are:
Assessment
Planning
Executing
Reacting to changing conditions
Lifting operations are classified as follows:
1) Routine Lifts This classification comprises the following operations:
Bridge-Crane Operations
Lifts with Internal Hoist
Geothermal Drilling
Forklift activities
For this Lifting operations shall be elaborated a:
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
5/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
A generic risk Assessment
Operational Instructions
However, classifying a lifting operation as ‘routine’ does not automatically make it a ‘safe’ lifting operation – most incidents associated with lifting occur during routine operations. The risk assessments and Operational Instructions shall always be reviewed during Job Hazard Analysis for continued applicability. (7.3.6 Job Hazard Analysis)
2) Non-Routine Lifts
Non-routine lifting operations can be further sub-divided on:
Simple lifting operations cranes using Loose Lifting Equipment
Complicated lifting operations (i.e. tandem lifting)
Complex / Critical / Heavy lifting operations requiring a Lift Plan with engineering input
Unfavorable weather conditions
The weight of the load is greater than 80% of the lifting capacity of the equipment
On these cases, is not enough a generic risk assessment and/or an operational instruction. For this type of lifting operations is need:
Specific Risk Assessment
Lifting Plan
7.2 LIFTING ASSESSMENT
When a lifting operation has to be carried out, before to start the activity it has to be checked if this
particular lifting operation has been carried out before on that site. In order to acquire all information:
Risk assessment, Lifting Plan, Procedures and Lessons Learnt.
If the lifting has already been done previously and the information is available, it has to be reviewed
in order to evaluate the current conditions of the activity (e.g. changes to personnel, equipment, site
layout or work environment could all result in the need for re-assessment of hazards, , weather
conditions, …) to confirm or not if they are still applicable. So, in case significant changes have not
taken place then lifting operations may proceed under the requirements of the Lifting Plan subject to
approval.
If the lifting operations have not been carried out before, a competent person will prepare a Lifting
Plan.
The risk assessment addresses the following aspects and activities:
Cultural, communication and language difficulties
Weight, size, shape and center of gravity of load
Availability of approved lifting points on load
Method of slinging/attaching/detaching the load
Overturning/load integrity/need for tag lines
Suitability and condition of Lifting Equipment to be used
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
6/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
Initial and final load positions and how it will get there
Ground and underground considerations
Lifting over live equipment
Number and duration of lift(s)
Conflicting tasks in area
Environmental conditions including weather and permissible limits
Lighting in the pick-up and lay-down areas
Proximity hazards, obstructions, path of load (e.g. potentially live electrical, hydraulic or pneumatic lines, underground conduits, bridges and overhead structures)
Working under suspended loads
Working with ropes to move or sustain the load during lifting
Access and emergency escape routes for the Lifting Appliance Operator and load handlers (e.g. Banksman, Slinger)
Experience, competence and training of personnel and control
Number of personnel required for task
For every lifting operation the risk must be assessed and controlled. The most common hazards during lifting operations that can cause an accident are the following:
1) Structural failure in parts of the crane/lifting equipment such as boom, hydraulic pistons,
belts/chains due to overloading (i.e. the weight of the load is greater than the lifting capacity of a crane)
2) Risk of overturning, falling or unexpected movement due to the stability of the lifting equipment or load that can be influenced by:
Unstable ground,
Nonuse or inadequate use of outriggers,
Overload of the crane,
Wrong Lifting procedures,
Safety systems bypass,
Abrupt maneuvers,
High wind speed,
Unauthorized modifications to the equipment,
Different use of equipment than that indicated.
3) Contact or collision due to unspecified safety distance from other cranes, buildings, overhead power lines etc.
7.2 LIFTING PLANNING
A key basic tool that can help in risks evaluation and assessment before work commencement is the lifting plan. The purpose of a lifting plan is to inform all parties involved about potential risks and work steps in order to achieve a safe lifting. The depth analysis and the complexity of lifting plans may change according to the nature and the frequency of the lifting activity. Generally, for routing lifting activities generic operational instructions may be enough while for non-routine lifting activities a more detailed document, lifting plan, must be elaborated. A lifting plan must include, at a minimum the following:
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
7/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
Details on the load (weight, anchor points, specifications and technical characteristics etc.)
Details on the lifting equipment (components, mechanism etc.)
Load anchorage details on the lifting equipment (anchor points etc.)
Means of communication (radio, hand signals, etc.)
Roles and responsibilities of persons who will be involved in work
The number and the sequence of lifting operations
Environmental or physical constraints (weather, lighting, etc.)
Certificates in force
Emergency plan
Design of the operating range and the general area
Load drop point
7.2.1 Lifting equipment
All above lifting appliances must indicate their working load limit that is the maximum lifting load for which the equipment is designed to operate by the manufacturer. Maximum lifting load has to be smaller than the nominal load under given conditions (i.e. weather conditions) wherein the load weight can be affected. The safety threshold (safe working limit) can be determined by a specialist and is usually set at 80% if lifting capacity. In order to ensure equipment suitability for the intended use, an efficient document management and control system is necessary. Documentation to be requested by the contractor includes:
1) Operation manual of the equipment 2) Service logs 3) Certificate of inspection valid from authorized certification body (similar to CE or ANSI )
The maintenance of the equipment should be based on the manufacturer's instructions. Equipment that has suffered the following should be examined in detail and re-certificated:
Overloading,
Changes or modifications,
Long idle time
Accidents,
Certification inspection outdated (regardless of whether in use or not) In any case, a visual inspection should be carried out before using any equipment in order to ensure its suitability. Visual inspection must be carried out to both the lifting equipment and components. If case of lifting equipment where there are many parts or lifting devices, then the maximum lifting load is determined from the smallest in lifting capacity component.
7.2.2 Loads
The weight of the load that needs to be lifted must be known in advance, in order to use the proper lifting equipment. The load weight must never exceed the lifting capacity of the equipment. Load weight must be always checked:
• Plate on the load (if exists)
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
8/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
• In a document (manual, transport documents, etc.) • On a as built drawing
Weather conditions (e.g. wind, rain, etc.) can affect and/or alter the weight of the load. Such cases may arise especially when the load containing liquids (fluid dynamics) or in the case of non-symmetrical loads. Weather conditions must be forecasted in advance of the lifting plan definition. The load must be properly secured to ensure that it will not shake, slide, or tilt. The stability of the load have to be confirmed with a trial lift of few centimeters from ground, in order to check its behavior. Weight, type, shape, anchor points, the center of gravity of the load and the environmental conditions, influence the selection of lifting accessories/components (slings, chains etc.). (Annex 2 - Lifting accessories loading unloading). When the load is mechanical/electrical/electronic equipment the manual should be checked because they usually indicate the correct way of anchoring and lifting. In the case of a long size load, the belts have to be fastened in opposite direction to each other in order to avoid load rotation. The way of use a belt for tightening is not at randomly, the loop of the belt with the more seams/stiches and usually the tag with the technical characteristics of the product stitched to it, is the point of attachment to the lifting hook.
7.2.3 Workers
In any case, all workers involved in a lifting process should have defined roles and responsibilities. Operation Manager is in charge of the whole process and responsible to make sure that everyone understand all the individual actions of lifting and responsibilities entrusted to them. Other necessary roles to be appointed for lifting activities are the rigger and operator.. The operator with rigger should have constant communication (i.e. Signals, Radio). In Annex 4, are defined recommended signals used for the crane movements/maneuvers. To establish a continuous and effective communication, especially if the lifting group/team is staff of different nationalities speaking other different languages, then the “Operation Manager” must take all the necessary measures to make sure that the whole team speaks and understands a common communication code. Operators shall obey an emergency stop signal at all times, no matter who gives it.
The necessary personal protective equipment (helmet, safety shoes, and reflective vest) should be used throughout the work. We should always ask the certification license of the operator, before the lifting activities. Finally, all staff should be trained in matters relating to lifting operations, in order to be able to manipulate them without compromising the safety of workers and the integrity of the equipment. Health monitoring for operators performing hoisting/lifting and transport tasks using mechanical systems usually involves an annual check-up, unless otherwise determined by law and technical standards in force in the countries where these tasks are carried out. Medical examinations for health surveillance include medical ascertainments focusing on risks considered necessary by the Occupational Doctor.
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
9/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
7.2.4 Training
Workers performing hoisting/lifting and transport tasks using mechanical systems must be properly educated and trained for use of work equipment and the related hazards. In accordance with the applicable legislation in each country, workers must have qualifications for the use of hoisting/lifting and transport equipment, issued after completing specific training courses. Lifting Plan awareness shall be a part of Safety Induction for all employees. The Training & competency covers followings parameters:
• Assess the proposed lift to provide for planning, selection of equipment, instruction and supervision to enable the work to be carried out safely. • Ensure that all tests, inspections, examinations and maintenance have been carried out, and that there is a procedure for reporting defects and taking whatever corrective action is necessary. • Have the authority to carry out his duties to stop the operations if he thinks there is a danger. • No one shall be allowed to operate cranes or other lifting appliances within the work site for the purpose of training, even under the supervision of a competent person.
7.2.5 Work Area
Defining the work area is very important due to additional hazards that could appear at the surrounding environment during the carried out hoisting/transporting operations. The Operation manager must make sure that workers involved in the operation and third parties do not suffer any kind of harm. The Operation Manager must define the work area in relation to the area affected by the lifting/transporting operation. Access to the work area must be controlled, the area secured and any hazards associated to the workplaces signaled. The Operation Manager must ensure that only this work area is involved during the execution of the operation, due to that the following aspects have to be assessed in advance:
- PRESENCE OF POWER LINES ON THE SURROUNDINGS:
Before starting the work, any overhead lines or other existing electrical installations in the work area or its vicinity must be identified. If during any of the stages involved in the activity the presence of overhead power lines or any other unsecured live element may represent an electrical hazard for workers, the lines and any other live element should be switched off. If such lines or elements cannot be switched off, it’s mandatory respect the limits of vicinity zone, considering the combination machine-load. These limits can vary as a function of the voltage and are established by the legislation applicable in each country. In order to define the danger areas, the surrounding areas, the work area and traffic routes, the following must be especially taken into account:
the closest unprotected live elements;
All envisaged movements (transport, hoisting/lifting and any other kind of movement) of machinery or materials;
If wind may move cables;
If the crane arm can swing (even upwards) and make sudden movements.
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
10/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
Refer to the dispositions for such installations in the relative Standard: Electrical Works, especially the item: Work in the presence of electrical installations.
- GROUND CONDITIONS (STABILITY, HOLES, VERY UNEVEN GROUND, ETC.):
Make sure that the ground is sufficiently resistant to prevent supports (tracks, wheels or stabilizers) sinking during the execution of operations. Operation Manager must assure the resistance of the ground according to the local laws or technical standards in force. The ground where lifting devices are placed must be as flat as possible and must have enough resistant in order to avoid any collapse. Thus, Operation manager shall verify the ground conditions according to the local law or technical standards in force. In case the ground is not flat, another location must be found where the task can be performed and, if this is not possible, the work surface must be prepared. Before using mechanical equipment, check the route and make sure that there are no obstructions such as steps, steep ramps, ground with poor consistency, etc. When performing operations near ditches or slopes, keep in mind that the load-bearing capacity of the ground around is significantly decreased and landslides may occur. Appropriate reinforcement measures, buttresses and/or safety distances must be implemented. The greater the angle and height of the slope require the greater safety distance. The area affected by the operation should be free of any obstacles.
- WEATHER CONDITIONS (WIND, STORMS, ETC): It’s forbidden to perform load hoisting/lifting work in strong wind conditions or specific wind limits according to the crane operator and the crane lifting limits. Special attention must be paid to gusts of wind. If a storm is imminent, it is advisable to interrupt operations.
- WORK OUTSIDE GRE PLANTS: If works are performed outside of GRE plants, it is important to have all permits required by competent authorities (other companies, private individuals, councils, etc.). If the operation is performed in a place accessible to the public, such as a road, the used transport must be equipped with flashing or revolving lights located on top of the vehicle, which must remain operative only for the time it takes to execute the operation, so that makes the vehicle visible from a distance, especially at night; buzzers must also be active throughout the operation. Access to the work area must be controlled, the area secured and any hazards involved in work signaled with sufficient advance notice.
7.2.6 Positioning of machinery
The layout of equipment in the work area must be determined in relation to the available space and the obstacles location (including power lines, etc.). The machine must be positioned in a way that avoids irregularities on the ground, levelling the surface if necessary to ensure a perfectly flat location for the machinery. Check levelling before starting the works. Activities should be immediately stopped if during the execution sinkage of any supports is seen. Make sure the vehicle does not stand on holes or cavities, such as sewage manholes. If loads are distributed using stabilizer outriggers and the soil is clayey or unreliable, it is preferable to spread the distribution of loads on the ground by increasing the support surface. When working with stabilizers, which are advisable even when it is possible to lift the weight load on the wheels, the support
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
11/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
arms must be extended for their entire length and correct horizontality of the machine must be maintained. In addition, the jacks must be sufficiently raised to lift tires totally off the ground. If the calculation of crane stability and safety allows work with the crane resting on its wheels, transmitting forces to the ground through the tires, it must be keep in mind that, under these circumstances, manufacturers generally recommend higher tire’s pressures than during road circulation; consequently, before swapping from one situation to the other, it is very important to check the pressure to ensure total compliance with the rules defined by the manufacturer. If loads are transmitted through the wheels, the vehicle suspension must be locked so that, by remaining rigid, it retains the horizontal position of the base platform, regardless of the position of the arm, and avoids unexpected movements; the crane is also kept running with the handbrake ON so that the wheels can be properly chocked. Exception: When using a crane, unless indicated by the manufacturer, the vehicle must not be raised as soon as the jacks are positioned, since this would overload them and reduce the effectiveness of the braking effect. The support cylinders are only dimensioned to compensate tip-over movement and therefore must not be used to raise the vehicle.
7.3 LIFTING EXECUTION
7.3.1 Communication of Lift Plan
Prior to starting of lifting operation a competent person shall hold a Toolbox Talk with all workers assigned
to carry out the lift. Application of the ‘10 questions for a safe lift’ to the lift shall be covered during the
Toolbox Talk (Annex 5).
Operations Manager shall be clearly identified and made known to all members of the lift team and
personnel in the proximity.
All personnel involved in the lifting operation shall have their individual responsibilities clearly allocated.
All personnel should have the opportunity to review the findings of the risk assessment and the details of
the Lift Plan to ensure that everyone clearly understands and agrees with the methods and control
measures to be used.
7.3.2 Hosting devices, transport vehicles and machines
All machinery must be certified in accordance with applicable standards. If the work equipment has to be mounted on site, a qualified person (Operator and Operation Manager) must ensure that the machine has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Before using any lifting, transport or mixed machinery, the vehicle must be inspected visually to verify:
the condition of the structure and chassis (absence of dents, deformation, corrosion, etc.),
the condition of lifting or transport elements (such as the cable of an overhead crane, the rollers of a conveyor belt, bearings, the hook of a self-propelled crane, hydraulic and pneumatic pumps, couplings and pipework;
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
12/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
the correct function of controls, interlocking safety devices (preventing use by unauthorized personnel), emergency locks (including belt tears for conveyor), operating and starting signals, brakes, limiters (limit switches, load and torque limiters, etc.).
Cranes shall not be used for dragging/transporting a load
7.3.3 Handling tools and accessories
All hoisting/lifting tools (textile slings, harnesses with steel tie rods, chains) and hoisting/lifting accessories (rings, hoops, hooks, special lifting elements) must have related certification, instructions for use, storage and maintenance and an identification label with the main features and an indication of the maximum load.(annex 2) In addition to the verifications required by law and the instructions, all hoisting/lifting accessories must be inspected before use. Textile slings must not show areas of wear and tear, cuts, knots, permanent deformation, surfaces damaged by chemicals, deterioration caused by heating, etc. Slings with steel tie- rods should not have any broken wires, rusty points or advanced oxidation, permanent deformation (bending, crushing, stretching, etc.), areas flattened by wear and tear, splits, cable misaligned with terminals, slack bolts, etc. Equipment must not be used if it presents wear and tear, deformations, nicks, gaps or defects in the hook safety closure system, crushing, corrosion, damage caused by heat, etc. Load fall due to wrong locking to the lifting components.
7.3.4 Personal protective equipment
Where/When possible, priority should be given to the adoption of collective protection measures over individual ones when the latter are not sufficient to eliminate or sufficiently to reduce the risk. According to the results of H&S risk assessment, the following PPE should be used for:
head protection for falling material or contact/collision with fixed elements or objects (helmets);
eye protection when exposed to the risk of eye injury caused by splinters, splashes of hazardous substances (glasses or eye shield);
hearing protection when exposed to noise (appropriate hearing protectors such as noise protection headsets with built-in radio transmitting apparatus or earplugs);
protection for fall from heights (full body harness, Fall Arrest Systems);
protection of hands against wounds and contact with harmful substances (gloves);
protection of the body (work clothing);
protection of feet (safety boot with a protective toecap and rubber and non-perforation sole). Always keep the safety belt fastened when driving.
7.3.5 Signalization
Signs and indications identifying the work area are therefore very important. When using equipment such as forklifts, truck-mounted cranes, etc., the operator must ensure that there are no people within range of operations. It is forbidden to stay in the area under suspended loads. When the operation is performed in a place accessible to the public, such as a road, the towing vehicle must be equipped with flashing or revolving lights located on top of the vehicle, which must only be operative for the time it takes to perform the task so that makes the vehicle visible from a distance,
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
13/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
especially at night. Access to the work area must be secured and controlled, as well as provided, well in advance, with warning signs highlighting the activities underway.
7.3.6 Job Hazard Analysis
Every activity involving loads hoisting/lifting or transport must be preceded with a Job Hazard Analysis meeting of working team members organized by the Operation Manager/Site Manager. The meeting goal is to ensure that all workers:
are informed about the activities to be carried out and the operating methods to be used;
know and understand the hazards & risks associated with the activity;
adopt necessary measures to ensure that activities are performed safely. The Operation/Site Manager should compile a report after the meeting summarizing its content. At the end of operational activities, for works of particular complexity, he/she may organize an additional meeting to examine the stages of work performed, highlight the difficulties encountered and propose actions for improvement.
7.3.7 Preparation of the Load
The wiring harness must ensure resistance and stability for the load to be handled. Handling instruments and accessories must be carefully selected in the relation to the load to be moved. Stability will depend on the number of support points, their layout and the location of the center of gravity of the load. The hook holding the harness during the lifting operation must remain vertical in the center of gravity of the load during the lifting operation to ensure that the load is always balanced and stable. Additionally, wiring harness points, straps, chains, etc., supporting the load must be above the center of gravity to prevent tip-over once the load is lifted. All slings and tie-rods are designed to work in traction; therefore, if the angle formed with vertical is very large, the maximum permitted load significantly decreases. This usually occurs when the wiring harness or the cables are not long enough. The angle formed between the tie-rods must never be more than 120º or less than 90º. In any case, check the corresponding tables that the effective load for the angle formed is higher than the real load. Harness and straps that are too long cause undesirable oscillation when moving loads, especially when starting and stopping horizontal movements. Depending on the status (solid, liquid and even gaseous), shape and dimensions, the load may or may not need preparation. Such preparation involves devices that are part of the load, whose basic function is to pack the load (load nets, containers, concrete recipients, etc.). In any case, make sure that the overall center of gravity is not modified, i.e., that no movements can occur inside the load to be moved. Fitting points must be selected on load to be lifted that does not allow the load to shift or tools and hoisting machinery to slip. As a general rule, avoid pulling loads anchored to the ground; however, in operations such as dismantling structures, etc., such operations must be performed with great care since, if the load is not caged and traction in vertical position, the pull angle may cause a loading moment higher than the maximum load expected on the edge..
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
14/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
7.3.8 Conducting Lifting Operation
Lifting operations shall be conducted in strict accordance with the approved Lift Plan or operational
Instructions. Any variation from the agreed Lift Plan operational instruction shall result in the job being
stopped and reassessed to ensure continued safe operation.
7.3.9 Moving the load
Transporting:
Never exceed the machine maximum permitted load capacity. When the route to be followed has to be defined, take into account the dimensions and weight of the vehicle and the load. In some cases, it will not be possible to make turns, pass through tunnels or under bridges, cross bridges, etc. Whenever transporting the load envisages passage in areas where other workers are present, special measures must be taken to protect the safety of workers. Arranging the load: During transporting, the load must be constrained to absolutely avoid any movement because this would destabilize the machine and cause it to turn over. Moreover, take great care when opening the truck, since the load may have shifted and may fall. If the load protrudes from the vehicle, it must be suitably marked and always within the limits defined by law. Transporting the load: Road transport must take place in accordance with the laws applied in the country. If transport difficulties requires (dimensions and/or weight of the load, route limitations, etc.), a qualified technician must define the route and identify at least the critical points and the measures to be taken, the machinery to be used, as well as tools and means. This project must be approved by the Operation Manager. When travelling on sloping routes, the following precautions shall be taken:
never take corners roughly;
reduce speed significantly;
don’t stop. If necessary, use special chock for wheels.
For fork lift trucks, in addition to the foregoing, keep in mind that climbs shall be taken with the load placed on the front and descent with the load at the rear. In addition, when the load obstructs visibility, drive in reverse. For belt conveyors, it is forbidden to stay in their operating area when they are used. Before starting them, warning signs must be installed to advise they are working. Conveyor belts moving over passing people must be equipped with necessary devices to avoid falling objects.
Lifting:
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
15/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
Prior to lifting shall be satisfied that the load is secure and properly balanced and that the load path is clear of obstructions and personnel At commencement of the first lift the Lifting Operator shall carefully check the operation of the hoist brake to ensure no slippage occurs. Take up sling slack to confirm that the Lifting hook has been positioned centrally over the load lifting point, adjust the Lifting Equipment as necessary to minimize any ‘drift’ of the load as it is lifted. No external forces shall be applied to the load that create significant side loading of the Lifting Equipment For crane operations appropriate tag lines shall be used to control the load– large or long loads with flat sides that could act as a ‘sail’ are particularly prone to spinning and tag lines shall be used – tag lines shall be secured to the load and not to the rigging slings If, for whatever reason, the task is interrupted, the load must never be left suspended. Cranes shall not be used for dragging a load
Unloading:
The load must always be lowered slowly and in a controlled manner. On depositing the load on the ground, bear in mind following aspects:
the place where the load is deposited must be clear of obstructions and people;
the load must not be deposited on snow/ice;
the load must not be deposited on the edges of the ground, irregular areas, slopes, holes and ditches, etc.;
the load must be deposited only on flat and solid ground. If necessary, a suitable base can be used. The load should never be left on grating;
Before releasing the load, make sure that it is well supported and in a stable position
7.4 CHANGING CONDITIONS
All critical lifting parameters (e.g. weather, visibility, ground stability and slope, surrounding operations and
installations, site access and egress, Lifting Equipment, personnel) shall be identified during the risk
assessment and preparation of the Lift Plan.
But if the conditions changes significantly putting in risk the lifting operation and subsequently the safety of
the people, activity has to be stopped immediately and reassessed.
7.5 LEARN AND RECORD
After completing the lifting operation, everyone involved in the lift should have the opportunity to discuss and make improvements to the Lift Plan. Any learning points noted on the plan must be reviewed by a competent person and, where appropriate, action taken. Learning points may include feedback on equipment effectiveness, lifting techniques, personnel, etc.
Operating Instruction No. 790
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Lifting Activities Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
16/16
Application Areas Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_790_Vers.1
8. ANNEXES
Annex 1: Lifting Plan
Annex 2: Lifting accessories loading unloading
Annex 3: Specific requirements for execution of lifting operations
Annex 4: Explanation of signalman signals
Annex 5: 10 questions for a safe lifting
Annex 6: Lifting control Check List
All the above listed annexes are available at the following link.
Hoja1
| ANNEX 1 | ||||
| rev.00 | LIFTING PLAN | |||
| Site | Date: | |||
| Loading description: | ||||
| Lift descrioption: | ||||
| There is a loading or unloading diagram ? | YES | NO | ||
| There is a diagram of the equipment and applied loads? | YES | NO | ||
| A. LOAD | ||||
| 1. Load condiction | New | Used | ||
| 2. Empty weight: | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| 3. Content weight: | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| 4. Total weight load | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| 5. Weight of auxiliary hook: | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| 6. Weight of main hook: | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| 7. Weight of the hoisting beam | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| 8. Weight of rigging | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| 9. Weight of boomb (exteneded/retracted): | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| 10. Additional material load weight: | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| 11. Other: | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| Total | Lb./kg./Ton | |||
| Source of the load weight information (drawings, calculations, etc.) | ||||
| weight of load confirmed by: | ||||
| B. CRANE | ||||
| 1. tipe of crane | ||||
| 2. Max crane capacity | ||||
| 3. Max. radius | Length cantilever | |||
| 4. Angle of cantilever at the lifting point: | degrees | |||
| at the unloading point | degrees | |||
| 5.Capacity on the back | on the side | |||
| Capacity on the front | ||||
| 6. 6. The maximum rated capacity of the crane that radius and cantilever angle for this lifting | ||||
| it is : | ||||
| 7. The maximum load on the crane is: | ||||
| 8. This lifting will be in the ______% of the rated capacity of the crane | ||||
| 9. Available Wind measuring certified/calibrated equipment: _________________________________ | ||||
| C. BOOM | ||||
| 1. Extended: | Guarded: | |||
| 2. If the cantilever is to be used, Length: | degrees | |||
| 3. The nominal capacity of the cantilever in the lifting plan is | Lb. | |||
| D. LOAD | ||||
| 1. Cable diameter: | Number part for line: | |||
| 2. Lifting capacity based on parts | ||||
| E EQUIPMENT | ||||
| 1. tipe of hooking | ||||
| 2. Number of slings | ||||
| 3. Nominal capacity of slings assembly: | ||||
| 4. Size snap hook | Number of shackles | |||
| 5. Nominal capacity of shackles | ||||
| 6. Shackle secured to the load by | ||||
| F. CRANE LOCATION | ||||
| 1. Is the crane on a solid, flat surface? | ||||
| 2. Are there high voltage or electrical hazards? | ||||
| 3. Is there any obstacle or obstruction to lifting or turning? | ||||
| 4. Is it necessary to move the crane with the load hanging? | ||||
| 5. If it is necessary to turn the cantilever, say which side? | ||||
| G. CONSIDERATIONS | ||||
| 1. If the lift exceeds 80% of the capacity of the crane. Have additional special instructions, restrictions, diagrams for the crane, mooring and hoisting bread, etc. been attached? | ||||
| YES | NO | |||
| 2. Hoists with multiple cranes require a separate plan for each crane | ||||
| 3. Any change in the configuration of the crane, location, method of mooring or calculation, is required to develop a new Plan of critical hoists | ||||
| H. CHECKLIST BEFORE LIFTING (must be completed before lifting) | ||||
| 1 | Permit to work | |||
| 2 | Crane inspected | |||
| 3 | Equipment inspected | |||
| 4 | Well located crane, on firm ground, with extended outriggers | |||
| 5 | Verification of the space to rotate | |||
| 6 | Maximum height available for lifting | |||
| 7 | Space between load and hook | |||
| 8 | Counterweight crane | |||
| 9 | Load Test | |||
| 10 | Certified operator | |||
| 11 | Qualified rigger | |||
| 12 | Signal system | |||
| 13 | Wind / temperature | |||
| 14 | Pre-hoist safety talk | |||
| 15 | Vehicular or pedestrian traffic | |||
| 16 | Pre-lift Meeting | |||
| 17 | Control of entry and exit of work area | |||
| 18 | Authorizations and signatures | |||
| CRANE N° 1 | ||||
| MOVEMENT | RADIO | LONG. CANTILEVER | GROSS LOAD | % CRANE |
| 1° | ||||
| 2° | ||||
| 3° | ||||
| 4° | ||||
| CRANE N° 2 | ||||
| MOVEMENT | RADIO | LONG. CANTILEVER | GROSS LOAD | % CRANE |
| 1° | ||||
| 2° | ||||
| 3° | ||||
| 4° | ||||
| 1. NOTES / COMMENTS | ||||
| Name and signature of the supervisor responsible for lifting: | ||||
| Name and signature of the crane operator | ||||
| Name and signature of the surveyor / Signer | ||||
| Name and signature of area authority | ||||
| DATE: | ||||
Operational Instruction GRE_XXX_QSE_OI_YYY_Vers.Z
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global
Staff Function: -
Service Function: -
Business Line: Renewable Energies
Version no.1 dated dd/mm/2017
INTERNAL USE
Subject:
![]()
Lifting accessories loading operations
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PURPOSe AND APPLICATION SCOPE
The purpose of this document is to set the mandatory actuation guidelines for the lifting tools or accessories frequently used during the execution of many activities, in order to ensure compliance with labour risk prevention requirements during this equipment's use or manufacture.
2. ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION
The accidental release of a load, or the fall of a load due to a component’s failure, endangers, directly or indirectly, the health or safety of the people working within work area. In order to provide the required knowledge about the lifting accessories and to reduce the risk and ensure that the specified levels of performance are complied with, the features of the most frequently used lifting accessories are detailed below.
2.1. TYpEs OF LIFTING accesSoriEs AND USAGE STANDARDS
Every work requiring the lifting of a load should be duly evaluated and/or regulated through procedures, which are the basic principles of the corresponding working instructions requiring the use of the lifting accessories when carrying out the work.
The working method selected and the equipments and materials used should ensure the operator’s protection against:
· Falling objects due to a poorly secured load.
· Fall of objects released due to the lack of maintenance of the appliances and/or equipments (hooks, cables, etc.)
· Object collision due to load swing.
· Fall of persons from different heights.
· Entrapment by or between moving objects of the lifting equipments.
· Inappropriate use of materials for lifting.
· Generations of Near misses through the uncontrolled movement of the load.
Among the equipments and materials existing under the “lifting accessories” definition are the following:
2.1.1. slings
Steel slings
These are line elements formed by metal cords wrapped helically in one or several overlapped layers around a core which can be textile, metallic or mixed.
Every cable sling is composed of:
· Wire.- basic component of the steel cable, manufactured in different qualities, according to its intended purpose.
· Cord.- Formed by a number of wires according to its construction, wrapped on a shaft (core).
· Core.- Central shaft of the cable on which the cords are wrapped. It can consist of several different materials (steel, natural fibres, polypropylene).
|
Figure 1. Steel sling |
Figure 2. Endless sling |
Figure 3. End terminations |
The directions contained in the use and maintenance manual provided by the sling’s manufacturer must be followed at all times.
The user must ensure that the cable complies with the specifications of the corresponding harmonised standard.
Before using the sling to lift a load, the user must ensure that the sling has the adequate resistance. This information must be expressed in the cable’s identification label.
The easiest way to carry out the connections between cables, as well as to form the end rings or eyelets, is using a steel sling with clamps, which should be adequate to the diameter of the cable they will be applied to.
This issue should be carefully observed, because if the clamp used is too small, the cable may be damaged due to crushing in the jaw. On the other hand, if the clamp or fastener is too big, the end of ropes will not be tight enough, which may cause unexpected slipping.
The recommendation to use thimbles when executing the eyelets or end rings is due to the need to protect the cable from an excessive bending produced when the cable is subject to efforts caused by stress or load.
It is extremely important to carefully apply the following measures in order to achieve an effective and adequate arrangement of the shackles or clamps:
The nut tightening torque must be applied in a gradual and alternate way, without excessive strength. When hoisting the load for the first time, the nut tightening torque should be checked and corrected, if necessary.
IMPORTANT
· Slings made with fasteners or jaws must not be used in load lifting operations.
In general, the maintenance consists in cleaning operations.
The slings must also be greased at intervals depending on the working conditions, which can be determined through inspections. For the lubrication, the manufacturer’s instructions must be followed, taking particular care to ensure that the cable core recovers the lost grease. As a general rule, in order for the lubrication to be effective, the cable must be clean with a brush to eliminate the old grease traces, using the proper lubricant and greasing the cable thoroughly.
|
Figure4. Different shapes of steel slings |
The slings must not be placed directly on the ground, but hanged on wooden racks with a round profile or over stakes.
Do not expose the slings to direct sunlight or extreme temperatures.
The cables must undergo a programme of periodic overhauls according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and having into account the type of work and conditions under which they are used. This inspection shall be extended to those elements which might get in contact with the cable or affect it.
In the absence of an instruction manual and/or if the number of used hours is unknown, the slings must be fully checked before being used and inspected by a qualified professional at least once a year.
The slings must not be used in case of:
· A broken thread
· When there are cracks or significant wear in 20% of the total number of threads in a cable for a length equal to twice the cabling pitch.
· Abnormal and localized diameter reduction (by abrasion or severe and localized scraping).
· Cable diameter decrease in 10%
· Decrease of up to 40% of the cord section, measured in a cabling pitch.
· Existence of knots, ruptures, folds, bends, crushing, deformations, etc.
· Permanent warp, crushing, like a basket or any other damage resulting from distortion in the cable structure.
· Evident damage caused by temperature or if a sling cable with a fibre core is exposed to over 90º C, or in case of a sling cable with a steel core is used at temperatures over 200º C or under -50º C.
· End termination accessories are broken, distorted or worn out.
· Hooks opened more than 15% of the normal throat opening measured in the narrow spots or spots twisted more than 10 degrees of the flat hook without bending.
· Corrosion in the end cable or accessories.
· Distortion or opening in a folded splicing.
Figure 6. Examples of rupture in a metal sling
Textile slings
A textile sling is a linear and flexible element consisting in one or several textile straps made of synthetic fibre(the use of natural fibres is becoming obsolete), in general, finished by rings or eyelets which make it easier to hook up the load to the lifting equipment.
The fundamental safety requirements refer to the sling material (polyamide, polyester, and polypropylene) and to the utilization ratio value. There is a colour code that expresses the sling’s Maximum Working Load (hereinafter MWL).
Figure 10. Load ratio according to the strands, straps, and colour
(take in consideration the local standards colour code of each country)
The utilization ratio is the value which indicates the safety of the load lifting operation with one or more textile slings and it varies according to whether the slings are reusable (7 as minimum) or not reusable (5 or 7).
The maintenance to be carried out on slings consists in cleaning them with neutral soaps and storing them properly. When the slings have come into contact with acid substances and/or bleach, we recommend that, before being stored, they are thoroughly washed with water or other proper substances.
The repair works on slings can only be carried out by the manufacturer or any person he may appoint. Repair works in load-carrying joints are not allowed. Repair works can only be carried out on slings whose manufacturer, load capacity, and material are indicated in the label. In any case, it must be ensured that the repair shall not affect the sling’s safety.
· The room temperature must not exceed 60 ºC and the slings must not be exposed to high temperatures.
· The slings must not be placed directly on the ground and we recommend the use of wooden racks with a round profile. Another option is to store them on pallets or shelves, for example.
· It is recommended not to expose them to direct sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.
The slings must undergo a programme of periodic overhauls according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and having into account the type of work and conditions under which they are used. This inspection shall be extended to those elements which might get in contact with the sling or affect it.
In the absence of an instruction manual and/or if the number of used hours is unknown, the slings must be fully checked before being used and inspected by a qualified professional at least once a year.
A fibre sling shall be rejected in the presence of:
· Cuts (in more than 10% of their width, longitudinal cuts).
· Abrasion (wear, scrapes, damaged edges).
· Defective seams, coatings.
· Damaged rings or eyelets (fibre, metal).
· Any defect that may affect its properties, such as knots.
· Crushed or worn out belt or showing signs of misuse or inadequate positioning.
· Broken strap or handle, with a very rough touch.
· Chemical or thermal damages (changes in colour, loose fibres when rubbing).
· Belt melted, scorched or with welding spatters.
· Unreadable or torn label.
|
Figure12. Criteria for sling removal |
Figure 13. Examples of rupture in textile slings
A non-reusable sling is a sling designed for a single trip and used in a specific way, placed in position around the load in its starting point and remaining together with the load until it arrives to its final destination. After the sling is removed from the load, it can never be reused for further lifting operations because the belt is cut or destroyed when the package arrives to its destination.
|
Figure 14. . Non-reusable or single use sling |
In general, this type of sling has a nude colour, with a non-dyed belt.
The carachteristics of the slings are shown on their label, as we can see in the following typical label format:
Figure 15. Typical label format
Figure 16. Slinging form factors
The requirements contained in the use and maintenance manual, when provided by the sling’s manufacturer, must be followed at all times.
. The basic points to be considered when using textile slings are the following:
· To check the type of load to be lifted and the work angle.
· The load weight and temperature.
· The lifted load must be balanced at all times.
· To check the sling before each use and to use the slings that are correctly identified.
· To check the sling label for the MWL, according to the work position and length.
· Form factors according to the lifting type (refer to figure 11).
· To prevent friction between slings or placing them in forced positions.
· To have into account any sharp corners and to use special protections.
· Do not bend or tie knots.
· Never use damaged or defective slings.
· Do not pull on the sling if it is trapped under the load.
· No object or person should remain under the load or close during the sling lifting and handling process.
Chain slings
Chain slings are linear elements consisting in generally metallic links with access closed through welding or forging. Their resistance depend on the characteristics of the metal used (steel), the thermal treatment and the conservation status.
|
Figure 17. Chain sling |
Figure 18. 4 strand chains |
Figure 19. Possible end terminations |
The basic points to be considered when using chain slings are the following:
· To use exclusively original parts provided by the manufacturer.
· Do not remove any safety device, such as locking mechanisms, locking pins, safety tabs, etc.
· Do not apply surface coatings to lifting elements (hot galvanized, zinc coating, leaching, pickling).
· Before using the chain slings, inspect them in order to ensure that there are no damages.
· Never exceed the maximum load capacity of the sling.
· The user must ensure that the chain is fully extended before lifting it. Never use a twisted chain for lifting.
· Never tie knots with the chain.
· To cut the chain short only with shorteners specifically designed for that purpose.
· To ensure that the sling is protected when lifting loads with sharp edges.
· To ensure that the load is supported by the hook base and there is no risk of load slipping.
· Always use the adequate sling length for the load to be lifted, having into account the angles and the different length of the strands. Do not overload the chains, be sure to comply with the bending angle and, in case of doubt, always choose a larger chain.
· The hooks should not grip the load by the edges, but always by the inside part.
· The hooks which are not used during lifting should be fixed to the main washer.
· Every personnel should keep all of their body parts away from the lifting area.
· Do not try to release any link knots when the chain is straight.
· During chain handling, the use of mechanical protection gloves is mandatory (the specific model shall depend on the type of operation and simultaneous risks inherent to each task).
· When using any accessory or making any change, the manufacturer’s instructions must be followed at all times in order to ensure that the features and, above all, the resistance of the assembly are not reduced. A chain with knots or lifting eyes must not be shortened and only adequate shortening hooks may be used.
· It is forbidden to change the lifting elements shape (such as bending or grinding, cutting off parts, making drills, etc.), as well as overheating them.
IMPORTANT
Certain manufacturers have certified slings at high temperatures. These slings are characterized by a change in colour according to the temperature they are subject to, which indicates a visual reference of exposure.
The use of chains requires that, before their use, the operator must check their condition in order to detect any clear signs of damage or wear, as applicable, and report it so it can be replaced and repaired or disposed of. The defects to be checked include:
· Unreadable label.
· Elongations.
· Deformations of the accessories on the upper and bottom edges.
· Wear.
· Cracks, excessive corrosion.
· The safety latch.
Chain slings must be stored clean, dry and protected against corrosion, for example, slightly oiled.
|
Figure 21. Chain |
Figure 22. Shortener |
Chain slings must undergo a programme of periodic overhauls according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and having into account the type of work and conditions under which they are used. This inspection shall be extended to those elements which might get in contact with the chain or affect it
In the absence of an instruction manual and/or if the number of used hours is unknown, the chains must be fully checked before being used and inspected by a qualified professional at least once a year.
Any type of chain shall be rejected if:
· Its nominal diameter has been reduced in more than 10% due to wear.
· Its yield, at any point, is over 5% (measuring the chain length and the link pitch)
· There is any damaged, bent, crushed, stretched or opened link or any link with cracks or pits or excessive oxidation.
· In case of chain overload, the chain must be taken out of service.
2.1.2. END TERMINATIONS FOR LIFTING ACCESSORIES
These equipments are considered as lifting accessories if commercialized separately and thus follow the same specifications provided for them.
2.1.3. PORTABLE LIFTING EQUIPMENT
This section includes the equipments which can be directly attached to the lifting equipment. This includes, but is not limited to, lifting fork arms, grippers, C hooks, lifting beams, electromagnets, and suction pads.
These tools have some common general safety requirements:
· They must be designed to support a static load equal to three times the maximum work load without releasing it, even if resulting in a permanent deformation.
· They must be able to support a load equal to twice the maximum work load without permanent deformation.
· The accessories intended for tilting must be designed for an angle, at least, 6º higher than the maximum work angle.
· If manually driven, they must be equipped with handles to prevent damaging the operator’s fingers. If the design allows for similar grasp possibilities, handles are not required.
The safety hook is an element which facilitates hooking up loads. There are several types, though the most common are the safety hooks with a trapezoidal or rectangular section, except for the rounded platform. Only the safety hooks provided with safety devices to prevent accidental uncoupling can be used.
Figure 23. Rounded hook Figure24. Electromagnet
Every hook showing cracks or whose safety lock is deformed must be rejected.
2.1.4. SHACKLES
Shackles can be straight or lyre-shaped and vary within these two categories in what concerns their stud pin, which can be of a threaded type or drill type where the split pin is to be inserted, and consisting of a screw and its hex nut.
When using them, they should not be hit overloaded or used as hooks. When screwing the pin, it should be fully screwed, except for the last half-turn. The straps and slings will operate over the fork throat and never over the straight leg or the pin.
Remember that the standards do not allow zinc-plated treatments nor similar procedures, if not supervised by the manufacturer.
IMPORTANT
The use position of the shackles always varies according to the intended task, and in general, we point out that the correct form shall NEVER allow the pin bolt to be unscrewed.
|
Figure 26. Shackle installation |
2.1.5. OtHEr
· Hoisting eyes are rings designed to be threaded or welded to the load in order to lift it.
· The selection of a hoisting eye depends on the grease availability to avoid dirt accumulation in the internal mechanism.
· The utilization ratio of a hoisting eye must be at least five.
· A hoisting eye must be used when it is possible to ensure that the rotation axes are suited to the manoeuvre and the dimensions are correct.
Figure27. Rigging Practices
· The lifting lug is a perforated steel plate designed to be welded to the load in order to lift it.
|
Figure 28. Hoisting eyes |
Figure 29. Lifting lugs |
· Lifting anchors are the devices designed to be integrated in a structure in order to provide an anchor to lift the structure.
· Fibre straps are generally made of artificial fibres, designed to be fastened to premanufactured construction elements in order to lift them.
· Accessories for containers designed to be integrated in each of the four corners of an ISO container, through welding, in order to lift it.
· Hydraulic grippers, tongs or lifting grippers are accessories designed to handle loads by tightening them to a surface.
· The lifting fork consists in two or more arms fixed to a lift device with an upper arm, essentially to lift palletized or similar loads
Figure 30. Gripper
2.1.6. ROCKERS, sPLITTERS OR GANTRIES
These are elements necessary to lift some loads of special dimensions or to lift some parts which require it due to their own construction, preventing friction between the straps and the load.
They must be calculated as to support the weight of the load to be lifted and the compression tensions they are subjected to. They are often used fixed and have variable anchors.
|
Figure31. Lifting beam or Rocker |
These elements must have an instruction manual and bear visible EC and MWL markings; in addition, they must be subject to periodic inspections.
2.1.7. CORNERS
When fastening work on a part with sharp edges must be carried out, the strap or sling must be protected with corners prepared for that purpose.
2.2. InformaTION AND MARKINGS
As a general rule, every lifting accessory, whether bought or manufactured in-house, must have the following elements:
· Use and maintenance manual in the language of the country where it will be used. This manual must be drafted by the manufacturer and contain the requirements of its adequate maintenance, including the inspection plan.
· Statement of Compliance and EC marking. In case of in-house manufacture, the existence of the corresponding technical report which guarantees the compliance with the applicable regulations and the correct calculation of the efforts and safety coefficients must be ensured.
In particular, the following shall also be considered:
Each lifting chain, cable or belt length which is not part of an assembly must bear a marking or, when this is not possible, an unremovable plate or ring bearing the name and address of the manufacturer or his authorized representative and the identification of the corresponding certification.
The certification must contain, at least, the following information:
a) The manufacturer’s name and address and, if applicable, his authorized representative’s name and address.
b) A description of the chain or cable, including:
i. Its nominal dimensions.
ii. The manufacture.
iii. The material used in its manufacture.
iv. Any special metal treatment to which the material may have been subject.
c) The testing method used.
d) The maximum work load that the chain or rope is supposed to support. According to the intended applications, a range of values can be indicated.
Manufacturer’s Name
Manufacture Individual No.
EC Marking
Work load according to the angles
Figure 32. Label example
The lifting accessories must bear the following indications:
a) Identification of the material when this information is required to ensure safety during use.
b) The maximum work load.
In elements whose marking is physically impossible, it should be shown on a plate or other equivalent means and firmly fixed to the accessory. As aforementioned, the textile slings must bear the following information on the label:
2.3. PERIODIC InspecTIONS AND OVERHAULS
As a general rule, the work supervisor must be in charge of the corresponding inspection before each use and mention it by filling the registration defined for that purpose.
During these daily inspections, every visible parts shall be checked, as much as possible, for signs of wear and deformations. A particular attention must be given to the fixing points between the element and the equipment. Every sensible change or suspicion related to the accessory condition must be pointed out and sent to a qualified person in order to be duly inspected.
In order to determine the frequency of these inspections by qualified personnel, the following must be considered:
a) The legal conditions required by the lifting equipment.
b) The type of equipment and its conditions of use.
c) The classification group of the equipment.
d) The results of previous inspections.
e) The period during which it has been used.
In addition to the periodic and occasional overhauls, special inspections shall also be carried out. In any case, whenever an incident could cause wear along the full length of the element and/or in the fixing points, or under any other special circumstance, the whole lifting equipment must be inspected.
In these cases, it should be checked in particular:
a) The fixing points at the end terminations.
b) The pitch points passing over pulleys.
c) The parts which may be subject to abrasion by external factors.
d) Internal check for corrosion and strain.
3. Lifting procedures
To ensure the compliance between the manufacture requirements and the lifting activities on site find below some methodologies for lifting materials.
Is important to ensure the angle range allowed find below the angle description and the gravitacional center of the material for the balance of it during the lifting operation.
22/22
Figure1.Hook sling
Figure2.Strap sling
Figure3.Tubular grommet
Operational Instruction GRE_XXX_QSE_OI_YYY_Vers.Z
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global
Staff Function: -
Service Function: -
Business Line: Renewable Energies
Version no.1 dated dd/mm/2017
INTERNAL USE
Subject:
![]()
Annex 3 Specific requirements for execution of lifting operations
1. Handling of tubulars
1.1 Slinging of Tubulars
Key elements and practices for the safe operation of slinging tubulars or tubular bundles are described in this section.
1.2 Handling
· Only tubulars of the same diameter or size and about the same length should be bundled together
· The number of tubes in each bundle should be such that the middle tubes are gripped and will not slip out of the bundle.
· Tubulars should always be slung with two slings, each of the same length.
· Slings should be placed positioned at equidistance (approximately 25% of total length) from the ends of the load.
· They should be double wrapped and choked around the tubular either when using steel slings or nylon webbing.
· The sling should be of sufficient length to ensure that the choke is on the sling body, never on the sling splice, fittings, tag, eye or at the base of the sling eye or fitting.
· Care should be taken on removing slings due to stowage movement.
· Whilst loading, consideration should be given to the installation discharging sequence.
· Ensure thread protectors and endcaps are securely fastened.
· Due care and attention should be taken when loading tubulars to avoid damage to slings.
· Slings shall not cross under the load to avoid damage to the sling.
· Prior to making any lifts, the release of rigging should be considered.
· Precautions are required to prevent workers from being trapped between tubulars during release of rigging.
1.3 Transportation
· Certified transportation frames are considered best practice for chrome casings to avoid/reduce body to body contact.
· In preparing tubulars for transportation it is good practice to pick up the tubing bundle for a second time to see if more slack can be taken out using clamps or bulldog clips.
1.4 Storage
· Tubular ‘stacks’ should be segregated by pipe posts.
· The bottom stow of tubulars should be individually ‘chocked’ or secured by other mechanical means to stop movement.
2. Mobile Crane Operations
Persons shall not be permitted to board or leave the crane without first obtaining the Crane Operator’s permission. The crane shall not be left unattended.
The Operation Manager/Site Manager shall ensure that the ground (soil test), or any means of support, can sustain loads imposed by the crane and is suitable for the crane to operate within the levels and other parameters specified by the crane manufacturer. Side loads shall be avoided.
When siting a crane, point loads through the outrigger / stabilizer beams and jack pads shall be spread over a sufficient area to support the outrigger pad and to prevent the crane overturning or becoming unstable.
Danger to and from underground services (gas, electricity, water) shall be taken into consideration and precautions taken to ensure that the crane foundation is clear of such services or that they are adequately protected.
While in transit the boom shall be retracted and carried in line with the direction of motion and the superstructure secured against rotation (or the boom placed in a boom rack mounted on the carrier). The empty hook shall be lashed or otherwise restrained so that it cannot swing freely. If the crane has a telescopic boom it shall be set to the fully closed position.
Counterweights shall be properly secured and under no circumstances counterweights shall be used heavier than the manufacturer's recommended weight.
3. Overhead Gantry Crane Operation
Operators of overhead gantry cranes shall carry out daily checks on the cranes and use shall be prohibited if the limit switches, wire ropes, chains or other components are severely worn or in disrepair.
Personnel working in the vicinity of the crane shall:
· Be clear of a lifted load at all times.
· Not work or move under a suspended load.
· Not ride on the hook or load.
· Directional movement shall be made smoothly and deliberately; avoid rapid movements in any direction.
Do not exceed the rated capacity of the crane, hoist, chain, sling or any other component. Slings, load chains and other accessories shall be fully and securely seated in the hook before moving a load. Remove slack from the sling, chain or cable before lifting a load.
Use the following practices to avoid a swinging load:
· Locate the hoist directly above the lifting point of the load before lifting.
· Lower loads directly below the hoist – do not allow the load to be pulled to one side while suspended.
· Maintain a minimum of five (5) full wraps of cable on the hoisting drum at all times.
When lifting loads at or near the crane rated capacity test the hoist brakes by returning the master switch or push button to the “OFF” position after raising the load a few centimeters off the floor. If the brakes do not hold, lower the load to the floor slowly and do not continue with the lifting operation. Report the situation immediately and DO NOT USE the crane until repairs have been carried out.
If loss of power occurs, place controls in the “OFF” position to prevent unexpected start-up upon restoration of power. Disconnect power to a hoist that is unsafe or needs repair – follow the ‘Lock-Out’ procedure.
The daily inspection shall include:
· Check for any loose or missing parts.
· Check end-stops, which prevent the trolley from running off the beam.
· Know the location of the disconnect/isolation switch that will cut power off only to the hoist or crane. Be sure that it is readily accessible and not blocked.
· Make sure all control buttons are clearly labelled to indicate their function. Operate each button to make sure it functions properly, releases immediately and does not stick.
· Check upper hoist limit switch by slowly raising the block to trip the switch.
· Lower the hoist block to activate the lower limit switch if the hoist is so equipped, leaving at least five turns of rope on the hoist drum.
· Make sure wire rope is properly seated in its drum and sheave grooves without any slack or overlapping.
· When moving an A-frame hoist, take care to ensure that the wheels on each side stay on the track.
· Check all hooks – hooks shall not be cracked, stretched, bent or twisted. Each hook shall have a safety latch that automatically closes the throat of the hook. If the latch is bent, spring is broken or is otherwise damaged the latch shall be repaired before use. Hooks shall rotate freely in a block assembly.
· Check the block assembly for structural damage or cracks in any components. Sheaves shall rotate freely. The sheave guard shall be unbroken and intact. No part of the sheave guard shall be in contact with the wire rope or sheave.
· Lower the block to the lowest level and check the wire rope for the following:
- Reduced diameter of the rope – this may indicate that the rope has been stretched, has lost its inner core support or has worn wires.
- Any number of broken strands or wire.
- Kinked, crushed, cut, heat damaged or “bird-caged” wire rope.
· Check the load chain for damage, wear at contact points, cracks or distorted (bent, twisted or stretched) links. Inspect all mechanical coupling links to ensure linking pins are secured and in good condition.
· Check the condition and capacity of all accessories – nylon or synthetic web sling, wire rope slings, shackles. Capacity ratings shall be legible. The capacity of the sling being used shall be adequate for the load and attachment method.
The following shutdown procedure shall be followed:
· Position the crane so that it will not cause an obstruction.
· Remove the load and Lifting Accessories from the hook.
· Raise the hook block clear of obstructions, personnel and plant.
· Apply brakes.
· Ensure that the controller is in neutral and apply the “STOP” button.
· Turn off the auxiliary isolating switch.
· Turn off the main isolating switch.
4. Operating Near Overhead Electric Power Lines and Cables
If any part of a crane, including rope, slings or load, touches or even approaches overhead electric lines or cables there is a serious risk of fatal accident. The work shall be performed so there is no possibility of the crane, load line or load becoming a conductive path.
Additionally, shall consider:
· Isolation of electricity if possible.
· Contacting the electricity provider.
· Weather – effect on the safe working zone.
· Use of physical barriers.
Cranes shall not be used to handle materials stored under electric power lines unless any combination of boom, load, load line or machine component cannot enter the prohibited zone. Overhead lines and other electrical apparatus shall be considered live unless declared ‘dead’ and ‘safe’ by the Line Operator. Crane Operators shall not rely on the coverings of wires for their protection.
Where the possibility of contact with energized power lines exists then durable signs shall be installed at the operator’s station and on the outside of the crane warning that electrocution or serious bodily injury may occur unless minimum clearances are maintained between the crane or the load being handled and energized power lines.
5. Tandem Lifting
Tandem lifts for weight reasons alone (because a load is too heavy for a single crane) shall only be considered as a last option.
All tandem lifts shall only be authorized by based on a risk assessment demonstrating that other alternatives are not technically feasible.
Tandem lifts shall only be carried out with lifting devices equipped with a load indicator.
Tandem lifts shall always be classified as Non-Routine Lift and should at least follow the preparations outlined for this type of lift.
In addition, the following controls shall always be in place:
· Positions of cranes and loads to be carefully assessed in the Lift Plan, documented in drawings.
· Loads for both cranes to be calculated, including the range of permitted tolerances, and documented. Speeds of raising / lowering the load and slewing of the cranes shall be documented in the Lifting Plan.
· The lift area to be fenced off and a permit-to-work system in operation, the load shall not be transferred over personnel at any time.
· A full function test of all power, transmission, control, and safety systems to be carried out prior to the commencement of the lift, by competent personnel.
· Only one person giving signals to be appointed for both cranes and shall have direct sight vision (and permanent radio contact) to the Crane Operators.
· Upon signal, both cranes to lift slowly, to either the calculated weight tolerance limit or until the load is free, and STOP.
· Raising or lowering the lift, or slewing of the crane, to only be undertaken at the signal from the rigger and at the previously agreed speeds.
· Be aware that if the load is moved from horizontal to vertical the weight on each crane will change significantly.
6 Powered Industrial Trucks including Fork Lift Trucks (FLTs)
6.1 Daily / Pre-Use Inspections
These inspections must be performed and documented by the qualified operator prior to first use each day or shift the truck is used. These checks ensure that audible and visual warning equipment is working correctly by carrying out function tests prior to any lifting operations.
6.2 Operations
Key elements and practices for the safe operation of powered industrial trucks shall include, but may not be limited too, dependent on local legislation and conditions, the following:
· Before each operation or series of operations, the Operator shall:
· Perform a pre-operational check to demonstrate operational readiness of the truck. If controls do not operate properly, the Operator is responsible for notifying the supervisor. Repairs and adjustments are made before operations begin.
· Ensure the equipment is within inspection and testing intervals by examination of the periodic re-certification tags and/or documentation.
· Adhere to all tags on the controls.
· Ensure, if fitted, that seat belts are worn when operating a powered industrial truck equipped with a roll over protection device.
· During operations, the Operator shall:
· Drive at speeds appropriate for the existing conditions (space, load, lighting, surface conditions, etc.) and at or below posted limits.
· Keep all parts of the body inside the Operator compartment during operations.
· Not start or operate the truck or any of its attachments from any place other than from the Operators position.
· Ensure other personnel are not in the swing radius prior to performing turning maneuvers.
· Sound the horn when approaching cross aisles, doorways and other locations where pedestrians may step into the path of truck travel.
· Verify sufficient headroom under overhead installations, lights, wiring, pipes, sprinkler systems etc.
· Ensure they are driven on suitable surfaces. Road humps and rough or soft surfaces are to be avoided.
· Movement with loads in excessively raised positions shall not be carried out to avoid the danger of toppling, especially on uneven surfaces and while cornering.
· Shall only be used for loads, which can be carried safely on the forks or attachments fitted. Non-standard, unpackaged and excessively wide loads shall be avoided wherever possible. In particular, long tubes shall be carried using appropriate attachments.
· They are not to be operated on excessive gradients or across gradients (In general they should be driven forwards up a slope, backwards down a slope and in line with the incline. It may be necessary to raise the forks slightly at the bottom of a slope to avoid grounding).
· No workers shall:
· Put any part of the body into the mast structure or between the mast and truck.
· Be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated portion of any truck, empty or loaded.
· Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on powered industrial trucks
A safe place to ride (i.e. another seat) should be provided where riding of trucks is authorized.
· Equipment shall not be loaded beyond its rated load (capacity) except for required testing.
· Trucks should not be driven up to anyone standing in front of an object.
· Only approved industrial trucks shall be used in areas classified as hazardous locations.
· When parked:
· The engine shall be switched off, the key removed and the hand-brake applied.
· The keys shall be kept in a secure place and only issued to authorized operators for the duration of the duty period or task.
· They shall be parked in secure areas to deter access by unauthorized personnel.
· They do not block access to fire aisles, stairways, or fire equipment.
· While refueling, the engine shall be stopped and the Operator shall not be on the truck.
· Lifting personnel with a powered industrial truck is not allowed, and alternative methods have to be used (e.g. mobile aerial platform).
6.3 Rough Terrain Operations for FLTs
The operation of rough terrain FLTs involves special hazards, which require additional care and consideration:
· Care shall be taken at all times to ensure that traction is retained. Loss of traction due to the nature of the terrain or weight transfer taking load off the driving wheels is to be avoided.
· Care shall be taken and speeds minimized to reduce the risk of load toppling caused by the imbalance induced when operating on rough terrain.
· Operators shall ensure that the parking brake is capable of holding the FLT stationary on an incline (some rough terrain vehicles are capable of climbing inclines steeper than those on which the parking brake will hold the vehicle).
· Checks for overhead obstructions shall be made before lifting and transporting loads.
· Special care shall be taken near power lines and other materials handling vehicles such as mobile cranes.
· Driving rough terrain FLTs on public roads shall be kept to a minimum. When public road travel is necessary, fork arms shall be removed, folded or protected in some way so that they do not present a hazard to other road users. Where this is not possible, forks shall be painted or otherwise made highly visible.
· Rough terrain FLT Operators shall wear seat belts while operating their vehicles.
6.3 Repairs
If repairs or part replacement is required then the following guidelines shall be followed:
· Immediately take the truck out of service if an unsafe condition is identified or restrict its operation
to eliminate the unsafe condition.
Repair or replace all critical components promptly by or under supervision of a qualified mechanic.
· An original equipment manufacturer or other approved vendor should supply spare parts or components.
7. Mobile Aerial Platforms
7.1 Daily / Pre-Use Inspections
These inspections shall be performed and documented by the qualified operator prior to first use, each day or shift the equipment is used.
7.2 Operations
Personnel lifting devices and mobile aerial platforms shall be operated according to applicable National requirements, and manufacturers’ instructions.
· Before use, the Operator shall:
· Have read and understood the manufacturer’s operating instructions and safety rules Personnel and have read and understood all decals and warnings on the device.
· Inspect the personnel lifting device or mobile aerial platforms per the daily/Pre-Use Inspection requirements.
· Perform a pre-operational check to demonstrate operational readiness. If controls do not operate properly, the Operator is responsible for notifying the supervisor. Repairs and adjustments shall be made before operations begin. The Operator shall adhere to all tags placed on the controls.
· Ensure that the personnel lifting device is within inspection and testing intervals by examination of the periodic re-certification tags and documentation.
· Test the agreed communication system. Operation shall stop immediately upon communication loss and should not continue until communication is restored.
· Before operating the machine, make sure all safety gates are closed and fastened in their proper position.
· Workers shall:
· Keep all parts of the body, tools, and equipment inside the work platform periphery during raising, lowering, and travelling operations.
· Hold onto a moving platform using both hands.
· Secure tools and other objects in canvas bags or by other methods so that both hands are free and do not present a snagging hazard. Alternate methods of tool delivery beside personnel lifting devices should be investigated.
· Wear fall protection with a lanyard attached to an authorized lanyard anchorage point.
· Detailed technical operating procedures describing personnel lifting device operation, emergency steps, communication requirements, and special requirements should be prepared.
· Personnel lifting device or mobile aerial platforms shall not be loaded beyond its rated load (capacity) except for required testing.
· Consideration shall be given to prevailing environmental conditions (e.g. wind max. 12.5 m/s or as indicated by manufacturer), as well as aspects of the device (e.g. sail area) before commencing operations.
· The following additional requirements shall be followed for mobile aerial platform operations:
· Check all limit switches and outrigger drift switches, if applicable.
· Survey the area for applicable hazards such as:
· Overhead obstructions and high-voltage conductors;
· Debris, bumps and loose obstructions, drop-offs, holes, ditches, open earth fills, obstructed path of travel, unstable footing, and other possible hazardous conditions.
· Electrocution Hazards
· For work on or near electrical distribution and transmission lines, mobile aerial platforms shall be operated in accordance with the applicable national and or local standard.
· Maintain safe distance from electrical lines, apparatus, or any energized (exposed or insulated) parts according to the Minimum Safe Approach Distance in accordance with the applicable national standard.
· Stow boom and shut off all power before leaving machine.
· When two or more persons are in the platform, the Operator shall be responsible for all machine operations.
· Do not place boom or platform against any structure to steady the platform or to support the structure.
· Keep both feet firmly positioned on the platform floor at all times. Never use ladders, boxes, steps, planks, or similar items on platform to provide additional reach.
· Never use the boom assembly to enter or leave the platform.
· Tipping Hazards:
· Before driving on floors, bridges, trucks, and other surfaces, check allowable capacity of the surfaces.
· Never exceed the maximum platform capacity. Distribute loads evenly on platform floor.
· Do not raise the platform or drive from an elevated position unless the machine is on firm, level surfaces and evenly supported.
· Do not push or pull any object with the boom.
· Never attempt to use the machine as a crane. Do not tie-off machine to any adjacent structure.
· Do not operate the machine when wind conditions exceed 12.5 m/s or as prescribed by manufacturer, local legislation and or procedures.
· Do not increase the surface area of the platform or the load. Increase of the area exposed to the wind will decrease stability.
· Do not increase the platform size with unauthorized deck extensions or attachments.
· If boom assembly or platform is in a position that one or more wheels are off the ground, all persons shall be removed before attempting to stabilize the machine. Use cranes, forklift trucks, or other appropriate equipment to stabilize machine and remove personnel.
· Crushing and Collision Hazards
· All operating and ground personnel shall wear approved headgear.
· Check work area for clearances overhead, on sides, and bottom of platform when lifting or lowering platform, and driving.
· During operation, keep all body parts inside platform railing.
· Use the boom functions, not the drive function, to position the platform close to obstacles.
· Always post a lookout when driving in areas where vision is obstructed.
· Limit travel speed according to conditions of ground surface, congestion, visibility, slope, location of personnel, and other factors, which may cause collision or injury to personnel.
· Be aware of stopping distances in all drive speeds. When driving in high speed, switch to low speed before stopping.
· Travel grades in low speed only.
· Do not use high-speed drive in restricted or close quarters or when driving in reverse.
· Exercise extreme caution at all times to prevent obstacles from striking or interfering with operating controls and persons in the platform.
· Be sure that operators of other overhead and floor level machines are aware of the aerial work platform’s presence.
· Disconnect power to overhead cranes.
· Warn personnel not to work, stand, or walk under a raised boom or platform.
· Position barricades on floor if necessary.
· Never allow personnel in platform while towing, lifting, or hauling, unless so designed that the operator has to be on the platform to drive it.
9/9
Operational Instruction GRE_XXX_QSE_OI_YYY_Vers.Z
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global
Staff Function: -
Service Function: -
Business Line: Renewable Energies
Version no.1 dated dd/mm/2017
INTERNAL USE
Subject: Annex 4 Explanation of signalman signals
1/1
Operational Instruction GRE_XXX_QSE_OI_YYY_Vers.Z
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global
Staff Function: -
Service Function: -
Business Line: Renewable Energies
Version no.1 dated dd/mm/2017
INTERNAL USE
Subject:
![]()
Annex 5 – 10 questions for a safe lifting
Annex 5 – 10 questions for a safe lifting
1) Are they all aware of their role and the steps of the lifting process?
2) Did they participate to the pre job check meeting?
3) Did you performed a visual inspection of all lifting equipment and did you receive all operators’ certificates and machinery licenses?
4) Are there available and operative safeguards equipment?
5) Do you know the weight of the equipment to be lifted?
6) Are there any wind limits to be taken under consideration?
7) Do you have clear communication set up throughout the work?
8) Do you have a designated area free of obstacles?
9) Do you have the necessary PPE available?
10) Do you have a risk assessment available?
1/1
Annex 5 GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_YYY
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global
Staff Function: -
Service Function: -
Business Line: Renewable Energies
Version no.1 dated dd/mm/2017
INTERNAL USE
Subject:
![]()
Checklist lifting control
Controls on lifting operations are divided into:
1) Routine Lifts
· Control Requirements:
|
Documentation Control |
Competent Personnel |
|
· Risk Assessment (generic) · Lifting Plan (generic) · Proper maintenance, check, inspection, compliance and certification of all lifting · Job Hazard Analysis · Authorization of use · Toolbox Talk · 10 questions for a safe lifting (Annex 5) |
Crane Operator Banksman and / or Slinger/ Rigger
|
2) Non-Routine Lifts
Non-routine lifting operations can be further sub-divided on:
· Simple lifting operations cranes using Loose Lifting Equipment.
· Complicated lifting operations (i.e. tandem lifting).
· Complex / Critical / Heavy lifting operations requiring a Lift Plan with engineering input.
· Unfavorable weather conditions.
· The weight of the load is greater than 80% of the lifting capacity of the equipment.
· Use of a lifting machine after a long idle time.
On these cases, is not enough a generic risk assessment and/or an operational instruction. For this type of lifting operations is need:
· Specific Risk Assessment.
· Lifting Plan.
· Control Requirements:
|
Documentation Control |
Competent Personnel |
|
· Specific Risk Assessment. · Formal work pack with method statement, Including calculations. - Lifting Plan. · Proper maintenance, check, inspection, compliance and certification of all lifting equipment and appliances. · Job Hazard Analysis. · Work Permit. · Safety checklist. · Toolbox Talk. · 10 questions for a safe lifting (Annex 5). |
Crane Operator Banksman and / or Slinger/ Rigger
|
All Lift Plans – generic, specific or engineered – are developed, reviewed and approved by persons competent to do so.
2/2
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
1/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
CONTENTS
1. PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT AND AREA OF APPLICATION .......................................................... 2
2. DOCUMENT VERSION MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 2
3. UNITS IN CHARGE OF THE DOCUMENT ............................................................................................... 2
4. REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................... 2
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONOMY ......................................... 3
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS .............................................................................................................. 3
7. WORK AT HEIGHT MANAGEMENT ......................................................................................................... 6
7.1 FALL FROM HEIGHT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................... 6
7.2 FALL FROM HEIGHT RISK ASSESSMENT ..................................................................................... 7
7.3 FALL FROM HEIGHT MITIGATION MEASURES ............................................................................. 7
7.4 FALL FROM HEIGHT WORK EXECUTION AND CONTROL ......................................................... 10
7.4.1. Fall from Height Method Statement ............................................................................................. 10
7.4.2. Job hazard analysis ...................................................................................................................... 11
7.4.3. Equipment Control ........................................................................................................................ 11
8. ANNEXES................................................................................................................................................. 12
THE HEAD OF HEALTH, SAFETY, ENVIRONMENT AND QUALITY
Maria Galainena De Carlos
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
3/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
Organizational Procedure No. 86 rev.1 dated 23/7/2012 “Renewable plants start-up”;
Organizational Procedure No. 90 dated 4/8/2011 “Wind Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 91 dated 4/8/2011 “Hydro Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 92 dated 4/8/2011 “Geothermal Power Plants Maintenance”;
Organizational Procedure No. 95 dated 28/10/2011 “Hydro operation process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 96 dated 28/10/2011 “Wind Operation Process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 97 dated 28/10/2011 “Solar operation process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 98 dated 14/11/2011 “Geothermal Power Plants Operation”;
Organizational Procedure No. 100 dated 2/4/2012 “Biomass Operation Process”;
Organizational Procedure No. 101 dated 2/4/2012 “Biomass Power Plants Maintenance”;
Operating Instruction No. 9 dated 21/12/2012 “Health & Safety Standard”.
List of documents issued by external organizations (laws, guidelines, regulations):
ISO 9001: Quality Management Systems – Requirements
ISO 14001: Environmental Management Systems– Requirements with guidance for use
OHSAS 18001 Occupational health and safety management systems – Requirements
5. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS POSITION IN THE PROCESS TAXONOMY
Level 1 Process: Health and Safety
6. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
Acronym and Key words Description
GRE Global Renewable Energies Business Line
QSE Health, Safety, Quality and Environment Unit within GRE
Work At Height
All work activities that create a difference of height (Δh) in which there
is a need to control a risk of falling some distance liable to cause severe
personal injury. This regardless of the work equipment being used, the
duration of the work at height involved or the height at which the work
is performed.
It would not include:
Slips, trips and falls on the same level
Falls on permanent stairs if there is no structural or
maintenance work being done;
Work in the upper floor of a multistory building where there is
no risk of falling (except separate activities like using a
stepladder).
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
4/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
Δh Difference of height that exists between two planes.
Equipment Any assembly of items intended to be used by workers with the aim of
executing a specific work activity.
GRE Global Renewable Energies Business Line.
Scaffolding
Temporary work structure comprising pipes and joints or pre-fabricated frames or prefabricated uprights and crosspieces, decks with wooden or metal planks and other accessories (plates, pins, etc.), to allow the performance of construction and maintenance for working at various heights.
Temporary railings:
Temporary protection devices against falling from height comprising uprights, main, intermediate and lower rails (toe board H > = 15 cm.)
Safety Net
Nets supported by a cable on the border, other support devices or combination of these, designed to stop people falling from height.
Safe Line
Lifeline is a component of a fall arrest system which consists of a flexible or rigid and vertical or horizontal line attached to an anchorage point and used for connection of fall protection systems.
- A vertical lifeline is connected to an anchorage point located above the walking and working surfaces allowing it to hang vertically.
- A horizontal lifeline is connected at both ends to anchorage points and is stretched horizontally between the anchorage points and is used for attachment of a lanyard or lifeline device while moving horizontally.
Guardrail
Guardrail system means a barrier erected along an unprotected or
exposed side, edge, or other area of a walking working surface to
prevent employees from falling to a lower level. Minimum height of
guardrail shall be 90 cm and should include a toe board, a low
protective barrier designed to prevent materials, tools and equipment
falling to a lower level and thus protecting employees from these
object’s falls.
Fall Arrest System
It is a full body harness, lanyard, retractable lifeline, horizontal lifeline or vertical lifeline that is approved by a qualified person and when connected to an anchorage point, is used to keep in control a person's free fall under control after the fall has started. All components of a fall arrest system are designed and tested to function together to arrest a fall or to minimize the chance of potential for compounding injuries.
Temporary Safety and Service
Structures
All those temporary structures and works regardless of the structure
under construction implemented to ensure the safety of workers without
being a part of the finished project. (boards to close/cover chambers;
decking to protect workplaces/passages, ramps, gangways,).
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
5/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
Mobile Scaffolding
Modular platforms supported by one or more columns (vertical uprights)
performing up-down movements using a self-braking electrical motor
and pinion-rack gear coupling mechanism, intended for hoisting people
and materials related to the work to be performed but excluding other
materials.
Suspended Scaffolding (motor-
driven winches and ropes)
Platforms or shuttles of any geometrical shape lifted by motor-driven
hoists and flexible organs, intended to carry people and materials
related to the work to be performed but excluding other materials.
Service lifts
Machinery used to transport people and/or materials; the load carrier has guideways and serves the defined levels using a toothed rack and pinion as the suspension system supporting the load carrier, which comprises a cabin for the people and material to be transported from one floor to another.
- The wireguided service lift is a system in which safety service lifts are guided on wires. The flexible wire guiding ensures that the service lift is steered smoothly though the openings platforms with a few centimetres between the service lift and platform. The service lift is constructed in a self-supporting structure without carrying frame.
- The Rack Pinion Lift is guided by a fixed structure, usually by a shaft ladder, and a travelling cable system. The travelling cable system consists of a cable that is connected from the service lift to a support installed above the middle of the tower height. This way, the cable travels with the service lift.
Overhead Platform with Telescopic or Vertical Extension Arm
Equipment/machine comprising a work platform, an extending structure
and a chassis. May be truck-mounted (bucket truck), self-propelled,
“spider” or a special vehicle.
Positioning and Access Systems
with People Carriers + Lifting
A personnel lifting system comprising a metal platform (basket) with lifting eyebolts and standard rail borders lifted to height using cranes (fixed or mobile).
Turntable ladder The device consists of ladders with a rotary truck-mounted support. The
ladders have two parts, one fixed and one extending (tilting and swivel).
Ladders
Work equipment with rungs or steps on which a person ascend,
descend and stand on for short periods of time, which makes it possible
to overcome differences in height and reach work positions at height;
can be transported and installed by hand, without using mechanical
means (simple support ladders with one or more sections, double
ladders with one or two ascent sections, convertible/extensible ladders,
with two uprights with snap-fit elements equipped with fall arrest device
and mounting systems for climbing on vertical supports, stacked ladders
with platform and wheels that can be moved by hand, ladders with
suspended rungs).
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
6/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
Positioning systems and access
with ropes
System comprising at least two separately anchored ropes, one for
access, descent and support (the work rope) and the other as an
auxiliary device (safety rope) fitted with a suitable support harness
Personal Protective Equipment
(PPE)
Any item intended to be worn and used by workers with the aim of protecting them against one or more risks likely to compromise their safety or health while at work, as well as any other item or accessory intended for such purposes.
Anchorage or Anchorage Point
An approved, secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or
deceleration devices. An anchorage point is sometimes referred to as
a tie off point.
Connector
Device used to connect parts of a system together. It may be an
independent component, such as a carabiner, or an integral component,
such as a buckle or D-ring sewn into a body harness or a snap hook
spliced or sewn into a lanyard.
Site Workplace, whether it be for a facility in operation or a construction site,
even a work area within a construction site.
Worker
An employee, whether it be a GRE or Contractor, whose job requires
operation involving working at heights activities, or whose job
responsibilities require the employee to work in area in which such
hazards is present.
Method Statement
Document that details the way a work task or process is to be
completed. The method statement should outline the hazards involved
and include a step by step guide on how to do the job safely, must also
detail which control measures have been introduced to ensure the
safety of anyone who is affected by the task or process.
Work Any work related activity, scheduled or unscheduled, of a GRE or
Contractor Employee.
7. WORK AT HEIGHT MANAGEMENT
7.1 FALL FROM HEIGHT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION
The identification of fall from height hazards and the subsequently evaluation is the indispensable previous
step, not only for assessing the risk but also to manage work at height activities.
In order to identify fall from height hazard is necessary to do a workplace assessment, to allow recognizing
the specific conditions of the workplace. This workplace assessment shall be executed in a periodical time
basis to avoid that workplace changes lead to present again issues concerning from height risk. The periodical
time basis should be done, at least, at the beginning of a new activity or during modifications on the structure
of the facility.
In order to execute this identification in a systematic and structured way, it is necessary to have a reference
that helps in this task of identifying risks, Annex 1 Risk Identification List of workplace is a non-exhaustive list
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
7/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
of verification points in order to identify the hazard of falling at different level. Subsequently, each facility or
construction work area shall have done before to start the activity a specific Fall from Height workplace
assessment taking into account local legal requirements.
In accordance to the statement, every site must carry out a fall form height hazards identification and updated
when conditions change.
7.2 FALL FROM HEIGHT RISK ASSESSMENT
If the fall from height hazard identification finds out one or more fall from height hazards those must be
evaluated. Subsequently, a risk assessment of working at height should first consider whether the work could
be avoided. If this is not possible, the risk assessment should consider the following issues:
• Duration of the work.
• Nature of fall hazard in work areas.
• Correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the fall arrest
systems to be used.
• The competence level of all those involved with the work and any additional training
requirements.
• The required level of supervision.
• Use and operation of guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, safety nets systems,
warning line systems, designated access zones, and other fall prevention techniques to be
used.
• Required personal protective equipment (PPE), such as helmets and harnesses.
• Correct procedures for the handling and storage of equipment and materials and the erection of
overhead protection.
• The health status of the workers.
• The possible weather conditions.
• Compliance with the relevant legislation, in particular the work at height regulations and
Management of Health and Safety at work regulations.
7.3 FALL FROM HEIGHT MITIGATION MEASURES
In order to identify the best control measures GRE Country must apply a three-stage hierarchy. The three steps are:
1. Avoidance of work at height (removes the cause of fall from height risk completely; controls risk by replacing it with a less risky way to achieve the same outcome).
2. Isolation of workers from falling (separates the hazard from the people at risk by isolating, i.e. physical barriers).
3. Mitigation of the effect on workers of falls should they occur (i.e. PPE).
When fall from height hazard cannot be eliminated or substituted, the following requirements have to be assured:
A) Medical Fitness
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
8/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
Worker, through the area of occupational medicine, will carry out the evaluation of psychological and physical aptitude according to the Working at Height Protocol. The protocol (medical test and periodicity) will be defined according to the local laws and according to indications of the occupational doctor. Therefore, each country must define his own medical protocol for working at height activities. Beyond the protocol, before to start the activities whether:
The the worker has any health problem or injury that bind him/her to work in normal and safe conditions, or
He/She is taking medication that causes some sleepiness and a lack of concentration, or
He/she considers himself/herself not able to do the activity. The worker shall communicate it to his/her supervisor and to his/her HSEQ referent in order to define how to proceed.
B) Training
Workers exposed to fall from height risk must attend a Work at Heigh training, in particular as regards:
Using access and positioning systems with ropes;
The use of Fall arrest System and Fall from Height PPE;
assembly/disassembly and conversion of scaffolding;
Using mobile access towers;
The use of overhead platforms, ladders, mobile bridges, lifts and other system not having a dedicated operator;
The contents of the Safety plan for the activities in question, with particular reference to the specific risks involved and company prevention and protection dispositions.
For all the above points shall be considered the local legislation in order to define the periodicity of the training. In case there is no a local requirement about training periodicity, GRE standard will be one initial training and a refresh training every three years.
C) Collective Protective Equipment
The use of the Collective Protective Equipment has to be adopted as first priority option. Examples of CPE: platforms, scaffolds, walkways, edge of a floor, as well as the unevenness, gaps and openings existing on the floors. These collective protective equipment are mainly handrails, guardrail, parapets and others equivalent collective protection system (e.g. Safety Net, Safe line,).
D) Personal protective equipment
Where/When possible, priority should be given to the adoption of collective protection measures over individual ones when the latter are not sufficient to eliminate or sufficiently to reduce the risk. Then when is not possible to select Collective Protective Equipment in order to eliminate the risk, its mandatory the use of Personal Protective Equipment: Harness + Fall Arrest Systems intended to avoid a fall from height event. For example:
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
9/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
Fall arrest system incorporating a lanyard and energy absorber
A. Anchor point.
B. Full body harness.
C. Lanyard.
D. Energy absorber.
Fall arrest system incorporating a lanyard and energy absorber on a horizontal line
A. Mobile anchor point located on the flexible
horizontal anchor lines.
B. Full body harness.
C. Lanyard.
D. Energy absorber.
Fall arrest system incorporating a retractable type fall arrester
A. An anchor point;
B. a full body harness;
C. a retractable lanyard – element of retractable
type fall arrester;
D. a retractable type fall arrester;
Fall arrest system incorporating a guided type fall arrester including a flexible anchor line
A. An anchor point;
B. Full body harness;
C. Lanyard;
D. Guided type fall arrester;
E. Flexible anchor line;
Fall arrest system incorporating a guided type fall arrester including a rigid anchor line
A. Rigid anchor line;
B. Full body harness;
C. Lanyard;
D. Guided type fall arrester;
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
10/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
Body belts shall not be used for protection against fall hazards. Body belts can be used for work positioning or for restraining from an exposed edge but a full body harness and fall arrest system shall be used where a fall potential exists Within Annex 2 Fall Arrest System Baseline Requirements have been defined the minimum requirements for elements of a Fall Arrest System.
Based on the risk assessment, furthermore, should be also used following PPE: Safety Helmet, Safety Glasses, Gloves, work clothes, Safety boots, etc.
E) Signalization
Signaling is a necessary complementary measure. In the case of areas with different risk of falling
the affected area must be clearly signalized and marked.
This marking and / or signaling will allow identifying hazard and consequently to act accordingly to
the preventive measures defined to that area and/or work to be carried out.
For an effective marking and/or signaling for fall from height hazard, it must:
• Attract attention of the receiver and cause an immediate response.
• Make hazard known clearly, with a unique interpretation.
• Inform about the risk and preventive measures in the specific case.
• Clear information about permit to work or authorization requirement for entrance.
Hence, within GRE sites with fall from height hazards and risk shall be mandatory the signaling and
marking the falling hazard areas. Marking and signaling method shall be done accordingly to the
annex 3: Signalization and marking of fall from height hazard.
F) Safety Induction
All workers before to start the activity must be informed about fall from hazards fall from risk evaluation and measures to be taken during the job in order to prevent any fall from height incident. Any change on the working area (fall from height hazard identification update) during the work activity must be communicated immediately to all workers affected. Safety Induction must be recorded and archived until the final competition of the works.
7.4 FALL FROM HEIGHT WORK EXECUTION AND CONTROL
7.4.1. Fall from Height Method Statement
A method statement must be elaborated and approved before to start any activity involving Fall from height risk. This method statement must be specific and shall take into account:
Specific Fall from Height Hazard of the site;
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
11/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
Specific Fall From Height Hazard of the activity;
Work method: o Sequence of the activities, o Roles & responsibilities, o Equipment, machinery, o Permit to work or authorization, o Fall from height control measures.
Emergency measures;
Personal Protective equipment;
Collective Protective Equipment;
Working Interferences. After Method Statement approval, it must be communicated before the works start, during safety induction and be available for consultation. Safety Induction must be recorded and archived until the competition of the works. Within Annex 4: Fall From Height Method Statement Guidelines have been defined minimum list requirements to take into account on the elaboration of method statements.
7.4.2. Job hazard analysis
At least for non-routing work at height activities, work Responsible must carry out a Job Hazard Analysis before starting the works. The steps for carrying out Job Hazard Analysis shall be:
- Collection of information about work at height activities. - Analysis of prevention measures that can be implemented to control the fall from
height risk.
- Identify actions to avoid fall (risk elimination). In case of no possibility of fall from height risk elimination, define preventive measures to mitigate the fall from height risk.
- Make the schedule of activities to implement each actions/preventive measures before to start the activities.
- Elaborated within the area where activity has to be carried out.
Work Responsible must, together with all people involved, carry out a Job Hazard Analysis and be part of the safety induction. Annex 5 Job Hazard Analysis form is an example for JHA activity.
7.4.3. Equipment Control
Equipment, including both personal and collective protective equipment, shall be inspected by the user before each use. A competent person for inspections other than by user shall inspect the equipment according to the legal and/or manufacture requirements, or even after a fall. So equipment must be re-certified for use, or removed from services as determined by the inspection. When inspections reveal defects the equipment shall be removed from service and tagged “Do Not Use” with the name of the inspector and date of the inspection. Fault Equipment must be handling according to the manufacturer instructions and guarantee for not use. Examples of items requiring removal from service:
Operating Instruction No. 791
Version no.1 dated 24/07/2017
Subject: Work at Height Safety Rules
This document contains proprietary information of Enel Green Power SpA and
must be used exclusively by the recipient for the purposes for which it was
received. All forms of of reproduction and dissemination are prohibited without
the previous written consent of Enel Green Power S.p.A.
12/12
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global Staff Function: - Service Function: - Business Line: Renewable Energies
INTERNAL USE
GRE_ALL_QSE_OI_791_Vers.1
- Absence or illegible markings of the rating, or other required markings; - Missing elements affecting the equipment’s form, fit or function;
- Defects or damage such as cracks, sharp edges, deformation, corrosion, chemical attack, excessive heating, excessive wear, or alteration;
- Defects or damage to slings, straps or ropes such as fraying, un-splicing, un- laying, kinking, knotting, damaged stitches, excessive elongation, chemical attack, excessive soiling, abrasion, alteration, inadequate or excessive lubrication, or excessive wear
- Fall Indicator.
Equipment shall be stored in properly in order to prevent damage from environmental factors such as heat, light, excessive moisture, oils, chemicals, vapors or other damaging elements.
8. ANNEXES
Annex 1: Fall from height identification check list.
Annex 2: Fall Arrest System Baseline Requirements
Annex 3: Guideline for Signaling and marking of fall from height hazard.
Annex 4: Fall From Height Method Statement Guidelines.
Annex 5: Job Hazard Analysis Form.
All the above listed annexes are available at the following link.
|
DEFICIENCIES AND FACTORS OF SAFETY RISK |
||
|
Work places |
||
|
Structural safety |
· Inadequate building or workplace for the type of use. |
|
|
|
· Lack of a system of reinforcement or support that ensures stability. |
|
|
|
· No load limit signaling. |
|
|
|
· Circulation of persons on roofs, covers (fiber cement) or non-stable platforms. |
|
|
|
· …. |
|
|
Work places |
· Type of unstable or sliding soil |
|
|
|
· Work areas not delimited, not signalized and with insufficient visibility. |
|
|
|
· Openings directly accessible, on the walls or on the ground, more than 2 m above the lower level. |
|
|
|
· Open sides of stairs and ramps to more than 60 cm in height without protection. |
|
|
|
· …… |
|
|
Ladders |
· Hand ladders without sufficient resistance or with unsafe or non-existent support and clamping elements. |
|
|
|
· Scissor ladders without secure attachment elements against full opening. |
|
|
|
· Use of stairs poorly or unsafe (unstable ground, excessive inclination, more than one worker, while transporting or manipulating objects, etc.). |
|
|
|
· Painted wooden ladders. |
|
|
|
· ……. |
|
|
Shaft Ladders |
· Width of less than 40 cm or distance between steps greater than 30 cm. |
|
|
|
· Stairs of more than 4 m of height without extension of the rails above 1 m of the access zone. |
|
|
|
· Absence of resting platforms on fixed ladders with heights greater than 9 m. |
|
|
|
· No safe lines installed |
|
|
|
· …… |
|
|
Signaling |
· Lack of warning, prohibition, obligation regarding work at heights |
|
|
|
· Concurrence of signals that affect the perception or comprehension of the message. |
|
|
|
· Poor maintenance and cleaning of signaling devices or means. |
|
|
|
· Existence of non-standard safety signals. |
|
|
|
· ……. |
|
|
Equipment & Tool |
|
|
|
Machinery, equipment and Facilities |
· Lack of preventive maintenance in accordance with documented procedures. |
|
|
|
· Periodical checks and/or obligatory revisions by regulations not done. |
|
|
|
· No instruction manual from the manufacturer of the work equipment or, if it exists, not comprehensible to the user. |
|
|
|
· Fixed safeguard not resistant to the mechanical stresses that must be supported. |
|
|
|
· Safeguards and protective devices can be easily canceled, out of order or non-existent. |
|
|
|
· Use of work equipment contrary to the intended use by the manufacturer. |
|
|
|
· Non-existence or non-use of personal protective equipment (PPE) necessary for the work performed. |
|
|
|
· Work equipment that does not have CE marking or similar. |
|
|
|
· ….. |
|
|
WORKING EQUIPMENT OF TEMPORARY USE IN HEIGHT |
|
|
|
Scaffolding |
· Poor construction or maintenance. |
|
|
|
· Work platforms not constructed with rigid elements (tied planks or metal trays), not having a minimum width of 60 cm and not protected by railings of sufficient strength and a height of 90 cm, a rigid intermediate bar and a skirting board for heights greater than 2 m. |
|
|
|
· Assembly and disassembly operations are not performed safely (Full Body Harness, lanyards, lower trays, etc.). |
· |
|
|
· Failure to carry out inspections by a competent person before putting the equipment into service, or periodically, or after modifications or any circumstances that have affected the stability of the equipment. |
· |
|
|
· …. |
· |
|
Tubular scaffolding |
· Lack of retention mechanisms that prevent scaffold displacement. |
· |
|
|
· Lack of communication ladders between platforms for heights over 5 m. |
· |
|
|
· Lack of sufficient anchorage points on the facade to ensure scaffold stability. |
· |
|
|
· ….. |
· |
|
Mobile Hanging Scaffolding |
· Length greater than 8 m. |
· |
|
|
· Lack of rigid rails of 70 cm in height next to the wall, and lack, on the other three sides, of rails of 90 cm in height and an intermediate bar, all of rigid type. |
· |
|
|
· Distance between the facing and scaffolding greater than 45 cm. |
· |
|
|
· …. |
· |
Operational Instruction GRE_XXX_QSE_OI_YYY_Vers.Z
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global
Staff Function: -
Service Function: -
Business Line: Renewable Energies
Version no.1 dated dd/mm/2017
INTERNAL USE
Subject:
![]()
Fall Arrest system baseline requirements
Anchorage Points:
· Permanent and temporary fall arrest anchorage points shall be designed by a qualified person.
· Anchorage points for fall arrest systems must be approved or fit an approved engineered model. Locations shall comply with local regulations for design requirements and load bearing capability of anchorage points.
· If there are no local regulations, comply with the following criteria: EN 795.
Lifelines:
· A qualified person shall approve lifelines, associated systems and stanchions used for securing a lifeline.
· Lifelines shall comply with local regulations on when to use, how to use, fabrication and load bearing capacity.
· If there are no local regulations, comply with the following: EN 353-1 & EN 353-2. If local regulations have design factors and load bearing capabilities less than those listed, the location shall review the lifeline design with a qualified person or company to ensure adequate safety.
Full Body Harness:
· Full body harnesses, shall comply the local regulations on when to use, how to use, fabrication and load bearing capacity.
· Full body harnesses shall be selected to resist deterioration from the presence of hazards in the workplace, such as sun, welding arcs, electric arcs or dilute chlorides containing acids.
· Holes shall not be punched into the webbing of a full body harness to increase the size of the harness.
Lanyard:
· Lanyards shall comply with local regulations on when to use, how to use, fabrication and load bearing capacity.
· Lanyards shall be selected to resist deterioration from the presence of hazards in the workplace, such as sun, welding arcs, electric arcs or dilute chlorides containing acids.
· Shock absorbing lanyards shall be used in fall arrest systems. Lanyards without shock absorbers shall be used for work positioning only or when the absorber is installed on the safe line.
· Shock absorbing lanyards used to connect a full body harness to a lifeline or anchorage point shall be carefully selected to provide adequate clearance distance when fully extended. It is recommended to use a maximum of a 1.2 (4 foot) shock absorbing lanyard in a fall arrest system.
· Lanyards used in a fall arrest system shall limit the potential free fall to as short a distance as possible. Free fall distances shall not exceed 1.8 meters (6 feet) in any case.
· Shock absorbing lanyards shall be replaced after being shock loaded and stressed. Shock absorbing lanyards that indicate shock loading has occurred are the best choice with steel lifelines.
· Positioning of shock absorbing lanyards shall be carefully evaluated for all obstructions which could injure personnel during a free fall, including the proximity of beams, rotating equipment, welding operations, live electrical conductors and equipment.
1/1
Operational Instruction GRE_XXX_QSE_OI_YYY_Vers.Z
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global
Staff Function: -
Service Function: -
Business Line: Renewable Energies
Version no.1 dated dd/mm/2017
INTERNAL USE
Subject:
![]()
Guideline for Signaling and marking of fall from height hazard
The positioning of the signals will be made to be present and clearly visible close risk area, always at the entrance to the work area, and taking into account the interferences and the evolution of the works
Signaling/marking Elements:
· Safety line
Safety Line is a physical demarcation line which identifies the place from which it is necessary to adopt certain behaviors and respect precise rules/instructions as it delimits an area where the operational activities involving a risk activity.
Characteristics:
a. Horizontal Signage;
b. Material difficult to remove, paint or vinyl adhesive. Resistant to weather conditions;
c. Orange background, Black Characters;
d. Safety indications: Hazard information, safety instructions (i.e. PTW, PPE).
Safety Line example
· Risk Assessment Information Point:
Risk Assessment Information Point is an Information board regarding the relevant information about the risk assessment being emphasized of specific plant or area .
Characteristics:
a. Vertical Signage;
b. Material difficult to remove, paint or vinyl adhesive. Resistant to weather conditions;
c. Blue and Green background, Orange and White Characters;
d. Safety indications: Specific Hazard of Area, Preventive measures to be applied (Instructions, Collective and Personal Protective equipment);
e. Authorizations need (i.e. Permit To Work);
f. Emergency procedures.
Example of Safety Sign Implementation
NOTE:
Warning signs of falling from height Hazard does not replace signs defined by local legislation, and must integrates other hazard warnings present in the area.
2/2
Annex 4 GRE_ALL_QSE_PL_YYY
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global
Staff Function: -
Service Function: -
Business Line: Renewable Energies
Version no.1 dated dd/mm/2017
INTERNAL USE
Subject:
![]()
Fall From Height Method Statement Guidelines
SCAFFOLD:
The use of fixed scaffolding is to be preferred in the case of frequent access to the workplace, access to workstations over extended and multi-level areas, medium to high difference in level, medium/high task duration, predictable and significant simultaneous presence of personnel, need to store large and distributed quantities of materials.
It is frequently used to install scaffolds with continuous decks underneath workstations at height to protect against falls from height even in combination with safety net systems.
It offers particular versatility in setting up workplaces for scaffolds with pipes and joints and fast installation with prefabricated systems.
Minimum Requirements:
· It’s compulsory personnel be trained on scaffolds assembly, use, transformation and dismantling
· Specific design for non-standard systems or heights over 20 m should be provided.
· Anchorages and support points on surfaces having suitable characteristics should be provided.
· It is recommended only to install scaffolding having service levels with a load capacity of >= 300 kg/m2.
· Inspections and maintenance work must be performed at least fortnightly.
· For scaffolding at height with supports on grating levels, a load distribution system must be installed.
· Anchorage and connection to fixed railings or temporary structures on site is forbidden.
· It is forbidden to use scaffolding to anchor systems for lifting/handling loads (tirfor, ropes, chains and so on).
· It is necessary to fit a containment/protection netting or setting up boards if the scaffolding (during installation and use) are adjacent to facing transit or work areas.
· Dedicated levels of various dimensions should be installed to transfer (loading/unloading) materials using mechanical lifting systems and emergency management (using a dedicated people basket) in the absence of easily accessible landing points at height.
· It’s mandatory to use a System of Tag out in order to monitor the scaffolding status. For example:
· Blue = Controlled and ready for use,
· White with multiple green line = Useable, to be put under control next shift,
· White with unique orange line= in maintenance or being controlled,
· White with double red line= dismantling phase or close to be dismantled.
BORDER PROTECTION (temporary or fixed fall arrest system, safety nets and combined systems)
Border protection or fall arrest systems should be adopted when the worker need to access to unprotected structures at height (roof, top of nacelle, excavations); where:
· fixed, stable protection against falling from a height are not planned,
· have not been implemented or
· have been removed or
· in certain assembly work phase where there are unevenness, gaps or holes unprotected.
Temporary railings and fixed fall arrest system shall be used as collective protective equipment preventing fall from height.
Safety nets shall be used as collective protection equipment to stop falls and to prevent and/or reduce the effects of a worker falling from height.
Combined systems involve integrated temporary railings and safety nets should be used in situations where individual protective equipment cannot eliminate or reduce the risk to an acceptable level.
Requirements:
· Personnel shall not sit upon, stand on or bend from a vertical position over guardrails.
· Verify in advance the structural characteristics of the site or structure to be protected that, among other things, must support the loads transmitted to it through the anchorage by the border protection system.
· Collective border protection systems must have appropriate dimensional requirements and strength features in relation to the characteristics of the work surface, the actions involved in the event of support, falling, slipping, rolling or impact, the constructional features of the anchorage structure and wind action.
· Priority should be given to the implementation of temporary protection works even in pre-assembly stages of components that will subsequently support workers at height in order to complete the assembly.
· All free sides of scaffoldings, beams, decks, gangways and places or work or raised passageways must be protected with temporary railings with toe board.
· Assembly/disassembly must be performed, taking into account the conditions of intended use and the manufacturer's instructions, by qualified personnel using restraint systems and fall arrest system and PPE.
· A person must be identified, within the organization of the temporary site, as responsible for verification/maintenance of protection systems able to ensure correct conservation and efficiency over time.
· The Safety Plan must define an emergency procedure envisaging intervention by qualified personnel in accordance with the event in question (falling from height, impact against the protection system, suspension from the PPE system to stop falls) assisted by the first aid unit, if any, and/or public assistance in case of need.
· Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced as to prevent injury to personnel from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing. The ends of all top rails and middle rails shall not overhang the terminal posts, except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard.
· All covers shall support at least twice the weight of personnel, equipment, and materials that may be imposed on a cover at one time. Covers located in roadways and vehicle aisles shall support at least twice the maximum axle load of the largest vehicle permitted to cross the cover.
· All covers shall be secured to prevent accidental displacement by personnel, the public, equipment, wind or weather. Temporary covers shall be clearly marked with "Danger-Hole" or "Danger-Roof Opening Cover-Do Not Remove or Displace" or similar warning. When covers are removed, appropriate fall protection systems shall be implemented.
· Be manufactured and tested in accordance with local regulations. Each net shall bear a label indicating the manufacturer's name, date of manufacture, and test data.
· Have maximum mesh opening size of 15 centimeters by 15 centimeters (of 6 inches by 6 inches).
· Safety Net has to be installed in accordance with local regulations and manufacturer's recommendations and be as close to the work as possible, but not lower than 7.6 meters (7.6 meters).
SAFETY AND SERVICE TEMPORARY STRUCTURES (boards to close/cover chambers; decking to protect workplaces/passages, ramps, gangways,)
Temporary structures (boards closing/covering chambers; scaffolding protecting places of work/passages) are normally used where there are no permanent protections against falling from height on compartments and hatches and/or against falling materials, in order to prevent access to unsafe areas and/or implement protection for pedestrian passages and work areas on the ground. They may be in wood, metal or both these materials; comprising prefabricated or "ad hoc” elements.
Temporary structures (ramps, gangways) are normally implemented to overcome differences in height and/or obstacles where definitive passage structures have not yet been made, in the transition of certain processes in otherwise inaccessible areas, near structures and service levels unsuitable for bearing the weight of people and materials.
Requirements
· Temporary structures must be set up with suitable materials in a workmanlike manner and require, unless pre-fabricated elements are used in conformity with the manufacturer's layouts, a specific design that takes into account the structural characteristics of the site and the minimum safety requirements required by applicable laws.
· Temporary structures made using scaffolding material, including service boards, ramps and walkways must only be entrusted to qualified service personnel in accordance with legal requirements.
· Temporary structures require continuous monitoring of their integrity and good functional status, together with scheduled maintenance ensuring effectiveness for the duration of the work.
· Void in the service/work levels, skylights must be protected by a normal parapet or closed with boards secure fixed to the structure having the same c characteristics as the level in question. This is also valid for v overlooking voids or near chambers more than 50 cm deep in walls.
· Protection decking must be equipped with dedicated signs specifying their use (pedestrian path, protected work space).
· Ramps must be no less than 0.60 m wide when they are intended only for use by workers and 1.20 m if they are also intended to carry materials. Their slope should be no more than 50%. Long ramps must be interrupted by landing stages for rest at appropriate intervals; ramp boards must be fitted with transverse slats at a distance no more than the step of a person carrying a load. Ramps and walkways should always have standard railings and foot stops on the side overlooking a void.
MOBILE SCAFFOLDING (electrical self-erecting on rack gear)
The use of mobile scaffolding is to be preferred in the case of medium access to the workplace, access to workstations over extended and multi-level areas, medium to high difference in level, medium/high task duration, predictable and significant simultaneous presence of personnel (several mobile units installed), need to transfer certain amounts of material to height.
Particularly suitable for reaching significant heights without proportionately increasing the cost of assembly and allowing users to perform fast and accurate work in ergonomically comfortable and height-adjustable positions.
Fast installation and removal compared to traditional scaffolding and modularity and integration with site hoists for people and materials.
Requirements:
· It’s compulsory personnel are trained on scaffolds assembly, use, transformation and dismantling.
· Transfer of personnel to height may be performed only with lifts and dedicated modular walkways.
· It’s forbidden change the basic structure.
· It’s necessary involve specialist contractors for assembling/testing/maintenance.
· Anchorages and support points on surfaces having suitable characteristics must be made.
· It is compulsory to delimit in a stable manner (metal fences in sites) the area below the scaffolds exposed to the risk of drop objects and prevent access to third parties.
· Access by personnel to the work space will be permitted by setting up a protected pedestrian path.
· The area below the scaffolding must be regularly cleaned at the end of the working day in order to avoid the accumulation of debris/waste and kept free of materials and equipment.
· Constantly check the uniform distribution of loads.
· Suspend activities in the event of strong wind or particularly adverse weather conditions.
· Communication between the supervisor and workstations at height must be ensured by a dedicated radio system.
· Before use, documentation must be acquired demonstrating the education and training of working personnel and scaffolding operation with particular reference to its use in an emergency.
· With the installer, plan routine scaffolding maintenance in accordance with the manufacturer's manual, not the least in relation to particular environmental conditions (harsh environments, dust and salt, etc.).
SUSPENDED SCAFFOLDING (motor-driven winches and ropes)
The use of suspended scaffolding is to be preferred in the case of medium access to the workplace, access to workstations over extended and multi-level areas, medium to high difference in level, medium task duration, predictable and limited simultaneous presence of personnel (several mobile units installed), need to transfer limited amounts of material to height.
Particularly suitable in permanent installations for cleaning and maintenance of buildings and façades and reach significant heights. Fast installation and removal compared to traditional scaffolding.
Requirements:
· It’s necessary personnel be trained on scaffolds assembly, use, transformation and dismantling.
· Transfers at height to levels/structures are forbidden, unless specific risk assessment and procedures for safe transfer are adopted.
· It’s compulsory involve specialist contractors for assembling/testing/maintenance.
· It’s compulsory to arrange a support surface at height for anchorage structures/counterweights or alternatively structures to which suspension brackets can be anchored.
· It is compulsory to delimit in a stable manner (metal fences in sites) the area below the scaffolds exposed to the risk of drop objects as expected for mobile scaffolds prevent access to third parties.
· Access by personnel to the workplace is permitted only by setting up a protected pedestrian path.
· The area below the scaffolding must be regularly cleaned at the end of the working day in order to avoid the accumulation of debris/processing residues and kept free of materials and equipment.
· Constantly check the uniform distribution of loads.
· Suspend activities in the event of strong wind or particularly adverse weather conditions.
· Communication between the foreman and workstations at height must be ensured through a dedicated radio system.
· Before use, documentation must be acquired demonstrating the education and training of working personnel and scaffolding operation with particular reference to its use in an emergency.
· With the installer, plan routine scaffolding maintenance in accordance with the manufacturer's manual, not the least in relation to particular environmental conditions (harsh environments, dust and salt, etc.).
· In order to ensure correct health emergency management, in relation to the maximum attainable height and reduced up/down speed, all personnel working on the platform must have the first aid administration skills.
· Where possible, fall arrest harnesses (mandatory when using suspended scaffolds) must be secured to a rope that is separate from the platform through an automatic arrest device.
SERVICE LIFTS (wire guided or Rack Pinion)
The wire guided service lift is a system in which safety service lifts are guided on wires. The flexible wire guiding ensures that the service lift is steered smoothly though the openings platforms with a few centimeters between the service lift and platform. The service lift is constructed in a self-supporting structure without carrying frame.
The Rack Pinion Lift is guided by a fixed structure, usually by a shaft ladder, and a travelling cable system. The travelling cable system consists of a cable that is connected from the service lift to a support installed above the middle of the tower height. This way, the cable travels with the service lift.
The service lift may be used to transport people plus their tools and equipment, and sometime material depending on the lift characteristics to work at the most convenient height on the tower.
Requirements:
· It’s compulsory involve specialist contractors for assembling/testing/maintenance.
· Anchorages points on surfaces having suitable characteristics must be provided
· Personnel must be attend specific training.
· Before starting installation or disassembly activities, it is compulsory to mark off the area at potential risk of interference and falling objects in a stable manner.
· At the end of the installation and daily thereafter it is necessary to verify the integrity of the base fence and guards along the entire route as well as the correct function of the level gates for each access point, with special reference to locking devices.
· Check the availability of documentation certifying the maintenance appointment, delivery to the user (operator) of related manuals and layouts, and education and training of all personnel involved in using the system.
· Definition, according to manufacturer instructions, frequency of use and environmental characteristics, of parameters for performing routine maintenance and testing emergency systems, recording maintenance tasks and tests in the dedicated register. This register will contain characteristic data for the machinery, information about installation, inspection, maintenance work and disassembly.
· During material loading operations, the operator shall constantly verify, in accordance with the information shown on the lift's nameplate, that the rated load and correct position and stability of material are observed as specified in the operating manual.
· When assessing operating conditions, the operator should bear in mind the manufacturer's instructions concerning weather conditions (wind speed higher than expected).
· In case of emergency evacuation, transfer from the elevator to another workplace (i.e. Shaft Ladder) will be always done with one point of anchorage in order to avoid fall form height.
OVERHEAD PLATFORM WITH TELESCOPIC OR VERTICAL EXTENSION ARM
The use of telescopic arm (basket) or pantograph platforms is preferable for access to a workplace requiring an average stay time and mobility in the performance of work activities. These platforms are useful even for frequent access to workstations over an extended and multi-store areas, where the difference in level is medium-high, carrying useful small quantities of materials and individual tools, without causing inconvenience to the operator.
The wide range of types and sizes makes them particularly versatile and reliable in use, making it possible to access difficult-to-reach areas and with weight limits, while also ensuring effective emergency management. They are a valid alternative to scaffolding/mobile towers where it is not possible to install such systems and also in relation to speed of use. Terrain characteristics and any obstacles (e. i. live lines) located in the affected area must be evaluated in the choice of the technical solution to be adopted.
Requirements:
· Platform has to be designed and manufactured for the intended use (personnel and or Material Elevation. Manufacturer has to provided certification of the equipment, instructions where clear specify the use of machine.
· It is only allowed to enter/leave the basket when it is in the rest position (lowered).
· Transfers at height to levels/structures are forbidden, unless specific risk assessment and procedures for safe transfer are adopted.
· Before starting work, the solidity and stability of the support surfaces must be carefully checked (capacity of any structures, ground capacity) as well as horizontal status.
· The positioning of stabilizing outriggers, if present, should be performed taking care to fit the load splitters supplied by the manufacturer to ensure stability.
· The operator inside the shuttle must always work while wearing the safety harness secured to supports.
· Lifting the basket may only be performed using the pushbutton control generally located inside the placed inside the basket itself.
· Make sure that there are not overhead lines in the work area or alternatively check that the shuttle cannot in any case move beyond the safety distance.
· Before starting work, mark of the perimeter of the work area in a stable manner and prevent access to third parties, while also ensuring that no other work is performed in the area affected posing an interference risk.
· Work procedures should envisage the presence of an assistant with auxiliary tasks (monitoring and control of the vehicle and the workspace, etc.).
· All operators must be educated and trained to use and implement emergency procedures in the event of a fault or accident.
· When moving the machine, the shuttle basket must be locked in the rest position; remove any tools and materials which may fall because of movements.
· Crane + Basket assembly (not certified for the intended use) is forbidden, unless due to safety reasons or major cause would be the unique solutions, in this case specific risk assessment and specific procedures for safe use must be adopted.
POSITIONING AND ACCESS SYSTEMS WITH PEOPLE CARRIERS + LIFTING SYSTEM (fixed or mobile cranes)
This access and positioning system is preferred if the difference in level is medium-high, frequency and duration of access to the workplace is low (fast work), limited quantities of materials are needed, it is not possible to implement temporary structures in relation to site configuration.
Particularly versatile thanks to their quick installation, low impact on the working environment and timely, short duration tasks, it’s very susceptible to weather conditions, especially wind speed, which must compromise the stability of the basket in any operating stage (up-down-park).
Requirements:
· Workers lifted to height must have a safe means of communication.
· Their evacuation in an emergency must be ensured. (safety evacuator should be on the basket).
· People Transport systems must be designed and manufactured for this intended purpose and documentation must be available showing construction characteristics, the data shown on the name plate and instructions for use.
· Personnel working inside the basket must always wear a fall-arrest harness preferably connected to the anchorage point of the lifting system using a retractable rope system or alternatively to the anchorage points provided on the basket.
· It is only allowed to enter/leave the basket when it is in the rest position (lowered); transfers in height to levels/structures are forbidden, unless specific procedures for safe transfer are adopted.
· Make sure that there are not overhead lines in the work area or alternatively check that the shuttle cannot in any case move beyond the safety distance. (lifting inspection/check/plan before to start the activities)
· Before starting work, mark of the perimeter of the work area in a stable manner and prevent access to non-authorized people, while also ensuring that no other work is performed in the area affected posing an interference risk.
· Work procedures should envisage the presence of an assistant (rigger) at ground with auxiliary tasks (monitoring and control of the vehicle and the workspace, etc.).
· All operators must be educated and trained to use and implement emergency procedures.
· Crane Operator shall be trained on safety and use of the equipment.
· Weather conditions should be monitored before and during the activities in order to carry out the activity in a safe way (i.e. Wind Speed Limits)
TURNTABLE LADDER
Allows fast movement and installation, without manual handling of components, providing a viable alternative to portable ladders.
Requirement:
· Requires the possibility of setting up machinery next to the workplace on flat and stable ground.
· The area of influence of the ladders must be marked off and supervised and, where necessary, adequately signposted (roadway corridor and/or pedestrian).
· Verify the safety of the installation, where necessary, by acquiring the documentation and in any case ensure the observance of the safety distance from non-insulated overhead conductors.
· Before climbing, check that the ladders are positioned correctly and allow the work area to be reached.
· Use the PPE intended for falls from height in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the safety rules in force.
· Climb the ladders looking upwards and holding the rungs/steps in alternation.
· It is forbidden to carry equipment or material by hand up the ladders.
· Tools and materials should be placed inside a container hooked on to the ladder or a tool-belt worn around the waist.
· The ladders may only be moved when there are no workers on board.
LADDERS
Use of portable ladders is only allowed if it is difficult to use other equipment ensuring higher safety standard. They should be used to reach work positions that do not have other access, low access frequency, minimal difference in height and an activity that can be carried out by a single operator.
Particularly versatile for activities on poles, wall-mounted boxes and in country thanks to easy transportation and speed of use
It is not possible to bulky and/or heavy materials to height and it is not possible to apply significant effort with tools because of the risk of tip-over/slipping.
Use is significantly affected by weather (wind, rain, etc.). Lastly, activity cannot continue for long time periods since it is difficult and tiring for the operator to remain on the rungs.
Requirements:
· They require another operator to stand at the base.
· The work area near ladders must be marked off and supervised and, where necessary, adequately signposted (corridor roadway and/or pedestrian access).
· Before climbing, make sure that the ladder is correctly positioned, that the top anchorage is safe and length of the ladder is adequate (at least one meter above the access level).
· Climb the ladders looking upwards and holding the rungs/steps in alternation.
· It is forbidden to carry equipment or material by hand up the ladders.
· Tools and materials should be placed inside a container hooked on to the ladder or a tool-belt worn around the waist.
· The ladders may only be moved when there are no workers on board. When carrying ladders on the shoulder, do not insert arms inside them, keep them slanted and move with caution to avoid accidental impacts against obstacles or people.
· It´s recommended to attach the ladder in order to avoid to fall.
· Ladder have to pass a periodical inspection:
· Steps: badly assembled, broken, cracked, or improperly replaced by bars or wires or cords subjects.
· Poor condition of fastening systems and support.
· Defect in auxiliary elements (pulleys, ropes, etc.) necessary to extend some types of Ladders.
POSITIONING AND ACCESS SYSTEMS WITH ROPES
The decisions to work with ropes is preferable in cases where it is not possible to access the workplace with other work equipment or if this equipment poses a higher risk for performing the required task.
The main critical aspect is the limited duration of the task because of conscious, prolonged and continuous suspension, in device gripping the body attached to the ropes or on a suspended seat, which may give rise to a health risk for the operator.
Thus, the case where positioning and Access systems with ropes are justified for working at height is all this points are fulfilled:
a) It is not technically possible to perform work with other equipment (crane, platform, ).
b) Use of other equipment could provoke major risk that positioning and access systems with ropes.
c) Risk Assessment indicates that the activity could be done safely and besides, the use of others safer equipment is not justified. Economical justifications are not allowed.
d) Length of the work activity is short.
i. Not more than 10 labor days and
ii. Suspension time < 4 hours.
Exception: It is a situation unsafe situation that requires urgent intervention and the time necessary to have the appropriate work equipment or to set it up is much higher than the one required for the intervention with access and positioning techniques by ropes, being the speed of intervention the determining factor for the assist, rescue or protect people (either workers or third parties).
Other requirements:
· The key element in any work system with ropes is the operator, whose education and training must be qualified and repeated as regards operational techniques, rescue operations and emergency procedures. So workers must be highly skilled and have specific education and training.
· Fixed anchorages of any kind require proper installation and if necessary calculations must be performed to verify the strength of the support structure used.
· The Safety Plan for the activity being performed must define operational typologies, techniques and operational procedures, anchorages, operator positioning, access methods, work teams, tools, PPE and emergency management procedures, which in some cases may involve requesting public emergency services.
· Stable positioning of the operator must be envisaged using the work rope and an ergonomic seat with specific accessories; operator movements must take place in a controlled manner along the work rope and it is also necessary to provide protection against falling or overturning by means of the safety rope (safe line).
· Together with or as an alternative to the recovery system, there must also be a top-down intervention rope (emergency rope) ready for use already in place, or already connected to its anchor point, if it’s necessary to help the operator close at hand or to facilitate recovery.
· The ropes must be suitably protected against the risk of cutting or abrasion caused by contact with the structure.
· Each work team performing work with ropes must comprise, as regards number of employees and their operational skills, at least two people, one as foreman in charge to ensure continuous surveillance and correct organization of emergency intervention.
· If necessary, portable radios or other suitable communication systems must be used as an essential way to ensure the safety of operations. These systems must not constitute an impediment or source of danger for the operator.
· Worker may carry materials or tools weighing less than 10 kg while in suspension. On the other hand, when the weight of the materials or tools exceeds 10 kg, a service auxiliary rope will be required.
· The tools and accessories used when working with ropes must be attached to the support harness, the seat or other suitable device, provided that they do not themselves constitute a source of danger to the operator in view of their weight and/or dimensions. These tools must be suitably retained during use so that they cannot fall; they must not cause harm to the ropes and operators.
· The area below the place of work with ropes must be suitably signposted, with a ban on transit; it must have appropriate dimensions for the type of activity and should not be used to store materials.
· Weather conditions should be evaluated in advance, and monitored during the activities execution.
21/21
Operational Instruction GRE_XXX_QSE_OI_YYY_Vers.Z
Application Areas
Perimeter: Global
Staff Function: -
Service Function: -
Business Line: Renewable Energies
Version no.1 dated dd/mm/2017
INTERNAL USE
Subject:
![]()
Job Hazard Analysis for Fall From Height
|
Job Hazard Analysis |
|||||
|
Date and Time |
|
Name of Worker Responsible |
|
||
|
Work Order or similar |
|
Description of the work to be done |
|
||
|
Nº of PTW |
|
Power Plant and work Area |
|
||
|
Hazard /Risk identification |
|||||
|
Hazard |
Map / Scheme |
||||
|
Fall From Height |
|
Through holes |
|
From portable ladders |
|
|
|
|
From fixed ladders |
|
From scaffolding and platforms |
|
|
|
|
From roofs and walls |
|
From slopes, ditches etc. |
|
|
|
|
From Poor supports (metal, wooden, concrete) |
|
From metal pylons |
|
|
|
|
From structures, cranes, etc. |
|
Into rivers, lakes, canals, etc. |
|
|
|
|
Due to failure of PPE |
|
Other -_____________ |
|
|
Control Definition |
||||||||
|
Date and Time |
|
Name of Worker Responsible |
|
|||||
|
Work Order or similar |
|
Description of the work to be done |
|
|||||
|
Nº of PTW |
|
Power Plant and work Area |
|
|||||
|
Fall From height Risk |
||||||||
|
Fall From Height |
|
Fall Arrest System |
|
Horizontal Lifeline |
|
Enclosure |
|
Area Based Monitoring |
|
|
|
Anchor Point |
|
Anti-Slip |
|
Working Platform |
|
Fixed Point Monitoring |
|
|
|
Fall Protection Rescue Kit |
|
Vertical Lifeline |
|
Housekeeping |
|
HSE induction |
|
|
|
Board Protection |
|
Positioning Lanyard |
|
Permit To Work |
|
Safety Instruction _____________________________ |
|
|
|
Self-Descending Device (runner) |
|
Fall Protection Lanyard |
|
Clear Demarcation/Signage |
|
Other _______________________________________ |
|
|
|
Double Leg Lanyard |
|
Tripod |
|
Davit Arm |
|
|
1/2
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
36 di/of 37
Annex - B.pdf
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS OF WORKSITE
Annex - C.pdf
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR EXCAVATED SOIL AND ROCKS MANAGEMENT AT EGP WORKSITES
Annex - D.pdf
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANAGING AREAS OF WASTE/MATERIAL REMAINING AT EGP WORKSITES
Annex - E.pdf
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR WASHING OF VEHICLES AT WORKSITES
Annex - F.pdf
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR REFUELLING OF VEHICLES AND MACHINERY AT WORKSITES
ANNEX B
ANNEX C
ANNEX D
ANNEX E
ANNEX F
Annex - B
EGP
ANNEX B- MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS OF
WORKSITE
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Premise The worksite is considered one of the most danger place for electrical hazards because it is under continuous changes, but also for the presence of different employees which are often not trained from the electrical risk point of view.
For the realization of an electric plant it is fundamental to take in account the presence of employees and work vehicles with a risk of a collision or contact with live parts, variable weather conditions (in particular rain, but also strong wind and high / low temperature)
presence of dust and water, areas with potential risk of fire or explosion increase by presence of electrical installations.
A site electrical installation, even if considered as provisional since it is designed to be removed in short time, can have a duration of months or years depending on the characteristics of the project. Therefore, it is fundamental that it is planned and made in a proper manner using materials and industrial electrical components and it is maintained
efficiently over the time duration by trained personnel in order to ensure the proper functioning of the equipment and employees integrity.
The laying of the main cables, panel and junction boxes, electrical panels, jacks and plugs, the lighting system, the grounding connections and all maintenance activity must be
performed by qualified personnel.
1.2 Scope of document
Define the minimum requirements for the electrical elements of the electrical system at
worksite in order to ensure the safety standard for the personnel which operate or is located on site.
1.3 Responsibilities and obligations
The responsibility for correct implementation and efficient system operating status of electric
EGP
plant on the site, shall be assigned to the Engineering, procurement, and construction
manager (CONTRACTOR).
2. PLANT INSTALLATIONS
2.1 Electrical panels The electrical panel have to be waterproof for preventing raining water infiltration.
The electrical panel have to be made with insulated material. If structure made in metallic material, that have to be properly grounded.
Input and output wires have to be installed from the bottom side in order to prevent
the entry of rain water into the electrical panel. Main and secondary electrical panels have to be equipped with magneto thermic
switch. The set point has to be defined in advance and based on the electrical load.
At least the main electrical panel has to be equipped with differential relay set at 30 mA. If the main electrical panel has lower sensitivity protection (not more than 300 mA) it is necessary to arrange the secondary electrical panel with the differential
relay aet at 30 mA for all utilities or plugs till 32 A; In order to allow the maintenance activities, the electrical system has to equipped
with a disconnection point before the main feeder The electrical panel has to be properly secured in order to avoid not authorized
access. It has to be equipped with external emergency bottom (red colour) to use in case of emergency disconnection.
On the electrical panel a dedicate safety sign has to be showed indicating the
electrical risk and live part presence a number or letter for its identification. Inside the electrical panel a list (numbers or letters) of sub-panel connected has to
be reported. The list must be in line with the electrical scheme and should be updated
in case of modification in order to have proper and dedicated disconnection point.
Good examples: Fig: 1-2
1 2
EGP
Bad example: Fig: 3-4-5
2.2 Plugs – Socket – Adapters (converter)
The Insulation has to be damages free Clean and free of visible damage on the external casing
Grounded The cable has to fully enter in the casing and it has to be blocked with the cable press
that should be part of the plug / socket;
Each plug has to be connected to one socket. Avoid improper connections with multiple plugs as derivation from the main cable;
Derivations are allowed only with suitable adapters, with casing free of damage
including that one due to overload, electric arc or short-circuit; The number of plugs suitable for the adapter must take in account the load electricity.
it is forbidden connect plugs that can create overload due to adapter limit If used in outdoor environment the plugs have to be watertight and protect from the
rain water or dust. Avoid to place the plugs directly on the ground.
Good examples: Fig: 6-7-8
3 4 5
6 7 8
EGP
Bad example Fig: 9-10-11-12
2.3 Grounding system for metallic casing
The metallic casing of the electrical panel or junction box have to be properly
grounded (section of the grounding cable should as follow: 16 mm2 for cable till 25 mm2, 25 mm2 for cable till 50 mm2 or 50 mm2 for cable with more than 50 mm2)
Cable terminals and lugs have to be properly tightened and grounded in order to
avoid increasing of earth resistance. Ground connections with cables wound on the contact point are forbidden.
The contact surfaces must be clean and free of paint or rust that increases the value
of ground earth resistance; If in place use the pre-installed earth point located on the casing by using a ground
cable with headed lugs If the earthling system is in place utilize as ground rod. If not possible the ground
rod has to located at least 50 cm deep. For construction containers positioned closer, ensure the grounding connection and
in equipotential condition.
9 10
11 12
EGP
Good examples: Fig: 13-14
Bad example: Fig: 15
2.4 Cables for electric lines at worksite
Double insulation and proper cable section For trunk lines, where is possible, identify paths around the construction area in order
to minimize the interferences and crossings line;
Underground and located in protected tunnels by using tubes or corrugated which allow their potential recovery without reopen the excavation;
Overhead cables located to the correct height in order to minimize interference with
the work activities and work vehicles In proximity of crossing aerial line, the cables have to be marked with signs or colored
tape; The cable support of aerial line have to be realized for failure preventing considering
the total load (weight, throw, wind shear, etc.); Avoid to submit the cable to excessive mechanical stress. Contain as far as possible
the distance between the supporting points and adopt fastening systems which do
15
14 13
EGP
not damage the cable;
Case and Junction box should be waterproof in order to prevent raining water
infiltration. The panel has to be made with insulated material. Metallic panel has to be properly grounded.
In case of junction box or iron frame, input / output cables must be protected with corrugated or PVC tube. The same principle is valid also for the contact points of the cable with the metallic frame;
Bad example: Fig:16-17-18-19-20
2.5 Extension cables
Double insulation, free from damage and deterioration point due to friction,
accidental contact or crushing; Adequate cable section in relation to the applied electrical load The junction point if any, should be clearly visible. Therefore, at the junction point
should be adopted a different colour tape
Usually joints should be avoided. In case a junction is needed, the same must be done with self-amalgamating tape or heat shrink kit. Homemade junctions arranged with materials that do not guarantee the water resistant of the cable are forbidden;
16
18
17
19
EGP
Good examples: Fig: 20-21-22
20 21
22
EGP
Bad example: Fig: 23-24
2.6 Fixed mobile and portable lighting system
Fixed mobile and portable lighting system, especially if placed outdoors, should be suitable to external conditions (rain, humidity). They have to be positioned in order to avoid interfere with the normal site activities and protected against accidental
bump. They have to be arranged in an appropriate way in order to ensure a good level of illumination of the perimeter areas, access routes and transit;
For transportable equipment, before each use, and in particular as a result of each
movements, check the light and cable integrity; Portable devices must have the handle made by insulating material, the electrical
parts fully protected and mechanical protection for the light bulb. Before each use, perform a visually inspection of device and wires for verify the integrity
Portable equipment must be made with sturdy material considering that are exposed to continuous movements
Lamp holder made of porcelain or insulating material: unprotected metal parts are
prohibited As a general rule the number of lighting system and their placement must consider
the environmental conditions (working during night shift or indoor) and they have to
ensure adequate lighting of transit and work places, avoiding the glare effects (especially if you use headlights) or shading area because represent a possible causes of accident.
Good examples: Fig: 25-26-27-28
25 26
23 24
EGP
28
27
ANNEX C
EGP
ANNEX C - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR EXCAVATED SOIL AND ROCKS MANAGEMENT AT
EGP CONSTRUCION SITES
SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Purpose of the document The purpose of this document is to define a register format for recording soil and rock excavation activities
undertaken within the Enel Green Power worksites. This document supplements the general provisions of the HSE Requirements.
In particular, the procedure applies to all contractors/subcontractors carrying out activities at ENEL GREEN POWER worksites.
The responsibility for the proper management of excavated soil and rocks is entrusted to the Contractor and to each contractor according to the activities undertaken. All contractors must use the format attached to this technical note for the recording of soil and rock
movements.
Reference documents
This Technical Note is an integral attachment of the: HSE Requirements
SECTION 2 - MANAGEMENT RULES
Classification and scope of this document Any activity, from small construction/demolition tasks to large works, requires excavation and thus the production of soil and rocks.
Site work will generally require infrastructural and excavation activities, by way of example some cases are summarized below:
a) generic excavation work (levelling, foundations, trenches, etc.) b) civil engineering works (perforations, drilling, piling, consolidation, etc.). c) infrastructure work in general (tunnel, dam, road, etc.)
d) removal and levelling works e) stony materials with different particle size fractions from excavations. Where local regulations do not a priori exclude that excavated soil and rocks may be considered as waste
materials, therefore tending to classify them within the waste listings, it has become necessary to examine the specific local regulations themselves in order to identify the criteria which would allow excavation materials to be classified as non-waste so they may be handled without endangering workers' health and
without harming the environment. If local regulations require the drafting of a soil management plan during the project design stages, then
excavated material must be handled in compliance with the provisions outlined in that same document.
EGP
Management and Reporting
Management of materials excavated within the worksite
i. The excavated material may be accumulated close by excavation site at a distance not less than
10 m from the excavation face (compatibly with the space available).
ii. The piles of material must also be established well away from watersheds and natural drainage
lines and not in the vicinity of steep slopes susceptible to landslides;
iii. Both deposits will be identified by appropriate signs posted in a visible manner.
iv. The storage must be done carefully so as to avoid erosion of the piles that could cause the
dispersal of the materials into the surrounding areas and/or contamination of surface water. In particular, if it is expected that the storage period will extend beyond 2 months, the possibility of seeding the pile surfaces with a protective covering of native herbaceous plants should be
considered.
v. Any volumes of soil with no reusable purpose must be stored and managed as waste according to the regulations.
vi. If local regulations require the separation and recycling of top soil, the latter should be separated
from the rest of the excavated material to avoid contamination and treated as required by the
same regulations.
vii. Any stony material suitable for roadwork, protecting river beds and possibly strengthening
embankments must be stored separately from other soil components.
To ensure material loading, unloading and storage operations in conditions of total worker safety, all
appropriate vehicular traffic regulation devices must be installed. Reporting
Special site registers (fig. 2) containing information related to the production location, the material quantities handled and the destination location must be kept available to the Enel staff on site.
The volumes of soil involved shall be estimated in m3, for example, based on the load capacity of the vehicles used
The daily monitoring of soil and rocks quantities (in m3) must enable a daily reporting of:
A. Total excavated quantities B. Quantity of stored material
C. Quantity of material re-used internally in the worksite or externally (eg: embankments, landfills, landscaping, etc.)
D. Disposed quantities.
Such reporting must allow for proper monitoring of the overall quantitative balance of excavated material such that A = (B+C+D).
EGP
Fig.2
REGISTER: EXCAVATED SOIL AND ROCKS ARISING FROM AND HANDLED DURING WORKSITE ACTIVITY
Excavation
locations
Excava
ted
volume
(m3)
Temporary
storage
locations
Stored
volume
(m3)
Recycling
location
Recycle
d
volume
(m3)
Final
disposal
location
Unused
volume
(m3)
Total volume 0 Accumulate d Recycled 0 Unloaded 0
Definitions
Excavation locations Identification of the area in which the material was excavated, (eg. excavation at wind turbine site nr, roadworks, excavations for transmission lines, etc.)
Volumes Enter the total amount of soil and rocks generated from the excavation in cubic meters (also by means of estimates based on truck load capacities)
Location of the temporary accumulation site
Identify the location where the excavated material is to be temporarily stored
Recycled volumes Indicate the volume of material used for the creation of other works (for example landfills, roadworks etc.)
Recycling location Indicate the location where the excavated material is recycled (for example: at the wind turbine nr., "x" roadworks, "y" transmission line foundations, etc.)
Unused volumes Indicate the volume of excavated materials which are not used for the creation of other works related to the project, expressed in cubic metres (also by means of estimates based on truck load capacities)
Final disposal location Indicate the location for the final disposal of unrecycled excavated material
Annex - D
EGP
ANNEX D - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANAGING AREAS OF WASTE/MATERIAL
REMAINING AT EGP WORKSITE
SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Scope of this document The purpose of this document is to regulate the procedures for managing waste and material remains of working within Enel Green Power worksites, in order to:
Encourage the recovery of waste; Encourage use material remains of working Continually monitoring of waste quantities and waste stored at worksites;
Continually monitoring of remaining material quantities stored at worksites; Define procedures for managing waste storage areas; Define procedures for managing storage areas of remaining material;
This document is intended to supplement the general provisions in the HSE Requirements.
In particular, the procedure applies to all contractors / subcontractors carrying out activities at ENEL GREEN POWER worksites.
Referral documents This Technical Note is an integral attachment of the:
E&C HSE Requirements.
The Emergency Plans must be adapted to the requirements of this document.
SECTION 2 - PROCEDURES FOR MANAGING STORAGE AREAS
WASTE - Identification of storage areas The area intended for the temporary storage of waste shall be indicated in the relevant plan in detail
(e.g. Fig. 1). This area must be situated inside the worksite, fenced in and appropriately localized, in order to enable easy and safe access by equipment and machinery assigned to the loading and unloading of waste and their collection. The temporary waste storage area should be divided into two sub-areas intended for the separated
storage of non-hazardous and hazardous waste. The two sub-areas must be appropriately sized for the production of the waste provided during the different phases of the work at the worksite, in order to proper and orderly management, avoiding excessive pile-ups. If necessary, according to the evolution
and displacement of the different activities inside worksite, shall be provided areas properly demarcated for daily storage of waste.
At the end of the day, the waste must be transferred to the main specific storage area. It is essential
that suitable SAFETY SIGNS be installed next to the main storage area of hazardous and no-hazard waste, identifying the type of stored waste, the main risks involved, and the prohibitions and requirements to be observed. At least two portable fire extinguishers, must be installed next to the areas, one for each.
EGP
The two sub-areas must be exclusively intended for the storage of:
1. Non-hazardous waste
2. Hazardous waste
Fig.1 – Waste storage
WASTE - Management of areas The following is a list of general precautions to be observed for hazardous waste in storage areas:
The surface of the storage area must be of adequate size to capably store the volumes of waste previously estimated in the design phase of the works.
The area must be fenced in, with a waterproof pavement.
The waste must be separated by type (wood, iron, plastic, etc.) or in accordance with local regulations if these are more restrictive (e.g. Europe perimeter CER codes).
The containers used to contain hazardous waste must possess suitable strength requirements in relation to the chemical and physical properties, as well as the hazardous specifications of the
waste contained within them. Process waste materials that can combine to react dangerously, giving rise to explosive,
flammable and toxic substances, must be stored so that they cannot come into contact with
each other. Liquid waste should be collected in bins which should be put on top of the "containment tanks"
made of a suitable material and of adequate capacity, in order to hold accidental spillage of
waste. Outdoor storage areas must be equipped with suitable roofing to prevent the direct radiation of
the containers (with consequent dangers of overheating and the formation of gaseous products), as well as leaching and rainwater accumulation in the containment vessels; at any
rate, the condition of the containment vessels should be ascertained periodically and after heavy rainfall.
Hazardous waste must be disposed of as scheduled every month or if greater than 10 cubic
meters or in accordance with local regulations if these are more restrictive. Through spot checks at the landfill, it is important to make sure that the operator in charge for disposal
executes waste correctly management as stated in the permits.
EGP
The following is a list of general precautions to be observed for non-hazardous waste in storage
areas:
The surface of the storage area must be of adequate size to capably store the volumes of waste previously estimated in the design phase of the works.
The area must be fenced in.
The waste must be separated by type (wood, iron, plastic, etc.) in accordance with local regulations or in accordance with local regulations if these are more restrictive (e.g. Europe perimeter CER codes).
Packages must be separated from other types of waste. They must be separated by type
(paper, wood, plastic, metal) and properly stored in order to promote reuse and recovery even outside the worksite.
Waste stored in heaps ("avoiding bulk storage") must be protected from rainwater and wind.
No-hazardous waste must be disposed of every month or if greater than 20 cubic meters or in accordance with local regulations if these are more restrictive.
Focus on Inert Material identified as waste If the work methods adopted within the site have a decisive effect on the quantity and composition of inert waste materials production (e.g. rubble, debris, demolition waste) these materials should be stored
in a different area from those used for waste collection. In according with local regulations could be allowed their re-use. Inert waste must be stored in low mounds and slopes in order to avoid risk of landslides.
Fig.3 - Storage of inert waste
MATERIAL REMAINS OF WORKING - Identification of storage area
The area intended for storage of material remaining shall be indicated in the relevant plan in detail (e.g. Fig. 2). This area must be situated inside the worksite, fenced in and appropriately localized, in order to
enable easy and safe access by equipment and machinery assigned to the loading and unloading of material and their collection. The storage area should be separated from waste storage area. In order to proper and orderly
management, avoiding excessive pile-ups, the area must be appropriately sized for the production of
remaining material during the different phases of the work on site. If necessary, according to the evolution and displacement of the different activities inside worksite, shall be provided areas properly demarcated for daily storage of material remaining. At the end of the day, the amount of material must be transferred
to the main storage area. It is essential that suitable SAFETY SIGNS be installed next to the main storage area, identifying the type of stored materials, the main risks involved, and the prohibitions and requirements to be observed. At least one portable fire extinguisher must be installed next to the area.
The area must be exclusively intended for the storage of remaining material by work activities. Waste materials generated at the worksite are predominantly structural components and accessories
(wood, metals, cables, insulation materials, etc.), which can potentially be treated as resources.
EGP
As regards these areas, the general precautions to be adopted for process waste are listed below:
The area must be fenced in.
Waste must be stored separately by type (wood, metals, cables, insulation, etc.) into well sorted piles, avoiding any accumulation in "bulk" mode.
Piles of waste materials that are sensitive to weather conditions must be protected by suitable covering systems.
Fig.2 – Storage of remaining material by work activities
MATERIAL REMAINS OF WORKING – AREA Management
General precautions to be implemented in this area, are listed below: • The surface of the area must be suitably sized as to be able to keep the volumes of materials.
• The area must be equipped with a fence. • The material must be stored in piles by type (wood, steel, cables, etc.) avoiding mode in bulk. • The material must be protected from rainwater.
Annex - E
EGP
ANNEX E - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR WASHING OF VEHICLES AT WORKSITES
SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Scope of this document
The purpose of this document is to regulate the procedures for the washing of vehicles in Enel Green Power worksites in order to:
Define processes for the environmental management of waste washing water via appropriate treatment systems;
Ensure regular road traffic by removing any worksite residues and thereby enhance road traffic safety;
This document is intended to supplement the general provisions in the HSE Requirements.
In particular, the procedure applies to all contractors / subcontractors carrying out activities at ENEL GREEN POWER worksites.
Responsibility for properly managing the washing of vehicles is entrusted to the Contractor of civil works and to each contractor or user owning the work vehicles in question.
Referral documents
This Technical Note is an integral attachment of the:
E&C HSE Requirements.
SECTION 2 - PROCEDURES for washing vehicles
Identification of vehicle washing areas
At each worksite where muddy soil is present, an internal washing system must be provided for the wheels of vehicles using special nozzles (example Fig.1), for washing the external and internal surfaces single or twin wheels, or systems with iron rollers (example Fig.2), in order to remove worksite residues.
The washing water will be conveyed into a settling tank waste water and subsequently be sent to the treatment plant to be reused. In addition, to proceed with the washing of cement truck mixers within the worksite, including both the
vehicle's internal and external parts, a dedicated area must be adequately prepared with a washing water storage system. The inert material (sludge) deposited on the bottom of storage system could be collected and re-used at worksite in according with local laws. After a suitable solids separation, settling and oil
removal into special tanks, the water could be completely reused for industrial use inside worksite. In both cases, periodically the tanks should be emptied. These artifacts must be removed at the conclusion of work on site. These artefacts must be removed at the conclusion of work on site.
Management of waste washing water Wheel washing water
Washing water from the wheels of work vehicles must be considered an effluent liquid, consisting of
water, suspended mud, with the possible presence of oils and greases. If the local regulations does not consider differently, washing water is not considered waste but rather drain water.
However, if this type of waste water has good quality characteristics it could be reused at the worksite and if the washing water remains within the worksite's production cycle, it will be considered as process water.
Washing water of cement mixer truck Washing water from cement trucks must be considered an effluent liquid, consisting of water, suspended mud and cement, with the possible presence of oils and greases. If the local regulations does not consider
differently, washing water is not considered waste but rather drain water.
EGP
However, if this type of waste water has good quality characteristics it could be reused at the worksite
and if the Washing water remains within the worksite's production cycle, it will be considered as process
water. In particular, the sludge produced by internal washing of cement mixer's drum it is considered as waste
(Unless different local regulations on waste legislation) and cannot be reused as a by-product at the worksite, so it should be taken to the landfill.
Fig.1 Fig.2
Annex - F
EGP
ANNEX F - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR REFUELLING OF VEHICLES AND MACHINERY AT
WORKSITES
SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Scope of this document
The purpose of this document is to regulate the procedures for the refuelling of vehicles in Enel Green Power worksites in order to:
Define environmental management procedures for the remediation of contaminated soil using appropriate treatment systems;
Prevent possible Diesel/Gasoline, lubricating oils and greases leaks due to refuelling; Define the safety rules to be observed during the refuelling operations.
This document is intended to supplement the general provisions in the HSE Requirements.
In particular, the procedure applies to all contractors / subcontractors carrying out activities at ENEL GREEN POWER worksites. Responsibility for properly managing the refuelling of vehicles is entrusted to each contractor or user
owning the work vehicles in question
Referral documents This Technical Note is an integral attachment of the:
E&C HSE Requirements.
The Emergency Plans must be adapted to the requirements of this document.
SECTION 2 - PROCEDURES for the refuelling of vehicles
Identification of vehicle refuelling areas Each site must provide stationary dedicated areas within it for the refuelling of worksite vehicles, including suitable equipment for in-line refuelling using shuttle service.
Worksite refuelling area In particular, a container firmly anchored to the ground can be set up at dedicated vehicle refuelling areas, with a geometric capacity not exceeding 5,000 litres, and suitable for containing hydrocarbons.
The distributor container must also be equipped with a containment basin of a capacity not less than half of the geometric capacity of the container; a protective hood providing protection from the elements should be made of non-combustible material and suitably grounded.
Areas at which the container/distributors are set up should be flat and raised at least 15 cm above the level of the surrounding terrain. The area around the container must be completely clear and devoid of vegetation, which can constitute a fire hazard. The container/distributors must be installed solely in clear open areas. The container/distributors must be located in a designated area, preferably if bounded by a
masonry wall or metal mesh fence, and fitted with a sliding door to the outside, lockable with a key lock or padlock.
At least three portable fire extinguishers (right size) must be installed in the vicinity of the
container/distributor. If local low Act is more restrictive it prevails on what indicated in this document. In-line refuelling
In-line refuelling refers to the diesel refuelling of work vehicles that cannot access the worksite refuelling area, and are therefore reached by a suitably equipped shuttle service. Emergency kits must be provided on board the shuttle equipment, containing absorbent cloths and other suitable materials for containing, collecting, stopping and at least partially absorbing any spillage during in-line refuelling
operations. It must include a portable containment device. Moreover, to avoid spills during in-line maintenance operations on worksite vehicles and equipment,
containment tanks or other suitable systems must be adopted, set up at the maintenance points. In addition, the lubricating oil containers must be placed onto watertight containment tanks.
EGP
Management of ground spills
Classification of spills
The negative effects of accidental spills on the environment depend on the type of hazardous substances, the amount spilled and the type of receiving soil substrate.
In order to enable a suitable procedure for response to spills, these have been classified into three types: • minor spills: Spills of hazardous substances less than 50 litres;
• significant spills: Spills of hazardous substances in excess of 50 litres or 50 kg that are not contained and quickly solved; • damage spills: Spills of hazardous substances in excess of 50 litres or 50 kg that caused an extensive pollution of land, surface or groundwater.
General preventive measures
The general measures to be adopted in order to minimize spills of fuel, oils and lubricants can be summarized as follows:
• use of suitable containers for transporting and storing each type of liquid;
• proper maintenance status of all containers; • the loading, unloading and transfer of potentially polluting substances must always be carried in sealed areas with tarpaulins or containment vessels; • the fill level of containers should always be visible, in order to avoid overflows and any spillage
of liquids; • proper maintenance status of all pipes and pipelines and related connections for the transport of liquids;
• regular inspections and maintenance interventions on all equipment.
All fixed machinery (UPS units, compressors, etc.) and equipment should be set up in sealed areas with
plastic sheeting. Procedures for the recovery of accidental spillages
The following actions must be undertaken in the event of accidental spills (medium-high) of hydrocarbons, oils and lubricants on the ground:
• immediately inform the Site Manager;
• immediately interrupt refuelling / maintenance operations; • capture and containment of the spill; • removal of the contaminated material and transportation to landfills or in
temporary storage at the worksite. • applied a chemical to restore the soil (biosolvent)
The temporary storage used for storing the contaminated soil must be on a horizontal ground surface
and rendered appropriately waterproof with tarpaulins. The mound of contaminated soil must also be suitably covered with tarpaulins.
Enel Green Power/HSEQ
EGP CODE
GRE.ALL.QSE.GT.001.vers.01
PAGINA – PAGE
37 di/of 37
Annex - G.pdf
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKS AT NIGHT IN EGP WORKSITES
Annex - H.pdf
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF MV/HV AERIAL LINE AT EGP WORKSITES
ANNEX G B
ANNEX H C
Annex - G
EGP
ANNEX G - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKS AT NIGHT IN EGP WORKSITES
SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Scope of this document The purpose of this document is to regulate the procedures for the works at night in Enel Green Power worksites in order to define the technical and organizational aspects to consider on worksites when works
at night are required. This document is intended to supplement the general provisions in the HSE Requirements.
This procedure is applicable in all Enel Green Power worksites. In particular, the procedure applies to all contractors / subcontractors carrying out activities at ENEL
GREEN POWER sites.
Referral documents This Technical Note is an integral attachment of the:
Technical specification HSE Requirements.
The Emergency Plans and evacuation must be adapted to the requirements of this document.
SECTION 2 - OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
General
On all Enel Green Power worksites all activities shall be performed in conditions of the greatest visibility both the day than at the night. However, when urgent work is required all activities may have to be carried out after normal working hours. In particular can be carried out all activities at night in case of:
For technical reasons cannot be interrupted;
If there are delay by works program;
Critical weather conditions;
If these are requested by the Client (EGP);
If it is scheduled in Gantt of Contractors;
Works continuing into the late afternoon.
There are cases in which, for operational and/or safety reasons, work in progress cannot be interrupted and must therefore continue into the late afternoon for the time required to complete the operation. In addition, it may be necessary, due to particular climatic conditions (in countries with very hot) anticipate
dawn the first shift of work, when the conditions of visibility are poor. In order for the team charged with the work to complete it, a necessary condition is that all workers involved shall be granted an adequate rest break before continuing. During the time of activities, the Safety Officers/Agents presence on the
site must be properly planned and guaranteed especially when the risks due to the activities are rated as “high”. The Safety Officers of EGP and Contractors must work together to ensure the respect of the Safety Standards. If it is necessary to change a work team in order to complete previous activity, a formal
hand over must be carry out between teams.
Work performed at night.
When urgent work is required, all activities can be performed after normal working hours starting from
EGP
the late afternoon into the night in compliance with the instructions given in this document. If work at
night are requested by the Client or those are scheduled in Gantt, the Contractors must be planned
appropriate shifts into “night work” permit to work. A necessary condition for this is that the team charged with performing the work shall not work the preceding and following day shifts to ensure that they are
properly alert and able to concentrate on their work. During the night works must always be guaranteed the Safety Officers/Agents presence on site. The Safety Officers of EGP and Contractors together must work to ensure the respect of the Safety Standards. If it is necessary to change a work team in order to
complete previous activity, a formal hand over must be carry out between teams.
Traffic management at night.
To avoid interference with other vehicles on the site, the movement of heavy vehicles may be scheduled
in the “night work” procedure. This activity should be planned in advance with a study of the vehicles’ itineraries and the performance of the preliminary activities described below.
In all of the aforementioned cases, works shall not be performed if there is rain, snow or fog.
Risk Management
Whenever it is necessary to work at night, the risks involved in such work shall be evaluated and added to the risk assessment performed previously.
Below is a list of risks that work at night may entail; they should be modified/customized on the basis of the conditions on the individual sites and activity.
If the work area and the manoeuvre in progress is poorly lit the following risks may be present:
Crushing, caused by the falling of materials during hoisting and mounting of components;
Striking/tripping, due to the presence of poorly illuminated materials or equipment in the work
area;
Cuts/abrasions, in performing operations without proper lighting;
Being run down, by vehicles moving on the worksite;
Falls from the same level or different level/slips.
Tiredness may also be the cause of accidents or injuries: Breaks from work shall be provided for whenever the worker feels the need.
Operational Instructions
Prior to performing works in conditions of poor visibility or at night, it is best to prepare the measures that allow the performance of tasks in conditions of safety beforehand. Such measures refer to the
preparatory phase of the work and are to be carried out when conditions of visibility are still good, or in any case before work begins.
Before work begins:
The entire phase of preparation of the work area shall take place in the afternoon when daylight is still sufficient. The preparatory phase includes:
Checking the availability of fuel for generating sets;
Checking road conditions, especially after adverse weather conditions, in the case of transportation;
Controlling dust by sprinkling water on roads;
Checking that machinery is working properly;
Placing lights or reflectors along the routes that vehicles must travel up to their destinations;
EGP
Placing intermittent lights to alert drivers about obstacles (for example: trenching, slope, corner
low visibility, work in progress, etc.) along the way;
Providing a plan for evacuation from assembly areas and placing proper lighting along the escape routes shown on the plan;
Implement adequate training to workers on emergency procedures and evacuation from the worksite.
Placing all materials, machines, equipment, lights on the work area.
Further measures to be implemented should be evaluated in relation to the characteristics of the individual worksites.
During work:
To ensure that works are performed in safe conditions it is necessary to provide:
Lighting by means of lamps providing at least 50 lux at ground level (or higher if the local law requirements are more restrictive);
A floodlight that can swivel to follow the hoisting of components;
Prevent glare caused by very different levels of illumination;
Avoid the grey areas in places used for working activities;
A lamp on the crane jib;
Emergency lightings for illuminating the following areas: - Escape routes leading to safe places or outdoors
- The areas at risk of falling;
- The first-aid areas and areas where there are fire control equipment - The area where are installed the main switchboards;
Several communications systems connecting ground personnel and workers above ground;
Suitably lit sheds or areas adjacent to the work area for storing equipment required for assembly;
Parking areas for service vehicles outside those used for assembly work;
Special attention must be paid in positioning floodlight cables so that they do not hinder transit
routes;
All workers shall be provided with personal protective equipment, with the addition of lamps on helmets;
All on-site workers must wear fluorescent and reflective clothing, orange or yellow with
white/silver bands.
(In particular, on wind worksites, it is necessary to provide a portable emergency light at all levels of the
tower as well as on the nacelle).
In the event of an emergency while work is in progress, activities are to be suspended until safe conditions have been restored.
Coordination meeting
In order to evaluate the efficacy of the measures adopted and to discuss any problems that may arise, it is also good practice, to arrange for a series of coordination meetings organized by the site Safety
Officer, with the company responsible for the works.
Instructions concerning the timing of such meetings are as follows:
1- Coordination meetings with the contractor that is to perform the works on the days preceding the start-up of night-time activities to discuss the risk assessment and the safety measures to implement;
The operational procedures decided during such meetings shall be made known to all operators;
2- A coordination meeting following the first period of work at night to assess the need for changes in the intensity of lighting or to share knowledge of any problems encountered.
EGP
The Safety Officer by agreement with the Site Manager can freely decide how e when to schedule this
coordination meeting.
Annex - H
EGP
ANNEX H - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF MV/HV AERIAL LINE AT EGP
WORKSITE
EGP
SECTION 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 4
1.1 Foreward ....................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Purpose of this document ................................................................................................ 5
SECTION 2 - ASSEMBLING SUPPORT STRUCTURES ....................................................................... 5
2.1 Excavations and foundations ............................................................................................ 5
2.2 General remarks ............................................................................................................. 7
2.3 Tubular pole supports ...................................................................................................... 9
2.4 Pylons ......................................................................................................................... 12
SECTION 3 - INSTALLATION OF THE BUNDLE ASSEMBLY AND INSULATORS ................................... 17
SECTION 4 - STRINGING THE HV LINE ...................................................................................... 19
SECTION 5 - MANAGING INTERFERENCE WITH OVER OR UNDER-PASSING LIVE POWER LINES ......... 25
EGP
SECTION 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Forward The construction of overhead power transmission lines is one of the most complex and difficult engineering
activities, both in organizational and operational terms. The multiple interferences that can arise along the power line route (under or over-passing electrical and telephone lines, buildings, roads, waterways, etc.) associated with terrain morphology and weather conditions, significantly increase the specific risks
related to this work.
The personnel employed in the works must be highly specialized and trained as well as physically and psychologically fit.
The vehicles, equipment and PPE used must be suitable, efficient and scrupulously checked before and
after use. If they show deformations or weak points (cracks, breakages or other defects) they must be replaced immediately. The main risk for workers is falling from heights, which can be controlled by adopting proper conduct in
line with validated work practices and an appropriate use of material and PPE.
The risk of objects falling from heights is always present and must not be overlooked. Hence, it is important to minimize interference between workers operating at heights and those stationed at the base
of the support structure. All equipment on the support structure, when not in use, must be secured with straps or chains to prevent accidental knocking over and falling to the ground.
In summary, the safe execution of work on HV overhead lines requires careful planning, diligent task coordination by the supervisors in charge, respect for the operating procedures and the appropriate use
of material and PPE.
In order to ensure the correct management of emergencies and considering that HV line construction is
generally performed in remote locations far from medical facilities, it is important to always ensure that
qualified medical assistance and an equipped ambulance are available nearby.
Moreover, the presence of a rescue stretcher or similar device must be ensured when operations at heights are undertaken.
The main elements that comprise a HV electric power line are: support structures, conductors and insulators.
With regard to Environmental Issues, pay particular attention to all equipment with motor or with the possibility of leaks of lubricating oil, fuel or other chemical components. Provide for leak containment
containers. Dispose of any residue by the end of the work, if possible with daily cleaning.
"Support structures" can be pylons (lattice towers) or metal tubular poles. The choice of type of support depends on technical/financial considerations, on the characteristics of the line (voltage, length of spans,
the need to reach high elevations to avoid interference with other plant, etc.) and on terrain characteristics (vehicle mobility, access to the line deployment zone by mechanical means, etc.). The installation of tubular poles is possible only with large hoisting machines (cranes or helicopters) while
pylon structures can also be transported in loose sections by simpler means of transport, such as trucks or draught animals (mules). Moreover, the assembly of lattice trusses can be performed with the use of "gin poles", which can also be transported as loose rod sections.
Generally, the use of pylons in open areas is always possible and therefore they are more commonly deployed.
In cases where lines pass through areas with housing or road interference, the use of tubular poles can
be a technically valid solution, since the reduced dimensions of their bases allow them to be installed in confined spaces, such as roadway central reservations or roadside gutters.
As a rule, tubular poles are not used for voltages over 150 KV.
The choice of the type of support structure must be considered beforehand during the design phase to allow for a careful assessment of the risk and avoid construction and safety-related complications during the subsequent construction phase.
Conductors are made of composite aluminum/steel which combines the excellent characteristics of
aluminum (weight, conductivity, price) with the mechanical strength of steel.
The most common "insulators" are the bell-shaped type made in glass. Recently, isolators made of composite material are also being adopted; they are lighter, more robust and more practical to install.
EGP
1.2 Purpose of this document
To define the general criteria and measures to be applied during the construction of HV transmission lines
in EGP worksites in order to ensure the adherence to appropriate worker safety standards and the correct use of equipment.
SECTION 2 - ASSEMBLING SUPPORT STRUCTURES 2.1 Excavations and foundations The worksite area must be well defined, marked and of sufficient extension to ensure the manoeuvrability of vehicles in use. Normally, where heavy vehicles are used (excavators, trucks, cement mixers, etc.) it
is important to ensure that the access routes to the worksite are of sufficient size for the transit of vehicles. It is also necessary to verify that the ground is firm enough to support the weight of heavy vehicles:
On-site personnel must pay the utmost attention to moving vehicles;
People must pay particular attention as concrete mixer trucks approach the excavation area, since the
excessive weight of the vehicle could cause ground subsidence. At this stage, it is advisable for the personnel engaged in the concrete casting to keep at a safe distance from the excavation until completion of the operations, with the mixer truck stationary in a stable position;
The work area must be well marked and kept in an orderly manner. Personnel working near the
excavation must be secured with the appropriate PPE against the risk of falling;
EGP
In the case of excavations with depths > 1.5 metres, the risk of ground subsidence and the
consequent risk of workers being buried must be considered. The excavation should be dug with
inclined walls or fitted with safety shoring, depending on the nature of the terrain;
Avoid the accumulation of waste material near the excavation, paying particular attention to rocks
and stones.
EGP
2.2 General remarks
In the assembly phase, regardless of the type of support used, the following general measures must be
taken into account: Assess possible interference from works and services external to the worksite (public roads, power
or telecommunications lines, etc.) and organise the work areas to minimise them;
Inside the worksite, manage any interference between operations at heights and those on the
ground. As far as possible, ensure that people do not transit or remain directly under places where
work at height is underway;
EGP
Use of steel tie rods and special rope winches for the fixing and control of the “Falcon”, in order
to facilitate the movement of the “Falcon”;
Only suitably qualified personnel may climb on the support structure and they must be equipped
with appropriate PPE that will allow them to perform the climb and remain at the elevated
workplace in safety;
EGP
2.3 Tubular pole supports When climbing on the support structure, workers must always be harnessed to the structure itself with the appropriate PPE. It is forbidden to fasten the safety hook to ropes or other extensions that may
compromise the functionality of the fall-arrest device;
Before hoisting the pole sections, consult the load tables to ensure that the load capacity is
suitable for the weight to be lifted;
Hoisting gear (cables and slings) must be suitable for the load to be lifted and visually checked
before use;
During the hoisting of the various sections, all personnel not strictly engaged in the task must
move away to a safe position;
EGP
Before hoisting the pole sections, check that the rungs to be used for future ascents are fully
tightened;
EGP
Connect two ropes of adequate length to the pole section being hoisted to allow the control of
swinging from the ground and facilitate the coupling of the sections to each other;
Before hoisting the second pole section, check that the first section is fully upright (in plumb) and
that its climbing rungs are tightly fastened. The final tightening must be performed with a torque
wrench or other device which ensures that sufficient force is applied;
EGP
Check that the pole sections are perfectly coupled together before proceeding to climb on the pole
to unhook the crane slings from the raised section;
2.4 Pylons
Workers at height on the pylon must always be secured to the structure with the appropriate fall-
arrest PPE;
EGP
It is forbidden to fasten the safety hook to ropes or other extensions that may compromise the
functionality of the fall-arrest device. In such circumstances it is preferable to directly install a
dedicated safety line;
EGP
The fall-arrest device must be anchored to a rod of the pylon truss (preferably a horizontal one)
and not to the lateral rungs fitted to assist climbing;
Where possible, if mechanical equipment can access the worksite, it is preferable to assemble the
pylon sections at ground level and then hoist them into position by crane;
EGP
Before hoisting by crane, the sides or lateral sections pre-assembled on the ground must be
secured with ropes of adequate length to allow any swinging of the load to be controlled from the
ground and to guide the sections as they are coupled together.
All tools and equipment used by workers at height must be secured to the pylon or tied to the
operator to avoid accidental object falls;
In the event of assembly using a gin pole, take all the necessary precautions during the installation
and movement of the gin pole itself along the pylon structure;
EGP
Depending on the chosen assembly method (by sections, sides or loose rods), the gin pole may
be installed inside or outside the pylon frame. For safety, personnel assigned to the work must
remain inside the pylon frame if the gin pole is installed externally and vice versa;
Check the tightness of the gin pole bolts before use; if necessary, brace it with pegs, ballast or
other dead centre struts.
Check that the capacity of the gin pole is adequate for the maximum load to be lifted.
During assembly work, all personnel not directly involved must move away to a safe position.
Within the worksite, manage any interference between operations at heights and those on the
ground until all moving parts have been fastened;
EGP
SECTION 3 - INSTALLATION OF THE BUNDLE ASSEMBLY AND INSULATORS
Hoisting of the bundle assembly and insulator gear must normally be carried out with the service cable and the return pulley. If the weight of the elements to be lifted is compatible with the strength of the operators, this task may be carried out directly by hand, in this case, specify the specific implementation
procedures and risks involved in the work processes. In the case of heavier elements, a motorized winch with adequate load capacity should be used. Another suitable method for hoisting these elements is by crane. It is forbidden to use hoisting solutions other than those listed above. Should unexpected
unavailability prevent the use of traditional hoisting equipment and other methods must be used, specific work procedures must be drafted taking into account all possible risks for the operators and the relevant operations must be organized in such a way as to minimize them. In particular, in the exceptional case of use of moving vehicles, it will be necessary to:
define the worksite area encompassing the maneuvering spaces;
assess the general conditions of the terrain (excessive slopes, presence of holes, wet areas with
the risk of loss of grip and poor vehicle control);
avoid interference between workers at height and those on the ground and between the latter
and the moving vehicle;
use a rope to control any swinging of the load from the ground;
ensure the presence of an operator near the vehicle to facilitate communication between the
personnel at height and the driver;
EGP
organise the activity so as to avoid vehicles and personnel passing directly under the element
being hoisted until it has been firmly secured to the pylon structure.
Use of pilot cable pre-installed during the assembly of the towers to avoid further maneuvers of
operators at high altitude during the tightening phase, thus limiting the risk of falling;
EGP
SECTION 4 - STRINGING THE HV LINE
Before starting the stringing operations, inspect the area to identify all potential interferences
(power and telecommunication lines, road crossings, waterways, houses, etc.) and assess the
operational options that will ensure the safest possible execution.
In the vicinity of road crossings with traffic, provide suitable means of protection to restrict the
fall of the conductor in case of accidental collapse. Where necessary, deploy someone to control
traffic.
In case of other power line crossing or parallel segments, assess the option of putting the
interfering line out of service by contacting the utility that operates it. Before starting work,
directly ascertain the actual disconnection in situ according to the 5 golden rules;
Deploy some operators along the entire section to be strung and, in particular, at the points where
the conductor is subject to greater stress (acute angles, particularly long spans, underpass
crossings with vertical upward pull, etc.);
Ensure radio contact between the winch and engine brake operators and those positioned along
the line. The radio link must always be tested before starting stringing operations;
EGP
The winch and engine brake must be placed in stable positions and anchored with sufficient
strength to counteract the line tension (concrete blocks or other ballast). The same consideration
applies to the systems anchoring the conductor.
Having defined the supports that limit the extremities of the section to be strung, the winch and
the brake are positioned respectively in front of and behind the aforementioned anchors.
As a rule, do not use conductors that have not yet been definitively fastened as fall-arrest
anchorage points, it is preferable to anchor to elements designed for this purpose, (crossbar,
hanging ladder) or a crane with operator basket. The adoption of alternative measures must be
supported by drafting work procedures that include a careful risk assessment.
EGP
The temporary anchoring of the conductors (prior to the final tension stringing of the line) must
be performed with a self-tightening double-clamp safety system or with a single system with a
bolt clamp.
The conductor reels must be positioned upstream of the brake and installed on reel-lift stands
with braking devices to control the conductor pay-off and ensure sufficient mechanical tension at
the brake inlet. During the stringing phase, in as far as possible, everyone should remain at a
safe distance from the conductor and the moving reel. If available, it is preferable to use a
hydraulic brake with remote control.
It is forbidden to perform manual braking on the reels or to use improper devices such as
wooden planks or other objects;
EGP
It is forbidden to act manually on the conductor while it is being pulled between the winch and
the engine brake. The uncontrolled release of the conductor could cause serious damage to
operators and structures. If it is necessary to access the conductor at significant elevation above
ground level, use suitable hoisting means such as a mobile elevating work platform, ladders
supported by some element other than the conductor, or scaffolding;
EGP
Before starting the stringing operations, ground all the metal chassis of the mechanical equipment
employed (winch, brake, crane, metallic or conducting cable). For effective grounding via a good
contact with the chassis of any metal equipment, use the earthing bolt fitted precisely for this
purpose where available. In cases where there is no grounding bolt, the grounding cable may be
directly connected to a bare metal part of the chassis (free of paint or rust) with a clamp;
Tighten clamps or bolts firmly and sink the ground rods firmly into the soil (depth > 50 cm). With
regard to the conductor or the pull rope (if metal), grounding must be performed with the special
mobile roller device positioned both on the winch side and on the brake side;
EGP
It is good practice to position the winch and the brake on a metallic mesh grounded at the ends
and connected to the same ground rod used for grounding the mechanical equipment. The mesh
must extend for at least 1.5 metres beyond the footprint of the mechanical equipment to ensure
equipotentiality between the operator and the equipment itself;
During the stringing operations, while the conductor is in motion, operators must remain inside
the pylon structure to avoid being accidentally struck by a possible loosening of the conductor
(whiplash);
EGP
Before starting the stringing operations, evaluate the stresses to which the pylon is subject; if
necessary, providing adequate reinforcements (bracing, support tie-rods for crossbars or other);
In event of temporary suspension of activities (e.g. lunch breaks or bad weather), the worksite
must be safely secured, with particular attention to the anchoring of the conductors and the
segregation of areas where access is forbidden to non-authorised persons.
SECTION 5 - MANAGING INTERFERENCE WITH OVER OR UNDER-PASSING LIVE POWER LINES
In EGP worksites (particularly in Central/South America), when laying new HV overhead lines, it is normal to intercept other live power lines which force an under or over-pass. In these situations, the first objective should be to disconnect the interfering line, should this not be possible, the electrical risk for personnel
engaged in the work is particularly high. This risk is related to the possibility of contact or proximity induction, between the element being strung (pull rope, conductor or shield wire) and the intercepted live line. In both cases, the risk of electrocution for the workers on site is real and must be handled by adopting
measures that mitigate the risk of contact or the excessive proximity between elements being strung and the conductors of the intercepted live line. In order to perform this work in safety, it will therefore be necessary to implement specific work procedures on a case by case basis. These must take into account the electrical risk involved, provide for the use of highly qualified personnel and the use of dedicated
vehicles and tools (insulated ropes, special equipment, etc.). For the optimal control of electrical risk, it is essential to ensure the condition of equipotentiality between the operators and the mechanical equipment or structures (pylon or tubular poles) in contact with the element being strung. This chapter
lists the general safety criteria to be adopted for the execution of crossings with live lines, from the design phase to practical implementation:
DESIGN: Starting at the design phase, assess the possibility of minimizing interference with
external services (roads, power and telecommunications lines, other). Should it become inevitable
that other live power lines will be crossed, provide for an adequate length of the crossing segment
and an intersection angle as close as possible to 90° (this to minimize interference between the
lines);
REQUEST A POWER SHUTDOWN FOR LINE STRINGING OPERATIONS: When crossing other live
power lines, before carrying out the work, assess the possibility of a power shutdown on the
interfering line. This requires that arrangements be made in advance with the Owner/Network
Manager. If it favors the concession of a power shutdown by the Owner/Network Manager,
consider the possibility of performing the work during night-time. In fact, should it come to a
choice between the two options (daylight crossing work with a live interfering line or a night-time
crossing with the interfering line disconnected) the second option is preferable because, even if
the work is done at night, operations can proceed in greater safety and there is less risk to
workers;
REQUEST FOR POWER SHUTDOWN FOR THE ASSEMBLY OF PROTECTION STRUCTURES: If it is
not possible to put the HV line out of service for the time necessary to implement the crossing,
consider the possibility of a short power shutdown, possibly also at night-time, to allow at least
for the construction of protective structures capable of preventing contact/proximity between
elements being strung and the live interfering line;
EGP
WORK PROGRAMMING: It should be kept in mind that crossings with existing lines must always
be carried out against agreements with the Owner/Network Manager which may require notice
times of weeks or months. This also applies if the interfering line remains in service. In
consideration of the above, it is advisable to make the crossings as autonomous as possible with
respect to the construction of the rest of the power line. In this sense, it may be convenient to
anticipate the implementation of the supports of the crossing span with respect to the work on
the rest of the line. Being ready and being able to ask for authorization with considerable advance
can facilitate the power shutdown on the interfering line and avoid delays in the construction of
the power line, with rapid connection times to the network and production possibilities of the
plant. Finally, and more importantly, it must be considered that, planning work in advance, allows
a better assessment of the organization of the activity and greatly reduces the risks for workers;
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC RECLOSERS: Despite the above assessments, should it not be
possible to obtain a power shutdown of the interfering line, an agreement should be determined
with the relevant owner/manager to disable the automatic reclosing mechanisms. This condition
is essential both for the assembly of protection structures and the stringing of the new power line.
Automatic re-closers must remain disabled for the duration of the works. It is quite normal that
these stringing phases will last for a number of days; in such cases, if requested by the
Owner/Manager, the interfering line re-closers may be reset to automatic standby at the end of
the working day and disabled again when work restarts. In any case, the disabling of automatic
re-closers must always be checked before work begins. Failing this verification, work must not be
allowed to start;
WEATHER CONDITIONS: rain, humidity and strong winds can significantly reduce air-insulation
clearance. Also fog and haze can worsen electrical risk, since good visibility is a basic requisite
for safety in this type of work. Therefore, before starting the activity and during the work, assess
the prevailing weather conditions and how they are changing. In the event of poor weather
conditions, the works supervisor may decide to suspend operations if deemed appropriate. In this
case, the worksite must be secured in safety, adequately positioning suspended elements and
blocking the stringing machinery. Furthermore, all areas with access forbidden to unauthorized
persons must be properly segregated;
PROTECTIVE MEASURES AGAINST DIRECT CONTACT: Given the presence of an interfering live
power line, for safe execution of the crossing phase, it is advisable to install some means of
protection that ensures adequate clearance, also in the event of the strung line going slack. The
preparation of such a protective structure requires the drafting of a Technical Report which
describes the characteristics of the elements constituting the structure itself (cranes, scaffolding,
wooden poles, steel tie-rods, ropes, insulated ropes, other) and the relevant assembly procedure
(work methods, number of assigned workers, list of vehicles and equipment), as well as the
grounding system for metal parts, where applicable. A detailed drawing should be included in the
Technical Report, indicating the dimensions of the structure (height, width, protective mesh
gauge, other) and the clearances with respect to the live interfering line. The Technical Report
must also include the Design Calculations which ascertain the stability and strength of the
structure in the event of accidental fall of a conductor during handling. It should be noted that
the protective structure has the purpose of avoiding accidental proximity of the elements being
strung with the conductors of the live interfering line. Therefore, the structure cannot be used as
a support base for the elements being strung, which must always be kept at a distance to avoid
direct contact. In some cases, the assembly of a protective structure can be excessively complex
and laborious. In these cases, the solution for protection against direct contacts may consist of
an insulated net, equipped with sliding rings fitted to a load-bearing cable which is anchored to
the support structures straddling the crossing section;
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES FOR GUARDING AGAINST DIRECT CONTACTS IN MULTIPLE
CROSSINGS WITH LIVE UNDERPASSING HV AND MV LINES: In cases where a number of live HV
and MV lines are being crossed, it may be necessary to create specific protection structures for
each interfering line. In these cases, the structures will probably have various dimensions and
may be made from different materials. Nevertheless, all protective structures must be compatible
with each other and adequate in terms of height, clearance and mechanical resistance in the
event of a fall of the conductor being strung.
LINES HAVING MORE THAN ONE CONDUCTOR PER PHASE: In the case of lines with two or more
conductors per phase, always assess the possibility of handling one conductor at a time as this
facilitates the control of stringing operations and reduces the risks;
USE OF DUAL CLAMPS FOR TEMPORARY ANCHORING: For safety purposes, temporarily strung
conductors should be fastened by means of dual clamps. This condition must be enforced until all
EGP
operations are completed, i.e. until the strung conductor has been definitively anchored and
connected to its chain of insulators;
STRINGING WITH POWERED WINCH AND ENGINE BRAKE: Always consider the option of
completing the crossing by using a powered winch and an engine brake, as this method is safer
than manual stringing. In fact, the use of mechanical means allows for a better control of the pull
and facilitates the establishment of equipotential bonding between the workers and equipment in
use (a basic condition for the management of electrical risk when working on overhead lines);
MANUAL STRINGING: After a careful assessment, if the type of crossing does not allow for the
use of winch and brake (e.g. difficult access or problems in positioning mechanical equipment due
to lack of adequate space), then manual stringing remains the only option. In this case a
procedure must be defined that excludes the risk of contact or proximity between workers and
the element to be strung. In fact, with manual stringing, the control of the pull is less effective
and there is greater difficulty in ensuring equipotentiality for the workers;
EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING FOR WORKERS OPERATING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT: As previously
mentioned, equipotential bonding is a crucial safety criterion for the mitigation of electric risk for
workers on HV lines, especially when crossing live interfering lines. For effective equipotentiality,
the mechanical equipment must be placed on a suitably grounded metallic mesh, to which the
chassis of the equipment must be connected via the movable grounding device. This applies to
machinery such as the winch, brake and reel-lift stands as well as the element being strung (pull
rope, conductor, and shield wire) – see SECTION 4. The mesh pitch must be sufficient to ensure
effective contact with the operator's feet (50x50 mm). Should the mesh have a greater pitch
(maximum 100x100 mm), two overlapping meshes must be laid to ensure closer grid spacing.
Furthermore, the grounding mesh must over-extend by at least 1.5 meters along the entire
perimeter of the vehicle/equipment footprint so that an operator touching the mechanical
equipment is always standing on the equipotential mesh. The mesh deployed in this manner must
be grounded at its four corners and at the center with grounding rods sunk to at least 50 cm. Also
the reel-lift stand should rest on a grounded metal mesh which is equipotentially bonded to the
brake's ground mesh. All ground connections (clamps, connectors, terminals, etc.) must be clean,
free of oxide or paint and tightened securely to ensure an effective connection (see SECTION 4).
Workers who are not strictly involved in the task at hand must move away to a safe position. The
approach of personnel not directly involved in the work underway will be allowed only on the
express authorization of the works supervisor once the latter has ordered the necessary
precautions (suspension of stringing operations, blocking of mechanical equipment, etc.). Also
the crane, which is normally equipped with pulleys, must be properly grounded. To ensure proper
equipotential bonding between the crane and the operators engaged in handling operations, an
equipotential metal resting surface must be provided, with a structure similar to that envisaged
for the winch and brake. For large cranes, a partial ground mesh covering is allowed; it need not
occupy the entire footprint of the crane provided it ensures adequate protection to metal surfaces
typically in contact with the operators (control panel, cockpit access points, any other parts of the
chassis) with a 1.5 meters over-extension. Furthermore, the pulleys fitted to the crane must be
insulated to a rating appropriate for the voltage level of the interfering line;
EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING FOR WORKERS OPERATING ON SUPPORT STRUCTURES: As a rule, the
presence of operators on the support structures is required during stringing operations so that
they may give assistance as required. Operators working on the support structures straddling the
crossing section must take up positions at a safe distance from the element being strung. Should
it be necessary to come into contact with the same, it is always mandatory to establish
equipotential connection with the support structure before touching the element being strung with
the hands. For this purpose, the operator may use the equipotential device (ground terminal and
insulating stick) or the movable roller device if it has been previously connected between the
element being strung and the support structure;
INTERFERENCE WITH WORKS ON OTHER SUPPORT STRUCTURES ON THE SAME LINE SEGMENT:
When work is underway on the crossing span, operations planned on other support structures of
the same section should be suspended. In fact, if the support structures straddling the crossing
span are connected with other support structures of the same line (via shield wire, metal pull
rope and/or conductor on pulleys), a hazardous voltage could be transferred to all the
interconnected support structures of a given section, with increased electrical risk for all operators
working on the line. In the above described conditions, it is therefore necessary to avoid scheduled
operations on the section until all crossing-related work has been completed and all the
conductors and shield cables have been definitively anchored or blocked with a dual clamp if the
fastening is temporary. The same requirements as above must be adopted (EQUIPOTENTIAL
EGP
BONDING FOR WORKERS OPERATING ON SUPPORT STRUCTURES) if it is strictly necessary to
work simultaneously on the crossing span and on other support structures of the same section.
